Board Manual PDF

Index
Table of Index ............................................................................................... 1
Board Descriptions
Language Processing Board IN01ADP ........................................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
5 Technical Indices ................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
128-Module Alarm Board C841ALM ............................................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
Alarm Collecting Board CB01ALM ............................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Alarm Drive Board C841AMD ...................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 6
Power Alarm Monitoring/Drive Board CB01AMD ......................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 7
16-Channel, Programmable, Reverse Polarity, 16/12KC, Analog
Subscriber Board CB36ASL ......................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
SMT Analog Subscriber Board CC08ASL .................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
32-Channel 48V Analog Subscriber Board CC0HASL ................................. 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 External Cable ..................................................................................... 4
Voice Mailbox Board CB01AVM ................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
Bus Administration Control Board C841BAC ............................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Network Frame Bus Drive Board C841BDR ................................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
Broadband Transmit Unit Board CI01BTU ................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 4
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 6
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 7
Direct-Dial-In Subscriber Interface Board CC01CDI .................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
Clock Drive Board C841CKD ....................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main functions ...................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
Clock Source Board C841CKS .................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 5
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 8
Clock Drive Board CB01CKV ....................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
Network Frame Central Switching Netboard C841CNU ............................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
Central Processing Unit C842CPC .............................................................. 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 6
Plug-in Card of Centrex Operator Console C802CTX .................................. 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Centrex Console Card with PCI Interface C803CTX.................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
Law Analog Subscriber Board CC05DEL ..................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
Data Interface Board CB01DIU .................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
32-Port Dual Tone Number Receiving & Drive Board CB01DRV ................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
SMT Dual Tone Number Receiving & Drive Board CC06DRV .................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
8-Channel Remote Feed Digital Subscriber Board CB03DSL ..................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 5
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Digital Trunk Board CB12DTF ...................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 8
Dual Tone Transmit/Receive Board CC04DTR ............................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
T1 Digital Trunk Board C801DTT ................................................................. 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Emergency Action Board CC03EMA............................................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
16-Channel E1/T1 Interface Board C841ET16 ............................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 5
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 8
16-Channel E1/T1 Interface Board C842ET16 ............................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 5
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 7
ET16 Drive Card C841ETD .......................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
Frame Switching Netboard C841FSN .......................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
8-Channel Echo Canceller Board GM11GECP ............................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
5 Technical indices ................................................................................. 5
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Outlet Transfer Board C841HBC.................................................................. 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 2
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 2
High-Speed Synchronization Line Interface Board H301HSL ...................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Protocol Processing Board CB03LAP .......................................................... 6
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 6
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 6
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 7
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 10
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 12
Memory Board CB01MEM ........................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
MFC Processing Board CC04MFC, CB11MFC ........................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
Multi-HW Interface Board C841MHI ............................................................. 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Main Processor Unit CB35MPU ................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 6
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 7
Universal Main Control Board CB34MPU1 .................................................. 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 7
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 7
ESM 16K Time-Slot Switch Board CB03NET .............................................. 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 5
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
NetWork Board CB02NETA ......................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 5
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 6
Master Node Board CC02NOD .................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
40M Optic Interface Board C841OBC .......................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Remote Optical Fiber Interface Board C804OLE ......................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Optical Interface Board C805OPT ................................................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
STM-1 Optic Interface Board for ESM CB01OTU ........................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
Secondary Power Board CC05PWC ............................................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Secondary Power Board C841PWS ............................................................. 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Secondary Power Supply Board CC03PWX ................................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Secondary Power Supply Board CC04PWX ................................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Power X DC/DC Convertor H301PWX ......................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
High-Speed System Interface Board C841QSI ............................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 6
40M Remote Optical Interface Board C841RBC .......................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
RSA Control Board C806RSA ...................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Remote Subscriber Processing Board H301RSP ........................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 6
Remote Subscriber Processing Board H302RSP ........................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Remote T1 Interface Board C802RST ......................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Serial Port Drive Board C841RTD ................................................................ 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 2
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 3
128-Channel Signal Tone Board CB02SIG .................................................. 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
Small Net Control Cell C841SNC ................................................................. 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
Network Frame Edge Switching Netboard C841SNU .................................. 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Service Processing Board C842SPC ........................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Special Voice Board C841SPT .................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 5
Resources Sharing Board C841SRC ........................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 6
SDH Photoelectric Interface Board C842STU .............................................. 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 7
STU Conversion Card C842TMC ................................................................. 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 1
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 2
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 2
Test Board CC07TSS ................................................................................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 3
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 4
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 7
Message Indicator Analog Subscriber Line Board CB01VMS ..................... 1
1 Overview .............................................................................................. 1
2 Main Functions ..................................................................................... 1
3 Panel .................................................................................................... 2
4 Layout .................................................................................................. 3
6 Attention ............................................................................................... 4
Appendix.........................................................................................
Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations .................................................... 1
HUAWEI
1. Index
2. Board Descriptions
3. Appendix
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System

Board Manual
OVSV610R103
Board Manual
Manual Version T2-012321-20041130-C-4.10
Product Version OVSV610R103
BOM 31230021
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support
and service. Please feel free to contact our local office, customer care center or company
headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Copyright © 2004 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved
No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, SoftX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE,
OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
About This Manual
Version
The product version that corresponds to the manual is C&C08 Digital SPC Switching
System OVSV610R103.
Related Manuals
The following manuals provide more information about the C&C08 Digital SPC
Switching System.
Manual Content
It introduces almost all the boards available in the C&C08 Digital

C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System SPC Switching System. For each board, it describes its functions,
Board Manual features, interface signal, functional principle and technical
Indexes.
It offers an overall introduction to the C&C08 Digital SPC

Switching System, including the system structure, hardware
Technical Manual
functions, software functions, services and applications.
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System It is used for assisting the users in data configurations and typical
Operation Manual applications.
It provides information for the system installation, including the

installation of the cabinets, cables, power system and various
Installation Manual
boards.
It consists of two volumes. The Troubleshooting Volume details on

how to locate and process common faults in the C&C08 Digital
SPC Switching System, while the Routine Maintenance Volume
Maintenance Manual
offers operational methods and maintenance suggestions for
routine maintenance and special maintenance.
Organization of the Manual
z The manual introduces the main boards of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching
System.
z There are two parts in the manual.
Index is arranged in the alphabetical order of the circuit board names, so that the
readers can find the board data quickly.
Board Descriptions presents the functions, features, interface signal, functional
principle and technical indexes of each board. It also describes panels, indicators,
switches, jumpers of each board.
Appendix collects the acronyms and abbreviations used in the manual.
Intended Readers
The manual is intended for the following readers:

z Installation engineers and technicians
z Operation and maintenance personnel
Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions:
I. General conventions
Convention Description
Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.
Arial Narrow Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips are in Arial Narrow.
Boldface Headings are in Boldface.
II. Keyboard operation
Format Description
Press the key with the key name inside angle brackets. For example, <Enter>,
<Key>
<Tab>, <Backspace>, or <A>.
Press the keys concurrently. For example, <Ctrl+Alt+A> means the three keys
<Key1+Key2>
should be pressed concurrently.
Press the keys in turn. For example, <Alt, A> means the two keys should be
<Key1, Key2>
pressed in turn.
III. Mouse operation
Action Description
Click Press the left button or right button quickly (left button by default).
Double Click Press the left button twice continuously and quickly.
Drag Press and hold the left button and drag it to a certain position.
IV. Symbols
Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of
special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:
Note: Means a complementary description.

HUAWEI

Board Manual
Index
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Table of Index
Table of Index
Note: The index is arranged in the alphabetical order of the circuit board names.
Circuit Board Name Full Name Index Code

ADP (IN01ADP) Language Processing Board B-Intr/ADP
ALM (C841ALM) 128-Module Alarm Board B-Intr/C841ALM
ALM (CB01ALM) Alarm Collecting Board B-Intr/CB01ALM
AMD (C841AMD) Alarm Drive Board B-Intr/C841AMD
AMD (CB01AMD) Power Alarm Monitoring/Drive Board B-Intr/CB01AMD
ASL (CB36ASL) 16-Channel, Programmable, Reverse Polarity, B-Intr/CB36ASL
16/12KC, Analog Subscriber Board
ASL (CC08ASL) SMT Analog Subscriber Board B-Intr/CC08ASL
ASL (CC0HASL) 32-Channel 48V Analog Subscriber Board B-Intr/CC0HASL
AVM (CB01AVM) Voice Mailbox Board B-Intr/CB01AVM
BAC (C841BAC) Bus Administration Control Board B-Intr/C841BAC

BDR (C841BDR) Network Frame Bus Drive Board B-Intr/C841BDR
BTU(CI01BTU) Broadband Transmit Unit Board B-Intr/BTU
CDI (CC01CDI) Direct-Dial-In Subscriber Interface Board B-Intr/CC01CDI

CKD (C841CKD) Clock Drive Board B-Intr/CKD
CKS (C841CKS) Clock Source Board B-Intr/CKS
CKV (CB01CKV) Clock Drive Board B-Intr/CKV
CNU (C841CNU) Network Frame Central Switching Netboard B-Intr/CNU
CPC (C842CPC) Central Processing Unit B-Intr/CPC
CTX (C802CTX) Plug-in Card of Centrex Operator Console B-Intr/C802CTX
CTX (C803CTX) Centrex Console Card with PCI Interface B-Intr/C803CTX
DEL (CC05DEL) µ Law Analog Subscriber Board B-Intr/DEL

DIU (CB01DIU) Data Interface Board B-Intr/DIU
DRV (CB01DRV) 32-Port Dual Tone Number Receiving & Drive Board B-Intr/CB01DRV
DRV (CC06DRV) SMT Dual Tone Number Receiving & Drive Board B-Intr/CC06DRV
DSL (CB03DSL) 8-Channel Remote Feed Digital Subscriber Board B-Intr/DSL
DTF (CB12DTF) Digital Trunk Board B-Intr/DTF
DTR (CC04DTR) Dual Tone Transmit/Receive Board B-Intr/DTR
DTT (C801DTT) T1 Digital Trunk Board B-Intr/DTT
EMA (CC03EMA) Emergency Action Board B-Intr/EMA

ET16 (C841ET16) 16-Channel E1/T1 Interface Board B-Intr/C841ET16
ET16 (C842ET16) 16-Channel E1/T1 Interface Board B-Intr/C842ET16
ETD (C841ETD) ET16 Drive Card B-Intr/ETD
FSN (C841FSN) Frame Switching Netboard B-Intr/FSN
GECP (GM11GECP) 8-Channel Echo Canceller Board B-Intr/GECP
HBC (C841HBC) Outlet Transfer Board B-Intr/HBC

HSL (H301HSL) High-Speed Synchronization Line Interface Board B-Intr/HSL
LAP (CB03LAP) Protocol Processing Board B-Intr/LAP
MEM (CB01MEM) Memory Board B-Intr/MEM

MFC (CC04MFC, CB11MFC) MFC Processing Board B-Intr/MFC
1
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Table of Index
Circuit Board Name Full Name Index Code

MHI (C841MHI) Multi-HW Interface Board B-Intr/MHI
MPU (CB35MPU) Universal Main Control Board B-Intr/CB35MPU
MPU (CB34MPU1) Universal Main Control Board B-Intr/CB34MPU1
NET (CB03NET) ESM 16K Time-Slot Switch Board B-Intr/NET

NETA (CB02NETA) NetWork Board B-Intr/NETA
NOD (CC02NOD) Master Node Board B-Intr/NOD
OBC (C841OBC) 40M Optic Interface Board B-Intr/OBC

OLE (C804OLE) Remote Optical Fiber Interface Board B-Intr/OLE
OPT (C805OPT) Optical Interface Board B-Intr/OPT
OTU (CB01OTU) STM-1 Optic Interface Board for ESM B-Intr/OTU
PWC (CC05PWC) Secondary Power Board B-Intr/PWC

PWS (C841PWS) Secondary Power Board B-Intr/PWS
PWX (CC04PWX) Secondary Power Supply Board B-Intr/CC04PWX
PWX (CC03PWX) Secondary Power Supply Board B-Intr/CC03PWX
PWX (H301PWX) Power X DC/DC Convertor B-Intr/H301PWX
QSI (C841QSI) High-Speed System Interface Board B-Intr/QSI
RBC (C841RBC) 40M Remote Optical Interface Board B-Intr/RBC

RSA (C806RSA) RSA Control Board B-Intr/RSA
RSP (H301RSP) Remote Subscriber Processing Board B-Intr/H301RSP
RSP (H302RSP) Remote Subscriber Processing Board B-Intr/H302RSP
RST (C802RST) Remote T1 Interface Board B-Intr/RST
RTD (C841RTD) Serial Port Drive Board B-Intr/RTD
SIG (CB02SIG) 128-Channel Signal Tone Board B-Intr/SIG

SNC (C841SNC) Small Net Control Cell B-Intr/C841SNC
SNU (C841SNU) Network Frame Edge Switching Netboard B-Intr/SNU
SPC (C842SPC) Service Processing Board B-Intr/SPC
SPT (C841SPT) Special Voice Board B-Intr/SPT
SRC (C841SRC) Resources Sharing Board B-Intr/SRC
STU (C842STU) SDH Photoelectric Interface Board B-Intr/STU
TMC (C842TMC) STU Conversion Card B-Intr/TMC

TSS (CC07TSS) Test Board B-Intr/TSS
VMS (CB01VMS) Message Indicator Analog Subscriber Line Board B-Intr/VMS
2
HUAWEI

Board Manual
Board Descriptions
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/ADP
Language Processing Board IN01ADP
1 Overview
The IN01ADP is an extended unit of the intelligent services of the C&C08 Switching
System and is connected with the corresponding interface of the C&C08 Switching
System through the serial bus. The ADP provides some value-added services, such as
voice mailbox and audio communication service. It also provides voice information
storing and transferring functions for the switching system, which is implemented by a
voice information-processing unit. It has a large capacity, high density and provides
real-time services.
2 Main Functions
The IN01ADP is a plug-in board of the Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus. It is
plugged into the industrial computer of the voice platform and is connected with the
Voice Mailbox Board (AVM) of the C&C08 Switching System by the serial port and
HighWays (HW) of 2 Mbit/s. The ADP compresses the Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)
code flow of the downlink HW of the AVM to obtain Adaptive Differential Pulse Code
Modulation (ADPCM) code flow, which is written into the hard disk through the
computer in the interruption mode after it is cached by the buffer. The reverse process
is implemented for the uplink HW.
I. Board functions
1) Playback function: Converts the ADPCM data from the terminal into PCM signal
and sends it out.
2) Audio recording function: Converts the PCM signal into ADPCM data and sends it
to the terminal system.
II. Main features
1) A signal board processes only one HW, that is, 32-channel voice service.
2) An industrial computer can be plugged in with a maximum of two ADPs.
3) The maximum cable length between an ADP and the AVM is 15 meters.
4) The voice-processing unit uses a special digital signal processor.
III. Hardware interface signal
1) Provides Clock and HW differential signal to connect the AVM.

2) Provides the serial port signal for communication to connect the AVM.
1
Board Manual
3) Provides the ISA bus to communicate with the computer.
IV. Functional principle
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the IN01ADP.
Delay
Signal processing module

Optical isolation module
adjustment
module
Merging module
Buffer module
AVM Bus
Clock
processing
module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the IN01ADP
Optical isolation module: Provides the signal interface to the AVM.
Delay adjustment module: Adjusts the HW delay from the AVM to the ADP.
Clock processing module: Receives the Clock signal sent from the AVM and generates
the Clock signal for this board.
Signal processing module: Provides the real-time and full-duplex ADPCM coding and
decoding functions of the 32-channel voice data.
Merging module: The compressed ADPCM code flow is converted into the 8-bit code
flow by the merging circuit.
Buffer module: The 8-bit data is written into the buffer under the control of the
sequential circuit. Each time-slot corresponds to a segment of the buffer. It transfers the
voice data between the host and the voice-processing unit.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the IN01ADP.
2
Board Manual
Figure 2 IN01ADP panel
There is no indicator on this board.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the Dual In-line Package (DIP) switches and jumpers on
the IN01ADP.
S1
1
2
3
J4 J3
1 2 3 4
Figure 3 DIP switches and jumpers on the IN01ADP
1) DIP switch S1
Active board: S1.2-S1.3 ON;
Standby board: S1.1-S1.2 ON.

2) Jumper J4: Permanently disconnected or open.
3
Board Manual
3) Jumper J3: Selects the interruption signals Interrupt (INT) 6, INT7, INT11 and
INT12 (counting from left to right).
a) Active board: Selects any one signal for interruption, and INT7 is recommended (that
is, set the jumper in the 2nd position ON and others OFF). If there is any variation with
the jumper setting of other boards, select other interruption signals, namely, INT6,
INT11 or INT12.
b) Standby board: Sets all the jumpers OFF, that is, all are disconnected.
5 Technical Indices
1) ADPCM coding conforms to International Telecommunication Union -
Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T) recommendations G.721,
G.723 and G.726.
2) Number of voice channels: 32
3) Bus type: ISA
4) Transmission distance of the external interface: Less than 15 meters
5) Power consumption of a single board: Less than 5 W
6 Attention
It must be assured that the jumpers of the active and standby boards are set correctly.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/C841ALM
128-Module Alarm Board C841ALM
1 Overview
The C841ALM is located in the main control frame of the Administration

Module/Communication Module (AM/CM), and serves as the transfer point across
which the Administration Processor Board (AMP) exchanges information with multiple
boards (PWS, AMD, and so on), in order to maintain these boards and collect their
alarm information.
Note:
The CB01ALM and C841ALM are the alarm boards of the Switching Module (SM) and AM/CM respectively.
They have the same hardware, but different DIP switch and jumper settings. In addition, the mailbox
communication, alarm indicator drive and High Level Data Link Control (HDLC) communication functions
of the CB01ALM are unavailable in the C841ALM.
2 Main Functions
The C841ALM serves as the transfer point for the communication between AMP and
multiple boards (PWS, AMD, and so on), which transfers the data sent by the AMP to
the ALM to all the other boards, and then, reports the various board data to the AMP.
The C841ALM communicates with the AMP through the serial ports in the point-to-point
mode, and communicates with various other boards through the serial ports in the
master/slave-node mode.
I. Board functions
1) Communicates with the AMP through the serial ports in the point-to-point mode,
and transfers the commands sent by the AMP.
2) Communicates with multiple boards through the serial ports in the
master/slave-node mode and transfers the board’s data report information.
II. Main features
1) Transfers the communication information between the AMP and other boards.
1
Board Manual
2) Provides the backup mailbox communication interface in order to communicate
with other modules.
3) Provides the backup HDLC communication interface for remote maintenance and
alarm.
1) Provides the interface signal of the emergency serial port.

2) Provides the point-to-point serial port to connect the AMP.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841ALM.
RS232 Serial port

CPU control comm module AMP
module
RS422 Serial port Emergency serial port

comm module
Bus
Mailbox HDLC interface module
interface module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841ALM
CPU control module: Maintains the board status and manages & configures the serial
port communication.
RS232 serial port communication module: Handles the point-to-point communication

between ALM and AMPs.
RS422 serial port communication module: Handles the communication between

Master nodes and Slave nodes.
Mailbox interface module: Provides the backup mailbox communication function.
HDLC interface module: Provides the backup HDLC communication function.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841ALM.
2
Board Manual
RUN
LD1
LD2
LD3
LD4
LD5
LD6
LD7
ALM
Figure 2 C841ALM panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the board indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841ALM indicators
Indicator Color Description Meaning Normal state

1. Flashes slowly: Indicates that the board is
working normally.
RUN Red Indicator Flashes slowly
2. Flashes fast: Indicates that the data is not
configured.
1. ON: Indicates the board is faulty.
LD1 Green Fault indicator OFF
2. OFF: Indicates the board is working normally.
Others Green Reserved for future use
2) Reset switches and DIP switches

None.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the DIP switches and jumpers on the C841ALM.
3
Board Manual
ON S1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
JB1
JP2 JP1 JP3
JB2
Figure 3 DIP switches and jumpers on the C841ALM
The DIP switch and jumpers as shown in Figure 3 are of no meaning. There is no need
to set them and this is not described here.
5 Technical Indices
1) Provides four RS422 serial ports, and the Baud rate is 187.5 kbit/s.
2) Provides four RS232 serial ports.
3) The basic Central Processing Unit (CPU) frequency is 16.384 MHz.
6 Attention
None.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CB01ALM
Alarm Collecting Board CB01ALM
1 Overview
The CB01ALM is located in the main control frame of the SM, drives the row and
column alarm indicators of the main control rack, collects the information of the power
supply, environmental and equipment status in the equipment room, and sends the
alarm signal to the alarm box.
Note:
The CB01ALM and C841ALM are the alarm boards of the SM and AM/CM respectively. They have the
similar hardware, but the settings of the DIP switches and jumpers are different. In addition, the
CB01ALM provides such functions as mailbox communication, alarm indicator driving, HDLC
communication, while these functions are unavailable in the C841ALM.
2 Main Functions
The CB01ALM provides alarm channels for the C&C08 Switching System, drives row
and column alarm indicators of the SM main control rack, collects the information of
power supply, environmental and equipment status (Boolean values) in the
equipment room, and sends alarm signals to the alarm box. Simultaneously, the
CB01ALM provides communication channels between the Clock Monitoring Board
(SLT) and the host.
I. Board functions
1) Drives the row and column alarm indicators of the main control rack.
2) Provides equipment-room environment hardware interface, collects the
information of the power supply, environmental and equipment status (Boolean
values) in the equipment room and sends the alarm signal to the alarm box.
3) Provides the function to cascade alarm boxes.
II. Main features
The board provides a reserved HDLC communication interface to implement remote

maintenance and alarm functions.
1
Board Manual
1) Provides four RS232 serial ports to transfer bill information.

2) Provides four RS422 serial ports to connect with the equipment, such as alarm
box, clock frame.
3) Provides two HDLC synchronous serial ports of 64 kbit/s to connect with the
network board, occupying two time slots of a HW.
4) Provides the mailbox communication interface with the Main Processor Unit
Board (MPU).
5) Provides drive signals for row and column alarm indicators.
6) Receives eight environmental Boolean value signals.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB01ALM.
Main control Boolean value alarm

module collecting module
NET HDLC interface Row and column alarm

module indicator drive module
MPU Serial port

Mailbox interface
module communication module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB01ALM
Main control module: Performs the maintenance of the board status and management
& configuration of the serial port communication.
HDLC interface module: Provides HDLC communication function and implements

remote monitoring.
Mailbox interface module: Provides mailbox communication function and reports the
alarm information to the MPU.
Boolean value alarm collecting module: Monitors the signal-processing interface of

the environmental alarm.Row and column alarm indicator drive module: Turns on or
turn off the corresponding alarm indicator according to the alarm level.
Serial port communication module: Performs the differential level conversion and
information transfer functions.
2
Board Manual
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB01ALM.
RUN
LD1
LD2
LD3
LD4
LD5
LD6
LD7
ALM
Figure 2 CB01ALM panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB01ALM indicators
Indicator Color Description Meaning Normal status

1. Flashes slowly: Indicates that the board is
working normally.
2. Flashes fast: Indicates that the data is not
configured.
1. ON: Transmission and receiving of data is
Communication indicator with
LD1 Green ok. ON
the alarm box
2. OFF: No data is transmitted and received.
1. ON: Transmission and receiving of data is
Communication indicator with
LD7 Green ok. ON
the clock frame
2. OFF: No data is transmitted and received.
LD2-LD6 Green Reserved for future use

None.
3
Board Manual
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the DIP switches and jumpers on the CB01ALM.
ON S1
JB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
JP2 JP1 JP3
JB2
Figure 3 DIP switches and jumpers on the CB01ALM
1) DIP switch S1
Refer to Table 2 for the meanings of the DIP switch S1 on the CB01ALM.
Table 2 Meanings of the DIP switch S1 on the CB01ALM
Location Status Meaning Normal status

ON It is to run the self-test program.
1 OFF
OFF Operation status of the board is normal.
ON The board is used in an SM.
2 ON
OFF The board is not used in an SM.
3 Reserved for future use OFF
ON The board is used in the AM.
4 OFF
OFF The board is not used in the AM.
ON Indicating request for loading software of this board
8 OFF
OFF Indicating to run the program available in Flash directly
2) Jumpers JP1, JP2 and JP3

To set the interface between link HWs and the network board as ‘differential mode’ or
‘Transistor-Transistor Logic (TTL) mode’, refer to Table 3 for the setting of the
jumpers.
4
Board Manual
Table 3 Setting of the jumpers on the CB01ALM
JP1 status JP2 status JP3 status Output mode

1-2 IN 1-2 IN 1-2 IN Differential mode
2-3 IN 2-3 IN 2-3 IN TTL mode
5 Technical Indices
1) CPU master frequency is 16 MHz.
2) Provides 8-channel serial ports (four RS232 and four RS422 serial ports) to be
connected with peripherals.
6 Attention
None.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/C841AMD
Alarm Drive Board C841AMD
1 Overview
The C841AMD is located in the set top box of the AM/CM welded cabinet. It is the
monitoring equipment of the power supply, heat-sink and environmental equipment,
which collects and processes the alarms of the welded cabinet, including the audio
and visual alarms.
Note:
There are two kinds of AMDs: C841AMD and CB01AMD. The two boards have different jacks. The
C841AMD is used in the Background Administration Module (BAM) cabinet and the welded cabinet,
while the CB01AMD is used in the consolidated cabinets. The RUN indicator of the C841AMD is green
and its FAIL indicator is red, while the RUN indicator of the CB01AMD is red and its FAIL indicator is
green.
2 Main Functions
The boards in each frame of the AM/CM report their faults to the ALM through the
emergency serial port or the HDLC link. While processing the alarm information, the
ALM commands the AMD to drive the row & column alarm indicators and also
reports the alarm information to the alarm box. Simultaneously, the AMD collects
information of various environmental alarms and reports it to the ALM.
I. Board functions
1) Monitors the status of the primary power supply.

2) Monitors the status of the fan.
3) Monitors the status of each power switch on the front panel of the cabinet.
4) Monitors the status of the secondary power supply.
5) Provides the alarm interface for the cabinet's access control.
6) Provides the function of driving the row and column alarm indicators of the
cabinet.
1
Board Manual
II. Main features
1) If any of the switches is not closed, the cabinet power supply will send out an
alarm.
2) The monitored secondary power supply is mainly the Secondary Power Board
(PWC) and Secondary Power Supply Board (PWX).
3) There are two power inputs of -48 V, whose voltage range is -36 V to -72 V. An
alarm will be sent out if any of the input power line is faulty or if the voltage is
out of range.
1) Provides an input signal of the external Boolean value.

2) Provides driving signals for row and column indicators.
3) Provides the communication for the RS422 serial port with the AMP through the
alarm board.
4) Provides the communication for the RS232 serial port with the background
directly.
5) Provides nine input signals for fan monitoring.
6) Provides six input signals for PWC/PWX status monitoring.
7) Provides the power status interface of -48 V in each frame.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841AMD.
-48V Primary power Alarm indication

test module module
Address code Row/column indicator Row/column

input module drive module indicators
Fan Fan pulse Serial port Emergency

test module drive module serial port
PWC Secondary power

PWX test module
Main control
Boolean value signal module
Environmental
interface module
signal
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841AMD
Primary power test module: Monitors the voltage of the two primary power supplies
of -48 V.
Address code input module: Accesses the cabinet number.
Fan pulse test module: Tests whether the fan is working normally.
Secondary power test module: Monitors the status of the PWC and PWX.
2
Board Manual
Boolean value signal interface module: Same as the PWC/PWX status signals. It is
used to introduce the gate magnetic Boolean value and other alarm parameters.
Alarm indication module: Controls the audible and visual alarms of the board.
Row/column indicator drive module: Drives the row and column alarm Indicators on
the cabinet according to the alarm severity levels.
Serial port drive module: Communicates with the ALM which is the master node.
Main control module: Collects the alarm status of the board and receives the MPU's
driving information of the row and column indicators.
3 Panel
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841AMD indicators

1. Flashes slowly: Indicates the board is working
normally.
RUN Green Indicator Flashes slowly
2. Flashes fast: Indicates the board is not working
normally.
1. ON: Indicates the board is faulty.
FAIL Red Fault indicator OFF
2. OFF: Indicates the board is working normally.
4 Layout
Figure 2 shows the layout of the DIP switches and jumpers on the C841AMD.
3
Board Manual
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 1 2 ON S1
S2 S3
J2
J5 J4
J7 J6
J9 J8
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 2 DIP switches and jumpers on the C841AMD
1) 8-bit DIP switch S1

It is used to set the communication address code. Only 5 bits D0 to D4 of the DIP
switch are effective.
Table 2 gives the setting of the address DIP switch on the AMD.
Table 2 Setting of the DIP switch on the C841AMD
DIP switch setting

Cabinet type AMD address code
D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
AM (AM main control cabinet) 0 0 0 0 0 0
BAM (BAM basic cabinet) 1 0 0 0 0 1
BAM (BAM auxiliary cabinet) 2 0 0 0 1 0
LIM1 (1st interface cabinet) 3 0 0 0 1 1
LIM2 (2nd interface cabinet) 4 0 0 1 0 0
LIM3 (3rd interface cabinet) 5 0 0 1 0 1
SRM (SRM cabinet) 16 1 0 0 0 0
SPM1 (1st SPM cabinet) 17 1 0 0 0 1
SPM2 (2nd SPM cabinet) 18 1 0 0 1 0
SPM3 (3rd SPM cabinet) 19 1 0 0 1 1

The first bit of S3 is reserved for future use, and the second is used to see whether
the matching resistance of the differential serial port is accessed or not. If it is OFF,
the matching resistance is disconnected; if it is ON, the matching resistance
accesses the serial port circuit.
4
Board Manual
It is used to select the type of the output interface. Table 3 shows the corresponding
relations between the bit position of the DIP switch S2 and the interface types.
Table 3 The relation between the DIP switch S2 and the interface types
First 2 bits of S2 Last 2 bits of S2 Interface type

All are ON All are OFF The output interface is RS232.
All are OFF All are ON The output interface is RS422.
The output port is suspended and the
All are OFF All are OFF
AMD works independently.
Does not support; otherwise, some
All are ON All are ON
components may be damaged.
Does not support; otherwise, the
Other combinations Other combinations
components may be damaged.
4) Jack J1
J1.1 and J1.2 are for RS422 serial ports, J1.7 is for the alarm line of the inverter
(BAM cabinet) / alarm input of the power supply in the clock frame (AM cabinet),
and J1.8 is for the input of the four to six status alarm of fans.
5) Jack J2
It is used to input the power supply of -48 V and the power switch signals.
6) Jack J4
It is used to connect the signal input from the upper frame fan.
7) Jack J5
This connects the alarm switch and indicator line, which is connected to the cabinet
panel.
8) Jack J6
This connects the row indicators interconnection line, which is connected to the
preceding cabinet.
9) Jack J7
This connects the row indicators interconnection line, which is connected to the
following cabinet.
10) Jack J8
This connects the column indicators control line, which is connected to the column
indicators of the cabinet.
11) Jack J9
This connects the row indicators control line, which is connected to the row
indicators of the cabinet.
5
Board Manual
5 Technical Indices
1) The differential signal interface conforms to the RS422 standard and its Baud
rate is 187.5 kbit/s.
2) The RS232 signal interface conforms to the RS232 standard and its Baud rate
is 4.8 kbit/s.
3) The input voltage of the power supply of -48 V is from -36 V to -72 V, and the
maximum value of the current is 200 mA.
4) The output voltage of the row and column indicator interface is +5 V, and the
maximum value of the load current of a single channel is 150 mA.
5) The signal level should not be more than 5 V for ‘high’ level and not less than
0 V for ‘low’ level.
6) The signal drive capability requirement is such that, the voltage is not less than
4 V while the ‘high’ level output current is 4 mA; there is no such requirement in
the case of ‘low’ level.
7) The signal frequency should not be more than 200 Hz.
6 Attention
1) As the AMD is the slave node of the ALM, its address code ranges from 0 to 31
and cannot be repeated.
2) The code of the AMD is set according to the cabinet type and it is required to
specify the type of the AMD in the BAM as “BAM cabinet”.
3) In the engineering installation process, Figure 3 shows the committed address
codes.
1 5 4 3 0 16 17 18 19
15 11 7 3 19 23 27 31
14 10 6 2 18 22 26 30
13 9 5 1 17 21 25 29
12 8 4 0 16 20 24 28
Wall BAM LIM3 LIM2 LIM1 AM SRM SPM1 SPM2 SPM3
Figure 3 Setting of the AMD address codes in each cabinet
4) In the description of the DIP switch locations, “0” means the relevant DIP switch
is OFF; “1” means the relevant DIP switch is ON.
5) During the engineering installation process, access only the matching
resistance of the AMD in the BAM cabinet, and disconnect the matching
resistance of the remaining cabinets.
6) In general, the output interface mode is set as RS422.
6
Board Manual
7) When installing the J1 jack cable, note that the side printed with red lines
should face upwards, and the side bearing the trademark should face
downwards.
7
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CB01AMD
Power Alarm Monitoring/Drive Board CB01AMD
1 Overview
The CB01AMD is located in the set top box of the AM/CM, and is the monitoring
equipment of the power supply, heat-sink and the environment monitoring devices in
the AM. It collects & processes the alarms of the above equipment, including their
audio and visual alarms.
2 Main Functions
The boards in each frame of the AM/CM report their faults to the ALM through the
emergency serial port or the HDLC link. While processing the alarm information, the
ALM commands the AMD to drive the row & column alarm Indicators and also
reports the alarm information to the alarm box. Simultaneously, the AMD collects the
information of various environment alarms and reports it to the ALM.
I. Board functions
1) Monitors the status of the primary power supply.

2) Monitors the status of the fan.
3) Monitors the status of each power switch on the front panel of the cabinet.
4) Monitors the status of the secondary power supply.
5) Provides the alarm interface for the cabinet's access control.
6) Provides the function of driving the row and column alarm indicators of the
cabinet.
II. Main features
1) The cabinet power supply will send out an alarm if any of the switches are not
closed.
2) The monitored secondary power supply is mainly the PWC and PWX.
3) There are two power inputs of -48 V, with a voltage range of -36 V to -72 V. An
alarm will be sent out if any of the input power line is faulty or the voltage is out
of range.
1) Provides an input signal of the external Boolean value.

2) Provides driving signals for row and column indicators.
1
Board Manual
3) Provides the communication for the RS-422 serial port with the AMP through
the alarm board.
4) Provides the communication for the RS-232 serial port with the background
directly.
5) Provides nine input signals for fan monitoring.
6) Provides six input signals for PWC/PWX status monitoring.
7) Provides the power status interface of -48 V in each frame.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB01AMD.
-48V Primary power Alarm indication

test module module
Address code Row/column indicator Row/column

input module drive module indicators
Fan Fan pulse Serial port Emergency

test module drive module serial port
PWC Secondary power

PWX test module
Main control
Boolean value signal module
Environmental
interface module
signal
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB01AMD
Primary power test module: Monitors the voltage of the two primary power supplies
of -48 V.
Address code input module: Accesses the cabinet number.
Fan pulse test module: Tests whether the fan is working normally.
Secondary power test module: Monitors the status of the PWC and PWX.
Boolean value signal interface module: Same as the PWC/PWX status signals. It is
used to introduce the gate magnetic Boolean value and other alarm parameters.
Alarm indication module: Controls the audible and visual alarms of the board.
Row/column indicator drive module: Drives the row and column alarm Indicators on
the cabinet according to the alarm severity levels.
Serial port drive module: Communicates with the ALM which is the master node.
Main control module: Collects the alarm status of the board and receives the MPU's
driving information of the row and column indicators.
2
Board Manual
3 Panel
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB01AMD indicators

When the board is working normally, it is ON for ON for one second
RUN Red Indicator one second and OFF for the next second. and OFF for the next
second
1. ON: The board is faulty.
FAIL Green Fault indicator OFF
2. OFF: The board is working normally.
4 Layout
There are three DIP switches on the AMD, of which, one is the 8-bit DIP switch S1,
one is the 4-bit DIP switch S2, and one is the 2-bit DIP switch S3. There are jacks
J1~J18.

It is used to set the communication address code. Only 5 bits D0 to D4 of the DIP
switch are effective out of the eight bits.
Table 2 gives the setting of the address DIP switch on the AMD.
Table 2 Setting of the DIP switch on the CB01AMD
DIP switch setting

Cabinet type AMD address code
D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
AM (AM main control cabinet) 0 0 0 0 0 0
LIM1 (1st interface cabinet) 3 0 0 0 1 1
LIM2 (2nd interface cabinet) 4 0 0 1 0 0
LIM3 (3rd interface cabinet) 5 0 0 1 0 1
SRM (SRM cabinet) 16 1 0 0 0 0
SPM1 (1st SPM cabinet) 17 1 0 0 0 1
SPM2 (2nd SPM cabinet) 18 1 0 0 1 0
SPM3 (3rd SPM cabinet) 19 1 0 0 1 1

The first bit of the DIP switch S3 is reserved for future user, and the second is used
to see whether the matching resistance of the differential serial port is accessed or
not. If it is OFF, the matching resistance is disconnected; if it is ON, the matching
resistance accesses the serial port circuit.
It is used to select the type of the output interface. Table 3 shows the relation
between the bit position of the DIP switch S2 and the interface types.
3
Board Manual
Table 3 The relation between the DIP switch S2 positions and the interface types
First 2 bits of S2 Last 2 bits of S2 Interface type

The output interface is RS232; used in the AM cabinet (32-AM) and
All are ON All are OFF
SM cabinet.
All are OFF All are ON The output interface is RS422; used in the AM cabinet (128-AM).
All are OFF All are OFF Does not support; otherwise, some components may be damaged.
All are ON All are ON Does not support; otherwise, some components may be damaged.
Other combinations Other combinations Does not support; otherwise, the components may be damaged.
4) The meanings of the jacks are as given as follows.

z J1, fan signal input connector, the definition is as follows:
PIN No. 1 2 3 4
DEFINE Fan 1 signal Fan 2 signal input Fan 3 signal input suspended
input end end end

PIN No. 1 2 3 4
Fan 4 signal Fan 5 signal input Fan 6 signal input suspended
DEFINE input end end end

PIN No. 1 2 3 4
DEFINE Fan 7 signal Fan 8 signal input Fan 9 signal input suspended
input end end end
z J4, row indicator interconnection connector, connected with the last cabinet, the
definition is as follows:
PIN No. 1 2 3 4
DEFINE Control cable Control cable of row Control cable end GND
of row indicator 2 of row indicator 3
indicator 1
z J5, row indicator interconnection connector, connected with the following

cabinet, the definition is as follows:
PIN No. 1 2 3 4
DEFINE Control cable Control cable of row Control cable end GND
of row indicator 2 of row indicator 3
indicator 1
z J6, row indicator interconnection connector, connected with this cabinet, the
PIN No. 1 2 3 4
Row indicator Control cable of row Control cable of Control cable of
DEFINE common end indicator 1 row indicator 2 row indicator 3
4
Board Manual
(+5 V)
z J7, column indicator interconnection connector, connected with this cabinet, the
PIN No. 1 2 3 4
DEFINE Line indicator Control cable of row Control cable of Control cable of
common end indicator 1 row indicator 2 row indicator 3
(+5 V)
z J8, power alarm input connector, the definition is as follows:

PIN No. 1 2 3 4
DEFINE PSALM1+ PSALM1- PSALM2+ PSALM2-

PIN No. 1 2 3 4

PIN No. 1 2 3 4
z J11, alarm switches and indicator connection connector, connected with the
panel of this cabinet, the definition is as follows:
PIN No. 1 2 3 4
DEFINE Indicator positive Indicator negative Connection end of GND
electrode (+5 V) electrode alarm switch
z J12, J13 differential serial port input and output connector, the definition is as
follows:
PIN No. 1 2 3 4
DEFINE RXD+ RXD- TXD+ TXD-
z J14, RS-232 serial port input and output connector, the definition is as follows,
receiving and sending according to the board:
PIN No. 1 2 3 4
DEFINE XRXD GND XTXD GND
z J15, input connector of primary power supply, the definition is as follows:
5
Board Manual
PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DEFINE Power -48V -48V --48V --48VGND --48VGND GND GND
switch first path second power
signal input input path input distribution
input
z J16, magnetic switch alarm introduction connector of cabinet door, the

PIN No. 1 2 3 4
DEFINE DOORALM input Connected to PIN3 Connected to PIN2 GND
z J17, input connector of red, yellow line and column indicators control Boolean
value, the definition is as follows:
PIN No. 1 2 3 4
DEFINE Positive Negative electrode Positive electrode Negative electrode of
electrode of red of red indicator of yellow indicator yellow indicator control
indicator control control signal control signal , signal
signal , turned turned ON when
ON when the the negative
negative electrode is short-
electrode is circuited.
short-circuited.
z J18, input connector of green line and column indicators control Boolean value,
the definition is as follows:
PIN No. 1 2
DEFINE Positive electrode of green indicator Negative electrode of green indicator control
control signal, turned ON when the signal
negative electrode is short-circuited.
5 Technical Indices
1) The differential signal interface conforms to the RS422 standard and its Baud
rate is 187.5 kbit/s.
2) The RS232 signal interface conforms to the RS232 standard and its Baud rate
is 4.8 kbit/s.
3) The input voltage of the power supply of -48 V is from -36 V to -72 V, and the
maximum value of the current is 200 mA.
4) The row and column indicator interface output voltage is +5 V, and the
maximum value of the load current of a single channel is 150 mA.
5) The signal level should not be more than 5 V for ‘high’ level and not less than
0 V for ‘low’ level.
6
Board Manual
6) The signal drive capability requirement is such that the voltage is not less than
4 V while the ‘high’ level output current is 4 mA; there is no such requirement in
the case of ‘low’ level.
7) The signal frequency should not be more than 200 Hz.
6 Attention
1) As the AMD is the slave node of the ALM, its address code ranges from 0 to 31
and cannot be repeated.
2) The code of the AMD is set according to the cabinet type. Specify the type of
the AMD in the BAM as “BAM cabinet”.
3) In the engineering installation process, Figure 2 shows the committed address
codes.
1 5 4 3 0 16 17 18 19
15 11 7 3 19 23 27 31
14 10 6 2 18 22 26 30
13 9 5 1 17 21 25 29
12 8 4 0 16 20 24 28
Wall BAM LIM3 LIM2 LIM1 AM SRM SPM1 SPM2 SPM3
Figure 2 Setting of the AMD address codes in each cabinet
4) In the description of the DIP switch positions, “0” means the relevant DIP switch
is OFF; “1” means the relevant DIP switch is ON.
5) During the engineering installation, if it is required to access the matching
resistance of the AMD in the BAM cabinet, disconnect the matching resistance
of the other cabinets.
6) Generally, the output interface mode is set as RS422.
7
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CB36ASL
16-Channel, Programmable, Reverse Polarity,

16/12KC, Analog Subscriber Board CB36ASL
1 Overview
The CB36ASL is located in the subscriber frame of an SM. It performs BORSCHT

(Battery, Overload protection, Ringing, Supervision, Coding, Hybrid and Test Access)
functions for 16 analog subscriber lines and provides 16 channels for full polarity
reversal, billing signals, and so on. The interface impedance, interface level, and so on,
can be set through the software.
2 Main Functions
The CB36ASL consists of two parts, the Subscriber Line Interface Circuit (SLIC) and
the control circuit.
The SLIC implements the functions, such as feeding, over-voltage protection, ringing,
test.
The control circuit performs status control and dynamic time slot allocation for the 16
analog subscriber lines and provides communication with the upper level master
nodes.
I. Board functions
1) Provides feeding function.

2) Provides over-voltage protection function.
3) Provides ringing control function.
4) Provides off-hook and on-hook test function.
5) Provides encoding and decoding function and also implements the conversion
between analog and digital signals.
6) Provides the hybrid circuit to implement the conversion between the analog 2-wire
& 4-wire signals, and simultaneously, performs the impedance matching with the
subscriber lines.
7) Provides the internal and external line test functions.
II. Main features
1) Feeding mode can be set through the software.

2) Feeding current can be adjusted through the software.
1
Board Manual
3) The A/µ law can be selected for the coding and decoding mode.
4) Alternating current (ac) interface impedance can be set through the software.
5) Sending and receiving signal gains can be adjusted through the software.
6) Hooking upper and lower limit can be set through the software.
7) Multiple ringing modes are supported, and the ringing can be configured.
8) All the 16 channels provide multiple metering signals (16KC/12KC, polarity
reversal pulse).
9) All the 16 channels have the polarity reversal function.
10) It has the function to display the calling subscriber number.
1) Provides 16 pairs of subscriber line interfaces.

2) Connects with the Dual Tone Number Receiving & Drive Board (DRV) through two
Uplink HighWays (UHW) and two Downlink HighWays (DHW).
3) Receives clock signals of 2 MHz, 4 MHz and 8 kHz sent by the DRV.
4) Implements master and slave node communication with the Master Node Board
(NOD) through the Transmission (TX)/Receiver (RX) serial port.
5) Receives the ringing current signal sent by the PWX.
6) Receives the board address selection signal sent by the backplane.
7) Provides the channels for the internal and external line tests of the Test Board
(TSS).
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB36ASL.
Subscriber
DRV UHW/DHW Voice DC Analog interface 1 Subscriber line 0
DC processing control front end
control 1
DC control Subscriber
1 Subscriber line 1
interface 2
NOD DC control 2
Address/Data DC control 2 Subscriber
Subscriber line 2
TX/RX interface 3
DC control 4 Subscriber
CPU DC control 16 Subscriber line 3
interface 4
DC control (5-8)
DC control (9-12)
Subscriber
DC control (13-16) Subscriber line 16
interface 16
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB36ASL
Subscriber interface module: Implements functions, such as feeding, over-voltage

protection, internal and external test and ringing.
2
Board Manual
Voice processing module: Performs functions, such as time slot interchange, coding
and decoding, impedance matching.
DC (direct current) control module: Determines the feeding mode (constant voltage,
constant current) and feeding current of the subscriber lines.
Analog front end: Implements the functions, such as conversion between digital and
analog signals.
CPU control module: Communicates with the NOD through the TX/RX serial port, to
report the status information of the subscriber lines, to download the control data of the
subscriber lines and to implement the status change of the subscriber lines.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB36ASL.
RUN
ASL
Figure 2 CB36ASL panel
1) Board indicators
3
Board Manual
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB36ASL indicators

1. Flashes fast: Application for data
configuration (ON for 0.5 second and OFF for
0.5 second)
To indicate the working
RUN Red 2. Flashes slowly: The board is working normally Flashes slowly
status of the board
(ON for one second and OFF for one second).
3. OFF: The board is faulty.
4. ON: The power supply of -48 V is faulty.

None.
4 Layout
The board has no DIP switch or jumper.
5 Technical Indices
1) Protection feature is in compliance with ITU-T Recommendation K.20.
2) Multiple kinds of ac impedance are provided and the default value is 600 ohm.
3) Two feeding modes are available, namely, constant voltage and constant current
feeding, and 25 mA constant current feeding is the default mode.
4) The transmission distance: ≤ 500 m (0.5 mm cable diameter)
5) The current and power consumption of the power supply are as shown in Table 2.
Table 2 Current and power consumption of the power supply
Power supply Static current Dynamic current

+5 V 318 mA 655 mA
-5 V 0 mA 54 mA
-48 V 0 mA 366 mA
6 Attention
None.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CC08ASL
SMT Analog Subscriber Board CC08ASL
1 Overview
The CC08ASL is located in the subscriber frame of an SM, and provides the BORSCHT
functions for 16 analog subscriber lines. The board connects 16 pairs of subscriber
lines externally, of which the eighth and the ninth have the polarity reversal function.
2 Main Functions
The CC08ASL consists of two parts, the SLIC and the control circuit.
The SLIC implements the BORSCHT functions, and the control circuit implements the
control and dynamic time slot allocation for the 16 analog subscriber lines and provides
communication with the upper level master nodes.
I. Board functions
1) Provides feeding function.

2) Provides over-voltage protection function.
3) Provides ringing control function.
4) Provides off-hook and on-hook test function.
5) Provides coding and decoding function and implements the conversion between
the analog and digital signals.
6) Provides the hybrid circuit to implement the conversion between analog 2-wire &
4-wire signals, and simultaneously, performs impedance matching with the
subscriber lines.
7) Provides the internal and external line test functions.
II. Main features
1) The A-law is adopted for the coding mode.

2) Interface impedance is of the three-component mode.
3) Multiple ringing modes are provided.
4) It has the function to display the calling subscriber number.
5) Upper and lower hooking limit can be set through the Host software.
6) The board uses in-house designed & developed thick film circuits and Application
Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs).
1
Board Manual
1) Provides 16 pairs of subscriber line interfaces, that is, 16 subscribers can be

connected externally.
2) Provides two HWs to the DRV, and simultaneously, receives two HW signals sent
by the DRV.
3) Receives clock signals of 2 MHz and 8 kHz sent by the DRV.
4) Provides the serial port signal to implement the master and slave node
communication with the NOD.
5) Receives the ringing current signal sent by the PWX.
7) Provides the channel for the internal and external line tests.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CC08ASL.
HW
DRV ASIC COMBO SLIC Line0
COMBO SLIC Line1
TxDI
Tx
NOD CPU SLIC
COMBO Line15
Rx
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CC08ASL
ASIC: Accomplishes the dynamic allocation and exchange of time slots, and controls
the working status of the ringing current relay and the SLIC.
CPU: Receives and carries out the commands sent by the NOD, monitors the working
status of the subscriber line board and reports the information of this board to the NOD.
COMBO: Converts between analog and digital signals, and implements functions, such
as coding, decoding and filtering.
SLIC: Implements the feeding for analog subscriber lines, converts between 2-wire and
4-wire, and performs the off-hook and on-hook tests.
2
Board Manual
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CC08ASL.
RUN
ASL
Figure 2 CC08ASL panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings of the CC08ASL indicators

1. Flashes fast: Indicates request for data
configuration (ON for 0.5 second and OFF for 0.5
To indicate the working
RUN Red second) Flashes slowly
status of the board
2. Flashes slowly: The board is working normally
(ON for one second and OFF for one second).

None.
3
Board Manual
4 Layout
The board has no DIP switch or jumper.
5 Technical Indices
1) Feeding mode: Dual constant current feeding
2) Feeding current: 20 mA
3) Impedance feature: Three-component mode
4) Protection feature: Meets the ITU-T Recommendation K.20
5) When the loop resistance is 1.8 kilohm, the feeding current is not less than 18 mA
6) The transmission distance is less than or equal to 500 m (0.5 mm cable diameter)
7) The current and power consumption of the power supply are as shown in Table 2.
Table 2 Current and power consumption of the power supply

+5 V 66 mA 176 mA
-5 V 0 mA 122 mA
-48 V 14 mA 338 mA
6 Attention
1) The CC08ASL provides only two lines for polarity reversal function. If all the 16
lines are to be provided with polarity reversal, the CC08ASL is recommended to
be configured accordingly.
2) If the length of the subscriber line is beyond 5 km, the CC08ASL is recommended.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CC0HASL
32-Channel 48V Analog Subscriber Board

CC0HASL
1 Overview
The CC0HASL is located in the subscriber frame of the SM, carrying out BORSCHT
functions for 32 analog subscriber lines. It provides two channels of polarity reversal
and charging signals, and its interface impedance and interface level can be set by
software.
2 Main Functions
I. Board functions
1) Provides 32 analog subscriber interfaces.

2) Provides BORSCHT functions (Battery, Overload protection, Ringing,
Supervision, Coding, Hybrid and Test Access).
3) Supports some special functions (2-channel polarity reversal, Caller
Identification Display (CID) and so on).
4) Supports A/µ law, interface impedance and gain to be set by software.
II. Main features
1) Provides optional coding and decoding modes, A law or µ law.

2) Supports alternating current (ac) interface impedance to be set by software.
3) Supports sending and receiving gain to be adjusted by software.
4) Supports upper limit and lower limit of hooking duration to be set by software.
5) Supports multiple ringing modes.
6) Supports Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP).
1) Provides 32 subscriber line interfaces.

2) Receives clock signals from the DRV.
3) Supports communication between master and slave nodes through serial port
TX/RX and the NOD.
4) Receives ringing current signal from the PWX.
5) Receives the board address selection signal from the backplane.
6) Provides internal and external line testing channel for the TSS.
1
Board Manual
The CC0HASL is shortened as ASL32 or A32. Its functional principle is as shown in

Figure 1.
PCM signal
DRV32
COMBO SLIC
WDT RAM
RX COMBO SLIC
NOD
TX CPU
int
RCLK
COMBO SLIC
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CC0HASL
The CPU controls the 32 subscriber circuits, and communicates with the master
node of the upper level. The COMBO has powerful DSP function, responsible for
time slot allocation and switchover, ringing current control and off-hook & on-hook
detection.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CC0HASL.
2
Board Manual
RUN
BSY
A 32
Figure 2 CC0HASL panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings of the board indicators.
Table 1 Meanings of the CC0HASL indicators

Indicates the running 1. Flash slowly: The board is running normally
status of the board * (ON for one second, OFF for the next second).
2. Flash fast: The board is applying for
RUN Red configuration data (ON for 0.5 second, OFF for Flash slowly
the next 0.5 second).
Indicates the circuit
BSY Red seizure status of the ON: At least one channel is seized.
board **
Note *: When the board is powered on or receives the reset command from the host,
the red indicator flashes every 0.5 second and the board detects itself, which will
then enter the waiting status. If the configuration command is received within five
seconds, the board starts to work and the red indicator flashes every one second;
otherwise, the indicator flashes every 0.5 second and the board enters the self-
detection status, and the above process will be redone.
3
Board Manual
Note **: Seizure refers to the case that a channel is in connecting, conversation or
testing status.
4 Layout
The CC0HASL has no DIP switch and jumper.
5 Technical Indices
1) Protection features conform to ITU-T Recommendation K.20.
2) Interface impedance and interface level are adjustable.
3) The feeder current is 20 mA.
4) The maximum distance is 7 km (subscriber line with core diameter of 0.4 mm).
Power Supply Static Current Dynamic Current
+5 V 180 mA 305 mA
-5 V 225 mA 235 mA
-48 V 99 mA 700 mA
6 External Cable
The subscriber lines (32 pairs of subscriber lines) are connected to corresponding
interfaces on the backplane of the subscriber frame. 32-channel subscriber frame
can be plugged with 16-channel subscriber line connectors (two connectors are
plugged in the upmost position and downmost position respectively). Refer to Figure
3 for the connection of 32-channel subscriber lines. Subscriber lines 9-12 are
plugged in the middle row of pins of the first connector, and subscriber lines 13-16
are plugged in the middle row of pins of the second connector.
12 subscribers (channel 1-12)

Upper HEADER
Lower HEADER
Figure 3 Connection of 32-channel subscriber lines
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CB01AVM
Voice Mailbox Board CB01AVM
1 Overview
The CB01AVM is located in the subscriber frame of the SM, and it fulfills the
communication interface function of the voice mailbox switch. The CB01AVM can be
inserted into the slot of any subscriber line board in the subscriber frame of the C&C08
Switching System. Similar to the subscriber line board, it is used as one slave node of
the C&C08 Switching System and communicates with the C&C08 Switching System
through the NOD.
2 Main Functions
The CB01AVM receives the commands of the switch, accomplishes the functions of the
time slot interchange and ‘number receiving and sending’ between the caller and ADP
and between the Digital Signal Processes (DSP) in the board. Simultaneously, it sends
related commands to the voice mailbox terminal after the format conversion, and
transfers the reported status from the terminal to the Host after processing.
I. Board functions
To access external voice equipment through differential HW and to fulfill the Dual Tone
Multi Frequency (DTMF) ‘number receiving’ function, the inter-working with the external
voice equipment can be used in:
1) Voice mailbox system
2) Information query system
3) Public opinion poll system
4) Computer operator system
II. Main features
1) Each subscriber frame can be equipped with a maximum of two CB01AVMs.

2) The maximum length of the cable to connect the ADP is 15 meters.
3) The board has two configuration modes, that is, 16-line and 32-line, which are set
through a jumper on/off switch on the board.
1) Provides a master/slave-node serial port signal to connect with the NOD.

2) Provides the HW of 2 Mbit/s to connect with the switching network board.
3) Provides a group of HWs of 2 Mbit/s to connect with the ADP.
1
Board Manual
4) Provides a group of serial port communication lines to connect with the ADP.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB01AVM.
BNET BNET
DHW0 UHW0
DHW1 UHW1
SM
DHW
TX Interface
ADP
module
Serial port Main
communication RX
control
Master Signal
node module processing
module
UHW
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB01AVMSM: It fulfills the time slot interchange function,
and by connecting the UHWs and DHWs with the Switching Network Board (BNET), it
enables each line to dynamically seize any time slot in the two HWs.
Main control module: It fulfills the board initialization control, status monitoring and call
processing functions.
Signal processing module: It fulfills the ‘secondary dial test’ and ‘number sending’
functions of the voice mailbox.
Interface module: It provides the physical connection interface with the ADP.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB01AVM.
2
Board Manual
RUN
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
AVM
Figure 2 CB01AVM panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the CB01AVM indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB01AVM indicators

ON for one second and OFF for one ON for one second and
RUN Red Running indicator
second, while it is in normal operation. OFF for one second
They are duty indicators of the number
receivers from 1st to 16th.
CH0-CH15 Green Duty indicator
When occupied, the corresponding -
indicator is ON.

None.
3
Board Manual
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the jumper on the CB01AVM.
U 46
Figure 3 CB01AVM jumper
Jumper U46: To set the working mode of the CB01AVM.
When the jumper is connected, the board works in the 32-line mode; when
disconnected, the board works in the 16-line mode.
5 Technical Indices
1) The power consumption of the board: 4 W
2) Subscriber interfaces may work in the 16-line or 32-line mode.
3) The signal for the connection between the CB01AVM and the ADP is a ‘differential
level signal’.
4) The line to connect with the external voice equipment should be less than 15
meters long.
6 Attention
1) When the CB01AVM is set to the 16-line mode, it occupies one slot of the
subscriber line board.
2) When the CB01AVM is set to the 32-line mode, it occupies two adjacent slots fo
the subscriber line board beginning with an even slot number. For example, if the
CB01AVM is inserted in the 12th slot, it occupies the 12th and 13th slots, that is, the
4
Board Manual
13th slot must be empty. If the CB01AVM is inserted in the 13th slot, the 12th slot
must be empty.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/C841BAC
Bus Administration Control Board C841BAC
1 Overview
The C841BAC is located in the Communication Control Module (CCM) of the

AM/CM, and carries out the status management, bus arbitration and channel
configuration functions of the ‘frame switching’ network. In addition, the C841BAC
provides the frame switching capability equal to half that of a Frame Switching
Netboard (FSN).
2 Main Functions
As the BAC of the CCM, the C841BAC is responsible for the channel configuration
and bus arbitration of the CCM frame switching network, and also monitors the
working status of each board in the CCM. In addition, the C841BAC has the frame
switching function. This feature allows it to provide a 64-channel (eight HWs of 2
Mbit/s) frame switching interface.
I. Board functions
1) Fulfills the data configuration and status monitoring functions of the local board
and the FSN.
2) Provides the bus arbitration function equal to half that of an FSN.
3) Provides the bus arbitration function between the boards.
4) Provides the frame switching function equal to half that of an FSN.
5) Provides the Clock test function and automatically selects the working Clock.
II. Main features
1) The C841BAC extensively uses the programmable logic components to fulfill

the board functions.
2) In addition to the board’s own functions, the CPU on this board controls other
boards (FSN, for example).
3) The CCM frame uses the dual-plane working mode and the C841BAC is not
provided with the feature of active-standby switchover function.
1) Provides the configuration bus signals (CPU bus) with which the CPU controls
other boards.
2) Provides the backplane bus signals (switching bus) for frame switching.
1
Board Manual
3) Provides the token control interface signals for controlling the frame switching.
4) Provides eight differential link HW signals of 2.048 Mbit/s.
5) Receives two Clock signals from the Clock frame.
6) Provides one RS232 serial port signal for debugging the C841BAC.
7) Provides debugging interface.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841BAC.
Switching bus 2 Mbit/s HW

Frame switching module
F
S Token control Inter-board bus Intra-board bus
N arbitration module arbitration module
Clock processing
module
C
K
M
Board control bus Emergency serial port
Central control module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841BAC
Frame switching module: It handles the frame switching function of the HDLC link.
Inter-board bus arbitration module: It handles the token authorization management

function of the occupied inter-board bus.
Intra-board bus arbitration module: It handles the token authorization management

function of the frame switching network inside the board.
Clock processing module: It fulfills the Clock testing and selection functions.
Central control module: It provides the initialization control, status control and
configuration data functions of the C841BACs and the FSNs.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841BAC.
2
Board Manual
RUN
FA IL
BAC
Figure 2 C841BAC panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the C841BAC indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841BAC indicators

1. Flashes fast: Indicates the board software is
being loaded.
Running status
RUN Red 2. Flashes slowly: Indicates the board is working Flashes slowly
indicator
normally.
3. OFF: Indicates the board is not working normally.
OFF: Indicates the board is working normally.
ON: Indicates the board is faulty.
3
Board Manual
2) DIP switch S1 is as shown in Table 2.
Table 2 DIP switch S1
Bits of DIP switch Meaning ON OFF Default status

S1.1 Reserved for future use OFF
Basic Input/Output
Cannot write data
S1.2 System (BIOS) write-in Can write data to BIOS OFF
to BIOS
control
Cannot write data
S1.3 FLASH write-in control Can write data to FLASH OFF
to FLASH
S1.4 Reserved for future use OFF
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the switches and jumpers on the C841BAC.
JP4
LEDS1
LEDS2
LEDS3
LEDS4
LEDS5
LEDS6
LEDS7
LEDS8
SR1
J2
J1
1234
S1
Figure 3 DIP switches and jumpers on the C841BAC
1) Reset switch SR1: This is the hardware reset button.

2) Table 3 gives the meanings and descriptions of the Surface Mount Technology
(SMT) indicators on the C841BAC.
4
Board Manual
Table 3 Meanings and descriptions of the SMT indicators on the C841BAC

ON: Indicates the board currently works at 0#
LEDS1 Red Clock 0 indicator Uncertain
Clock.
ON: Indicates the board currently works at 1#
LEDS2 Red Clock 1 indicator Uncertain
Clock.
ON: Indicates the board is in the active mode.
Active/Standby mode
LEDS3 Red OFF: Indicates the board is in the standby Uncertain
indicator
mode.
LEDS4
LEDS5
LEDS6 Reserved
LEDS7
LEDS8
3) Debugging serial port (J2): The RS232 serial port is used for debugging and
printing. The software running process and the results can be observed through
the super terminal.
4) Pin (JP4): It is used as the ispLSI1032E logical loading interface.
5) debugging interface (J1):
The debugging interface is a 10-pin jack used in the debugging mode, and the CPU
directly get the commands from the debugging interface to facilitate the software
and hardware debugging.
5 Technical Indices
1) The board provides two groups of frame switching units. Each group of the
frame switching units provides a link frame switching capability of 32 channels
(four HWs of 2.048 Mbit/s).
2) CPU type: It is MC68360EM, with the working Clock of 33 MHz.
3) Power supply voltage: Vcc = 4.75 V ~ 5.25 V
4) Working temperature: 0~70 OC
5) Power consumption: P ≤ 15 W
6 Attention
1) The CCM frame is permanently configured with two BACs.
2) The C841BAC provides link HWs for the Communication Processing Module
(CPM) and Central Switching Net Frame (CNET). The connection sequence of
the HWs is fixed.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/C841BDR
Network Frame Bus Drive Board C841BDR
1 Overview
The C841BDR is located in the switching network frame of the AM/CM. It performs
the bus drive function between the Network Communication Control Boards (NCC)
and Network Frame Central Switching Netboards (CNU) or Network Frame Edge
Switching Netboards (SNU). Specifically, the C841BDR drives the data bus, address
bus and control bus sent by the NCC (CPC or SPC) and then sends them to every
NET to implement the network control functions.
2 Main Functions
The C841BDR divides a set of buses sent by the NCCs (CPC or SPC) into two sets
to drive the left and the right half of the switching network frame, separately.
I. Board functions
1) Divides the bus into two sets to drive the left and the right half of the switching
network frame separately, to reduce the load on the bus.
2) Adjusts the read-write time sequence.
II. Main features
1) The board uses the active-standby working mode to fulfill the automatic
switchover function in case of any fault.
2) The active or standby board sets the readable-writable status bit to accomplish
the in-service test functions.
3) The board controls the decoding of the address enabled signals to isolate the
buses of the active and standby NCCs.
1) A set of buses is connected to the NCC.

2) Two sets of buses are connected to drive the left and the right half of the
switching network frame separately.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841BDR.
1
Board Manual
Left half
Bus Bus
drive
Bus isolation
N
Bus
C
Right half
C Bus
Bus
Bus
drive
Switchover B
signal
D
EPLD LOGIC
R
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841BDR
Bus isolation module: It isolates and drives the buses.
Bus drive module: It provides the bi-polar drive function of the bus.
Erasable Programmable Logic Device (EPLD) logic module: It performs functions,

such as the bus time sequence adjustment, bus decoding and switch control logic.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841BDR.
2
Board Manual
RUN
FA IL
BDR
Figure 2 C841BDR panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the C841BDR indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841BDR indicators

Indicates the running 1. Flashes: The board is working normally.
RUN Red and program loading 2. ON: The board is working in the standby mode. Flashes
status

None.
4 Layout
There is no DIP switch, jumper and SMT indicator on the board.
3
Board Manual
5 Technical Indices
1) The output drive current of the bus is 32 mA or 64 mA (high level/low level).
Each set of buses drives 16 boards.
2) Power supply voltage: Vcc = 4.75 V ~ 5.25 V s
6 Attention
1) Each switching network frame is permanently configured with two BDRs
(active-standby mode).
2) The C841BDRs are permanently inserted in Slots 10 and 15 of the upper part
of the NET frame.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/BTU
Broadband Transmit Unit Board CI01BTU
1 Overview
The BTU is located in the interface frame of the C&C08 switch, providing broadband
access in cooperation with the BSL. The broadband services of the downstream BSL
equipment are converged and processed at the board interfaces such as SDH/E1 and
FE interface. They are then transferred to the upper broadband access server (BAS).
The BTU board falls into two types: CI01BTU0 and CI01B32E.
z The CI01BTU0 type accommodates one downstream 155-Mbit/s SDH (STM-1)
optical/electrical interface to converge services of over 16 BSL boards, and two
upstream FE interfaces.
z The CI01B32E type accommodates 32 downstream E1 interfaces to converge
services of over eight BSL boards, and one upstream FE interface.
2 Main Functions
I. Board Functions
z The SDH optical/electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T Recommendations

G.707, ITU-T G.825, and ITU-T G.957.
z The downstream E1 interfaces are compliant with the ITU-T Recommendation
G.703.
z The upstream FE interfaces are compliant with the IEEE 802.3 standards.
z It supports connection of 1,000 PVCs to 1,000 VLANs maximally.
z It supports 1483B and IPoA protocols.
z It realizes online loading and software upgrading of programmable logic
equipments and software, supports remote maintenance and software upgrade. It
also supports alarm reporting.
II. Main Features
The BTU board can de-multiplex the 155-Mbit/s SDH signal into 63 channels of E1
signal. It provides two upstream FE interfaces for connecting directly with the BAS
equipment (such as the MA5200 broadband IP access equipment of Huawei) to access
broadband subscribers through authentication and charging at the BAS equipment.
The downstream 155-Mbit/s SDH (SDM-1) optical/electrical interface converges

services of over 16 BSL boards.
1
Board Manual
III. Hardware Interfaces
1) 155-Mbit/s SDH interface

It accesses multiple ADSL subscribers converged in from the SDH optical transmission
network. The SDH optical interface adopts a single-mode fiber with an operating
wavelength of 1,310 nm; the SDH electrical interface adopts SMB type (75 ohm) radio
frequency coaxial connector and coaxial cable.
2) FE interfaces
They are connected with equipment in the broadband metropolitan area network
(MAN). The BTU converts the signal from the downstream SDH interface into Ethernet
frame signal and then accesses the MAN through the upstream FE interface. By
connecting with the BAS equipment, it accesses broadband ADSL subscribers to the
network with certification and charging.
3) Maintenance and management interfaces
z The 10-Mbit/s Ethernet network management interface: It communicates with the
back administration module (BAM) through LAN to realize network management.
The BTU communicates with the BAM by Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP).
z The inband network management interface: A VLAN is configured in a specified
upstream FE interface to function as the inband network management channel of
the BTU (with SNMP).
z The BSL inband management channel: The BTU accommodates a downstream
equipment registration table to specify the IP address, MAC address and
management E1 port of the downstream BSL equipment. When the BTU receives
IP packets with destination IP address being BSL, it will forward these packets to
the BSL equipment through the management PVC at the management E1
interface in the downstream equipment registration table. In this way, it manages
the BSL through the 10-Mbit/s network port or the inband network management
channel of the BTU. It uses the Telnet protocol in this process.
z The RS-232 maintenance serial port: It is used for local maintenance of the board.
This port can also achieve remote maintenance by connection with a modem. The
baud rate at the serial port is 115,200 bit/s by default. Normally, at the first BIOS
initialization of the BTU, parameters such as the IP address of Ethernet, the IP
address of the TFTP server, the IP address of the NMS and NMS channel mode
are configured at the serial port.
z The master and slave serial ports communicate with the boards (like the QSI)
through the backplane.
4) Other interfaces
z The power interface introduces +5 V power from the backplane and provides
overvoltage and overcurrent protection.
z The clock interface obtains the clock signal from the SDH signal, the E1 signal or
the backplane.
2
Board Manual
Caution:
The BTU supports inband and outband NMS channel modes, one of which is chosen in practice. For
selection, refer to “Installation and Loading of BTU” or “Configuration of NMS Parameters of BTU” of
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Installation Manual, Volume 2.
IV. Functional Principle
The BTU hardware is modular design, comprising a backplane and some pinch boards.
The modules in the BTU are divided into main control unit, interface unit, clock unit,
power unit, conversion unit and logic unit in line with their different functions. The
schematic diagram of the BTU is shown in Figure 1.
Management channel
Debugging and maintenace channel
Main 155 Mbit/s

control unit STM-1
Interface
unit
Conversion
unit
Clock unit
Power unit FE
Power signal Clock signal Data/Address/Control bus
Figure 1 Schematic diagram of the BTU
z Main control unit: It comprises an MPC860 and peripheral chip, managing the
whole board and communicating with other equipment. It also accomplishes
system initialization and communication (including that with narrowband switch),
monitors the operating status and processes switching connection in real-time.
Meanwhile it accommodates an Ethernet interface to connect with the network
management computer, thus performing network management. It also collects
3
Board Manual
performance information of each unit, outputs the alarm signal and displays the
board operating status.
z Interface unit: It falls into SDH 155-Mbit/s optical/electrical interface module, FE
electrical module and maintenance and management interface. Among these
modules, the SDH 155-Mbit/s interface undertakes connection with the equipment
in the SDH transmission network, with upstream and downstream baud rates both
being 155-Mbit/s; the FE electrical interface module provides 100-Mbit/s FE
interface to connect with the BAS equipment; the maintenance and management
interfaces include 10-Mbit/s Ethernet management interface, RS-232
maintenance serial port and communication serial port between primary nodes
and subnodes (through interfaces with the backplane).
z Conversion unit: It fulfils upstream and downstream multiplexing and
de-multiplexing of the 155-Mbit/s SDH frame into 63 channels of E1 signal,
converts 63 channels of E1 (ATM over E1) signal into two channels of FE signal
and conversely
z Clock unit: It provides the operating clock for the BTU. It selects the reference
clock source and outputs the required clock frequency after phase-lock. In addition,
it can monitor important clock signal.
z Power unit: It supplies power for the whole board. It accesses +5 V power from the
interface frame of the C&C08 switch, and converts the voltage as required by the
BTU.
3 Panel
The panel structure of the BTU is shown in Figure 2. The left one shows the panel
closed and the right one open.
4
Board Manual
RUN RUN
FAIL FAIL
SDH electrical interface
SDH optical interface
SW3
1234
RESET RESET
ON
FE interface Maintenanceserial port
Ethernet interface
BTU
Figure 2 BTU panel
On the panel, there are running indicator (RUN), alarm indicator (FAIL), and network
interface indicator. Each network port corresponds to a link status indicator (LINK) and
a service status indicator (ACT). Besides, the SDH optical/electrical interface has a link
indicator inside the board. Table 1 shows the indicators and their meanings.
Table 1 Meanings of board indicators
Indicator Color Description Meaning

OFF for one second and ON for another
when normal; ON when there is power but
the board does not work; OFF when there is
no power or the board is faulty.
OFF when the board is normal; ON when
FAIL Green Alarm indicator
there is alarm.
5
Board Manual
ON when the link status of board serial port
Link status indicator of
LINK Green is normal; OFF when the link status of board
FE interface
serial port is abnormal.
Service status ON when the network port is sending and

ACT Yellow indicator of FE receiving data; OFF when the network port
interface is not sending and receiving data.
ON when SDH does not connect with fiber
SDH link Link status indicator of
Red or cable; OFF when SDH connects with fiber
indicator SDH
or cable.
The BTU has a reset switch, RESET and a DIP switch, SW3. The RESET switch is on
the panel, resetting the whole board. The SW3 is inside the panel. Table 2 shows DIP
bits and their meanings.
Table 2 Meanings of the DIP switch S1.
Switch/switch position Switch status Description Default status

ON Select the electrical interface
SW3-1 OFF
OFF Select the optical interface
ON
SW3-2 Reserved OFF
OFF
ON Serial port start mode
SW3-3 OFF
OFF BOOTP start mode
ON Debugging state
SW3-4 OFF
OFF Normal working state
4 Layout
None.
5 Technical Indices
Table 3 shows the BTU performance parameters.
6
Board Manual
Table 3 BTU performance parameters
Parameter Parameter value

DC input voltage: +5 V;BTU power consumption: static power
Power supply consumption of 26.7 W and dynamic power consumption of
27.1 W
Temperature Temperature range: –5°C – +50°C
Humidity Comparative humidity: 10%–90%, not condensed
Bandwidth 63*2 Mbit/s
Maximum of downstream BSL
63
boards supported
Maximum of VLANs supported 4,000 VLAN_IDs (1–4095)
1,000 PVCs, with VPI ranging 0—15 and VCI ranging 32—95.
Maximum of PVCs supported
945 (63*15) service PVCs supported
Upstream interface 2 FE interfaces

Downstream interface 1 optical/electrical SDH interface
6 Attention
None.
7
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CC01CDI
Direct-Dial-In Subscriber Interface Board CC01CDI
1 Overview
The CC01CDI is located in the subscriber frame of the C&C08 Switching System. It
provides 16-channel two-wire analog external interfaces (C22), connects the
subscriber interface of the local switch in the actual network, and helps achieve the
Hong Kong International Direct Dialing (IDD) service.
2 Main Functions
I. Board functions
1) Tests the polarity of the analog subscriber lines.

2) Tests the feeding of the subscriber lines.
3) Forwards numbers (both Dual tone and pulse).
4) Tests the ringing current.
5) Tests the signal tone.
6) Forwards by hooking.
7) Provides the off-hook and on-hook testing function.
8) Provides self-check and alarm function.
II. Main features
1) Supports the µ-Law.

2) Provides functions related to outgoing and incoming calls.
3) Detects standard ringing current.
4) Dynamically allocates time slots.
5) Compatible with the slot of the subscriber board and the wiring same as that of
the ASL.
1) Provides 16 subscriber ports and external access to the analog subscriber ports
of the switch through the analog subscriber lines.
2) Provides one Master-Slave serial port to communicate with the NOD.
3) Provides two HWs of 2 Mbit/s to connect to the DRV.
4) Receives the Clock signal driven by the DRV.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CC01CDI.
1
Board Manual
BNET BNET
DHW0 UHW0
DHW1 Switching UHW1 AB0
UHW module
Subscriber interface module

DHW
Analog subscriber port

Receive AB1
number
Send
number
Serial port Signal
communication Main
Master control processing
node module
module AB15
UHW
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CC01CDI
Switching module: It enables each channel to dynamically seize any time slot of the
two HWs.
Main control module: It provides the board initialization control, status supervision and
call processing functions.
Signal processing module: It detects the signal tone and receives the DTMF signals.
Subscriber interface module: Each trunk consists of a protection circuit, test circuit,
ringing current detection circuit, feeding detection circuit, polarity detection circuit,
PCM Coding/Decoding circuit, and so on.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CC01CDI.
2
Board Manual
RUN
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CDI
Figure 2 CC01CDI panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the CC01CDI indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CC01CDI indicators

1. ON for one second and OFF for one second: The
board is working normally.
2. ON for half a second and OFF for half a second: ON for one
Indicates the running
RUN Red The board is faulty. second and OFF
status
3. Flashing fast for three seconds: The board has for one second
failed self-test.
4. ON or OFF: The board is not working normally.
Channel monitoring 1. ON: The corresponding channel is seized.
CH0~CH15 Green ON or OFF
indicator 2. OFF: The corresponding channel is not seized.

None.
4 Layout
There is no DIP switch, jumper and SMT indicator on this board.
3
Board Manual
5 Technical Indices
1) Provides the 16 analog interface (C22) ports. The line impedance is 600 ohm.
2) The transmission distance: < 5 kilometers when 0.5 mm copper wire is used.
3) The protection characteristics conform to ITU-T Recommendation K.20.
4) Adjustment range of receiving signal gain: -22 to -3 dB (in steps of 0.5 dBr per
position)
5) Adjustment range of transmitting signal gain: -8.5 to +13 dB (in steps of 0.5 dBr
per position)
6) Static power consumption of the circuit board: 4.5 W
6 Attention
The range of the slave node number of the board is 0~15.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CKD
Clock Drive Board C841CKD
1 Overview
The C841CKD is located in the Clock frame of the AM/CM, which fulfills the
differential drive and the transmission matching of clock signals of 8 kHz and 2 MHz
output by the Clock Source Board (CKS), to reduce the distortion of the signal
transmission.
2 Main functions
The C841CKD drives the Clock signals and outputs 32 differential level Clock
signals of 8 kHz and 2 MHz to every functional frame of the AM/CM. It also provides
the system synchronous Clock for every functional frame. In addition, the C841CKD
divides the signals of 2 MHz and 2 Mbit/s sent by the CKS into multiple channels for
the transformer to drive. It outputs eight signals of 2 MHz and 2 Mbit/s meeting the
ITU-T Recommendation G.703 to provide the Building Integrated Timing Supply
System (BITS) function for the Clock frame.
I. Board functions
1) Provides the AM/CM with the system synchronous Clock signals.

2) Provides the BITS function for other equipment.
II. Main features
1) The output Clock signals of 8 kHz and 2 MHz are differential levels.
2) Parts of the board output signals are in the active-standby mode, and most of
the signals are generated simultaneously in both the active and standby modes.
III. Hardware interface signals
1) Receives the Clock signals of 2.048 MHz and 8 kHz provided by the CKS.
2) Receives the E1 interface signals of 2.048 Mbit/s provided by the CKS.
3) Receives the active control signals and the indicator drive signals generated by
the CKS.
4) Receives the in-place signal of the remote board, and outputs the in-place
signal of the local board.
5) Outputs 32 differential level Clocks of 8 kHz and 2 MHz.
6) Outputs eight signals of 2 MHz and 2 Mbit/s meeting the ITU-T
Recommendation G.703.
1
Board Manual
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841CKD.
CKS CKB CKD

32 differential outputs
Differential drive array
8 kHz of 8 kHz and 2 MHz
Generate the G.703- Eight G.703-compliant

compliant output of 2 MHz outputs of 2 MHz
2 MHz
Generate the G.703-com-

Eight G.703-compliant
pliant output of 2.048 Mbit/s outputs of 2.048 Mbit/s
2.048 Mbit/s
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841CKD
Differential drive array module: Drives differentially the Clocks of 8 kHz and 2 MHz
sent by the CKS, and generates 32 differential Clock signals of 8 kHz and 2 MHz.
2 MHz G.703 signal output module: Processes the signals of 2 MHz sent by the
CKS through the backplane, and generates the eight G.703-compliant outputs of
2.048 MHz.
2 Mbit/s G.703 signal output module: Processes the differential signals of

2.048 Mbit/s sent by the CKS through the backplane, and generates eight G.703-
compliant outputs of 2.048 Mbit/s.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841CKD.
2
Board Manual
RUN
FA IL
CKD
Figure 2 C841CKD panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the C841CKD indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841CKD indicators

1. Flashes: The board is working normally (active board).
RUN Red Indicator 2. ON: The board is working normally (standby board). Flashes
3. OFF: The board is not working normally.
4 Layout
The C841CKD has no DIP switch and jumper.
5 Technical Indices
1) Outputs 32 differential signals of 2 MHz and 8 kHz, which meet the RS422 level
standard.
3
Board Manual
2) Outputs eight signals of 2.048 MHz and 2.048 Mbit/s in the 75 ohm matching
mode, which meet the ITU-T Recommendation G.703.
3) Power consumption of the board: 7.5 W
6 Attention
1) The two CKDs output differential signals of 8 kHz and 2 MHz simultaneously,
which are not in the active-standby mode.
2) The two CKDs output G.703-compliant signals of 2 MHz and 2 Mbit/s in the
active-standby mode.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CKS
Clock Source Board C841CKS
1 Overview
The C841CKS is located in the Clock frame of the AM/CM and provides the
Reference Clock signals for the C&C08 Switching System. The C841CKS integrates
the Stratum-2 and the Stratum-3 Clocks into a single board, and provides the
Stratum-2 or/and the Stratum-3 Clocks as per requirements.
2 Main Functions
The CKS pulls in and locks the reference signal, so that the Clock signals generated
by the CKS have the same frequency and phase features. The reference selection
refers to the selection of one out of six reference sources, then comparing the
phases with the signals of 8 kbit/s generated by the CKS, at a rate of 4,096 times
per second. The CPU collects the phase information, analyzes them, controls the
Direct Digital Synthesis (DDS) output and phase-locks the software.
I. Board functions
1) Locks the external Reference Clock, and filters the jitter and wander of the
external Reference Clock.
2) Provides interfaces for the input reference source signal of 8 kHz, 2.048 MHz
and 2.048 Mbit/s and the BITS interfaces.
3) Provides four working modes, namely, fast pull-in, locked, holdover and free-
run.
4) Offers field tuning with the availability of rough and fine tuning of the frequency,.
5) Provides protection switchover function for the frequency reference.
6) Provides the status control interface to control the Clock working status, and
gets the alarm information.
7) Provides the function of the standby CKS by locking the Clock phase of the
active CKS.
II. Main features
1) The phase discrimination uses 65.536 MHz, and the measurement accuracy is
up to 16 ns.
2) The board phase-locks the software through the CPU.
3) The crystal conforms to the Stratum-2 Class-A index level.
1
Board Manual
4) It has the detection function of hardware lock-losing, which can be switched
over by either the software or the hardware, ensuring high reliability.
1) Provides two differential Clock signals of 8 kHz as Clock reference input source.
2) Provides one Clock reference input source (E1 signal) of 2.048 Mbit/s.
3) Provides one Clock reference input source of 2.048 MHz.
4) Outputs one Clock signal of 2.048 MHz.
5) Outputs one E1 interface signal of 2.048 Mbit/s.
6) Outputs one Clock signal of 8 kHz.
7) Outputs one signal of 4 kHz to connect the active and standby boards.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841CKS.

Clock source
Reference selection Phase discrimination Main control

module count module module
Clock generation Clock output

DDS module CKD
module module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841CKS
Reference selection module: Selects any one among the signals of 8 kHz, 2 Mbit/s
and 2 MHz as the reference source of the board, and sends it to the Phase
discrimination count module.
Phase discrimination count module: Performs the phase discrimination function to

compare the Clock of 8 kHz received from the DDS frequency division with the
external input source.
Main control module: Accesses the phase difference information of the phase
discriminator, analyzes it, writes the data into the DDS and controls its output
frequency.
Clock generation module: Multiplies the Clock of 8.192 MHz generated by the
crystal oscillator to 32.768 MHz to be assigned as the input source of the DDS.
DDS module: Receives the data information from the Main control module in order
to verify that its output frequency features are the same as those of the input
reference source, and subsequently achieves the software phase-lock function.
2
Board Manual
Clock output module: Allows the DDS output to undergo the frequency changes.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841CKS.
RUN
AC T
F0
F1
LO F
DDS
LO C K
CLK
R8K0
R8K1
2MB 0
2MB 1
R2M0
R2M1
REFA
MOD
+12V
CKS
Figure 2 C841CKS panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the C841CKS indicators.
Table 1 Meaning and descriptions of the C841CKS indicators
Normal
status
1. Flashes slowly: The communication is normal. Flashes
RUN Red Indicator
2. Flashes fast: The communication is not normal. fast
Active/standby 1. ON: The board is in the active mode.
ACT Green Uncertain
indicator 2. OFF: The board is in the standby mode.
1. ON: The selected reference source is abnormal
Reference status
F0 Green (unavailable). OFF
indication
2. OFF: The selected reference source is normal.
F1 Green System indicator OFF when the entire system is normal. OFF
Hardware phase lock 1. ON: Hardware phase lock failure
LOF Green OFF
failure indicator 2. OFF: Hardware phase locked
1. OFF: DDS output is normal.
DDS Green DDS output indicator OFF
2. ON: DDS output is abnormal.
LOCK Green Undefined Null OFF
3
Board Manual
Normal
status
1. OFF: The time chip has its time corrected and is
CLK Green Time chip indicator working normally. OFF
2. Flashes: It is not working normally.
8 kHz reference ON when the first group of the reference source Clock
R8K0 Green
source indicator of 8 kHz is selected.
8 kHz reference ON when the second group of the reference source
R8K1 Green
source indicator Clock of 8 kHz is selected.
2.048 Mbit/s reference ON when the first group of the reference source of 2
2MB0 Green
source indicator Mbit/s is selected.
Note 1
2.048 Mbit/s reference ON when the second group of the reference source of
2MB1 Green
source indicator 2 Mbit/s is selected.
2.048 MHz reference ON when the first group of the reference source of 2
R2M0 Green
source indicator MHz is selected.
2.048 MHz reference ON when the second group of the reference source of
R2M1 Green
source indicator 2 MHz is selected.
External reference ON when the selected external frequency deviation is
REFA Green frequency deviation too large. Note 2
indicator
1. OFF: Free run
CKS working mode 2. Flashes fast: Fast pull-in
MOD Green Uncertain
indicator 3. Flashes slowly: Locked
4. ON: Holdover
+12V Green +12 V power indicator ON when the power of +12 V is normal. ON
Note:
1) The CKS has six reference source indicators, whose positions are R8K0, R8K1, 2MB0, 2MB1,
R2M0 and R2M1 respectively. When an external reference source is selected, the corresponding
indicator is supposed to be normally ON; otherwise it will be permanently OFF. R8K0 is the default
reference source, and has the top priority (unless other reference sources are set as the top priority at
the background). As long as R8K0 is available, R8K0 can be selected as the reference source by
default. If R8K0 is unavailable, R8K1 is selected as the reference source and so on for other reference
sources. If all the reference sources are unavailable after power-on, both the F0 indicator and the
R8K0 indicator become ON (as per default setting). F0 indicator turning from ON to OFF indicates the
conversion of the reference source from being unavailable to being available.
2) When the board is set as the Stratum-2 Clock, and the frequency deviation is over 0.4 ppm, the
REFA indicator becomes ON. When the board is set as the Stratum-3 clock, and the frequency
deviation is over 4.6 ppm, the REFA indicator becomes ON. Only when the board enters the locked
status, the frequency deviation of the reference source can be checked. If the frequency deviation is
too large, the board will go to the holdover status. Only when the reference source becomes normal
can the board get back to the locked status.
4
Board Manual
None.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the DIP switches and jumpers on the C841CKS.
ON S1 S4
123
12 34
ON S2
12 34
ON S3 ON S5
12 34 12 34
Figure 3 DIP switches and jumpers on the C841CKS
The CKS has five DIP switches, and their configurations are as below.
1) DIP switches S1 and S2 control the line matching values of the two reference
sources (E1) of 2.048 Mbit/s, and Table 2 lists their settings.
Table 2 DIP switches S1 and S2
DIP switch setting

Matching value of the reference source line
1 2 3 4
OFF OFF ON ON 120 ohm
ON ON OFF OFF 75 ohm
Note:
When two CKSes are in place, set the same matching resistance for both of them.
2) DIP switch S3
It controls the line matching values of the two reference sources of 2.048 MHz, and
Table 3 lists their settings.
5
Board Manual
DIP switch setting

Matching value of the reference source line
1 2 3 4
ON OFF ON OFF 120 ohm
OFF ON OFF ON 75 ohm
Note:
When two CKSes are in place, set the same matching resistance for both of them.
3) 3-core short-circuit line S4

S4 is equivalent to a single-pole double-throw switch and it is used for Read Only
Memory (ROM) loading as explained in Table 4.
Table 4 Jumper S4
Jumper selection mode Meaning

1-2 Normal working mode
2-3 ROM loading mode
4) DIP switch S5
It is used to set the information bit that identifies board software. Table 5 gives the
meaning of the DIP switch.
S5 bit Switching state Meaning Default status

ON Low Baud rate communication
1 OFF
OFF High Baud rate communication
The CKS uses the Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
(PDH) phase-lock mode to lock the PDH clock source
ON or the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) clock
source (when all the SDH sites have been
synchronized).
2 Uncertain
The CKS uses the SDH phase-lock mode to lock the
SDH service code stream (if some SDH site is not yet
OFF synchronized, the clock of 8 kHz extracted by the
trunk board from the service code stream can be
locked).
ON Set the CKS as the stratum-3 clock
3 Uncertain
OFF Set the CKS as the stratum-2 clock
ON The CKS uses the crystal of 8.192 MHz
4 ON
OFF Currently not used
6
Board Manual
Note:
1) The phase-lock mode used by the CKS can be set at the terminal maintenance console, and the
setting at the background is used.
2) The clock stratum of the CKS can be set at the terminal maintenance console, and the setting at the
background is used.
5 Technical Indices
1) Table 6 shows the technical indices of the Clock system.
Table 6 Technical indices of the Clock system
Serial No. Item Index and function

Stratum-2 Clock: ±4×10-7
Lowest accuracy
Stratum-3 Clock: ±4.6×10-6
Stratum-2 Clock: can synchronize to an
accuracy of ±4×10-7
Pull-in range
Stratum-3 Clock: can synchronize to an
1 Clock network access
accuracy of ±4.6×10-6
Maximum frequency Stratum-2 Clock: 5×10-10/day
deviation Stratum-3 Clock: 2×10-8/day
Initial maximum frequency Stratum-2 Clock: < 5×10-10
deviation Stratum-3 Clock: < 1×10-8
Maximum Relative Time Interval Error (MRTIE):
Ideal working status
≤ 1 ms
Long-term phase
2 MRTIE ≤ [as + (1/2)bs2 + c] ns
change
Holdover working status Stratum-2 Clock: A=0.5, b=1.16×10-5, c=1000
Stratum-3 Clock: A=10, b=2.3×10-4, c=1000
3 Input jitter tolerance See Figure 4
2) Figure 4 shows the lower limits for the input jitter and wander permitted by the
Clock system.
Y(U I) Peak-to-peak jitter and wander amplitude (log scale)
2
10
A 0 =36.9
1
10
Slope equivalent to 20dB/decade
A 1 = 1 .5
1
A 2 = 0 .2
-1
10
X
-5
1.2× 10 10 20 2 .4k 18 k 100 k f (Hz)
Figure 4 Lower limits of the maximum input jitter and wander tolerance
7
Board Manual
For example, when the jitter frequency of an input signal is 1 kHz, its range is over
1.5 UI and the switch is working normally, then the input signal is assumed to be
meeting the requirements.
6 Attention
The CKM frame comprises the PWC, CKS, CKD and Clock Frame Backplane (CKB)
boards. It occupies only 13 slots, that is, one half of the 26-slot standard frame.
8
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CKV
Clock Drive Board CB01CKV
1 Overview
The CKV is located in the Main control frame of the SM. It performs the differential
Clock drive in the Main control frame and then sends the Clock to the subscriber and
trunk frames.
2 Main Functions
The CB01CKV receives two groups of differential Clocks sent from the NET and
outputs after converting them into 34 groups of differential Clock signals.
I. Board functions
1) Performs the differential Clock drive in the Main control frame and sends the Clock
to the subscriber and trunk frames.
2) Matches the output signals.
II. Main features
1) The output signals are balanced differential signals, with strong common-mode
interference resistant capability.
2) All the differential output signals are connected in series with the resistors, which
resist the transient high current impact.
1) Inputs two groups of differential Clocks from the NET.

2) Outputs 34 groups of differential Clocks.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB01CKV.
1
Board Manual
Differential clock
Differential
clock receiving
Clock driving Differential clock driving
Differential clock
Differential clock driving
Differential clock
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB01CKV
Differential clock receiving module: Receives two groups of differential Clocks sent
from the NET.
Clock driving module: Drives one or more Clocks.
Differential clock driving module: Drives the output differential Clocks.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB01CKV.
2
Board Manual
+5V
CKV
Figure 2 CB01CKV panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the CB01CKV indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB01CKV indicators

Indicates the 1. ON: Indicating the +5 V power supply of this board
condition of the +5 V is normal.
+5V Red ON
power supply of this 2. Others: Indicates the +5 V power supply of this
board board is abnormal.

None.
4 Layout
The CB01CKV has no jumper and DIP switch.
5 Technical Indices
1) The board outputs 34 groups of differential Clocks.
3
Board Manual
2) The output signals meet the RS422 serial port standard.
3) The power consumption of the board is less than 5 W.
6 Attention
1) The CB01CKV must be used together with CB02MCB and CB02NETAO boards.
2) In actual applications, the CB01CKV and CB02NETA should be used as a single
unit.
3) A fault in the CB01CKV will not lead to the active-standby switchover of the NET.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CNU
Network Frame Central Switching Netboard

C841CNU
1 Overview
The C841CNU is located in the switching network frame of the AM/CM. It handles
the layer-2 switching of the three-layered switching network. The CNU and the SNU
form a complete switching network to switch the service data or the voice signals.
2 Main Functions
The C841CNU uses eight 4K×4K SD529 switching network chips as the switching
unit, and accomplishes two 8K×8K T-net with the COPY T principle. It uses the
programmable logic component to form the ‘address decode’ and 'Clock test’ circuit,
and provides control interfaces for the switching network.
I. Board functions
1) Provides two 8K×8K T-net switching functions.

2) Provides the Clock test functions, which automatically select the working Clock
from the two Clock signals.
3) Provides control interfaces of the switching network for the NCC.
4) Supports the insertion of read-back function needed by the self-test of the
switching network.
II. Main features
1) The switching network chip, SD529, is the self-designed ASIC.

2) The CNU contains no CPU and provides only the control interface. The NCC
controls the switching.
3) The board works in the active-standby mode and has automatic switchover
function.
4) The board provides the Clock fault detection and active-standby Clock
automatic switchover function.
1) Provides 64 speech channel UHWs of 16.384 Mbit/s.

2) Provides 64 speech channel DHWs of 16.384 Mbit/s.
3) Provides the CPU bus for controlling the switching network.
1
Board Manual
4) Receives two differential Clock signals from the Clock frame.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841CNU.
BHW0[0..15] FHW0[0..15]
Switching network module FHW0[16..31]

BHW0[16..31]
BHW1[0..15] FHW1[0..15]
BHW1[16..31] Switching network module FHW1[16..31]
8k0,8k1 Active/standby
Clock processing
2M0,2M1 switchover Standby board
module module
Addrbus,databus
Control bus CPU interface processing module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841CNU
Switching network module: Performs the time slot switching of 2×8k speech
channels.
Clock processing module: Provides the Clock test and Clock frequency
multiplication functions.
Active/standby switchover module: Implements the board status detection and

active-standby switchover functions.
CPU interface processing module: Provides the CPU bus interface.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841CNU.
2
Board Manual
RUN
FAIL
CNU
Figure 2 C841CNU panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the C841CNU indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841CNU indicators

1. Flashes: The board is working normally.
Running status
RUN Red 2. ON: The board is working in the standby status. Flashes
indicator
1. ON: The board is not running normally.
2. OFF: The board is running normally.

None.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the DIP switches and jumpers on the C841CNU.
3
Board Manual
D3
D4
J1
Figure 3 DIP switches and jumpers on the C841CNU
1) Jumper J1: It is used for debugging, which is not connected in normal

conditions.
2) Table 2 gives the meanings and descriptions of the SMT indicators.
Table 2 Meanings and descriptions of the SMT indicators on the C841CNU

ON: The board is currently working with Clock
D3 Red Clock 0 indicator Uncertain
0.
ON: The board is currently working with Clock
D4 Red Clock 1 indicator Uncertain
1.
5 Technical Indices
1) Switching capability: Switches two 8192×8192 speech channels
2) Power supply voltage: Vcc=4.75 V~5.25 V
4) Power consumption of the board: ≤ 15 W
6 Attention
The CNU is usually configured to the full capacity, that is, the frame contains a fixed
number of 16 CNUs.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CPC
Central Processing Unit C842CPC
1 Overview
The C842CPC is the central processing board of the AM/CM. It is applied to multiple
functional frames of the AM/CM, such as CPM, CNET and SPM. Since the functions
and slots of these frames are different, the C842CPC can be loaded with different
Host software to achieve different functions.
In the CPM frame, the CPC provides the equipment maintenance management
(AMP), central database management (CDP) and the bus control (BCP) functions.
In the CNET frame, it acts as the network control board (NCC) to control the speech
channel switching of the central switching network. In the SPM frame, it is
responsible for the Signaling System Number 7 (SS7), V5, Remote Subscriber
Access (RSA) and the Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Primary Rate
Adaptation (PRA) protocol processing, and the bus control within the Service
Processing Module (SPM).
2 Main Functions
The C842CPC contains the MPC860 processor and peripheral circuits. It provides
different functions when loaded with different Host software. The hardware of the
AMP, CDP, BCP and NCC are similar to that of the CPC. They are loaded with
different software for different functions and are named according to their functions.
I. Board functions
1) When used as the Administration Processor Board (AMP), the CPC maintains
and manages the AM/CM equipment, processes alarms and performs parallel
board loading.
2) When used as the CDP, the CPC hunts the subscriber number and trunk line of
the AM/CM, and this is an important step in call processing.
3) When used as the BCP, the CPC transfers data among the CPCs in the CPM
frame.
4) When used as the NCC, the CPC controls the switching network, switches the
relevant time slots and reports the network status.
5) When used in the SPM frame, the CPCs are divided into CPCN7, CPCV5,
CPCPRA and CPCRSA to provide the following functions.
1
Board Manual
a) CPCN7: It is used to process SS7 links. Each CPC processes four signaling links
of 64 kbit/s (four time slots). By overlaying multiple frames, it can process a
maximum of 1,024 SS7 links.
b) CPCV5: It is used to process the V5 protocol. Each CPC processes 64 V5 links

(when the load is 0.2 Erl per link) or 12 V5 links (when the load is 1 Erl per link).
c) CPCPRA: It is used to process the ISDN PRA protocol and can process a
maximum of 16 PRA signaling links.
d) CPCRSA: It is used to process the remote module protocol and can process a
maximum of 16 RSA signaling links.
6) When used as the BCC in the SPM frame, the CPC transfers data between the
CPC and SPC in the SPM frame.
II. Main features
1) The C842CPC is loaded with different software to perform different functions.

2) The board provides multiple communication interfaces.
3) The board has the Clock detection and selection functions.
4) The board can either be set in the active-standby working mode or not.
1) Provides an Ethernet interface.

2) Provides two HWs of 2 Mbit/s.
3) Provides the 32-bit bus to connect with other boards to perform the bus control
function.
4) Provides the RS422 level serial port that supports the point to multi-point
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) serial port
communication.
5) Supports the point-to-point UART differential serial port.
6) Provides the UART debugging serial port for an RS232 level.
7) Provides the debugging interface.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C842CPC.
2
Board Manual
Debugging interface
Comm port module

Comm port
Clock processing Clock signal
module
Central processing
Active/standby Compelled signal
module
switchover module
Bus interface
Dual-port
BOOT ROM FLASH SDRAM RAM
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C842CPC
Communication port module: Performs the level or code conversion function of the
Communication port.
Central processing module: Includes the central processor, BOOT ROM, FLASH,
Synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) and dual-port Random-Access Memory (RAM).
Clock processing module: Detects and selects the Clock.
Active/standby switchover module: Performs the board status detection and

automatic switchover function.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C842CPC.
3
Board Manual
RUN
FA IL
CPC
Figure 2 C842CPC panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the C842CPC indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C842CPC indicators

1. Flashes slowly: The active board is working
normally.
Indicates the running
2. ON: The standby board is working normally.
RUN Red status and program Flashes slowly
3. Flashes fast: The board is in the loading status.
loading
4. OFF: The board is faulty or the program is not
running.
1. ON: The board is not running normally.
FAIL Green Fault Indicator OFF
2. OFF: The board is running normally.

None.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the switches on the C842CPC.
4
Board Manual
S1
1234
S2
Figure 3 Switches on the C842CPC
1) Reset switch S2: It is the hardware reset button.

2) Table 2 gives the meanings of the DIP switch S1.
Color Meaning ON OFF

S1.1 Set the program running mode Debugging mode Loading mode
S1.2 Reserved
Set the flash write control Write program and data to flash after loading Flash in case of not
S1.3
writing
S1.4 Set the program loading switch Start from the flash Load from the BAM
5 Technical Indices
1) CPU type: MPC860MH, its performance reaches 52 MIPS (MIPS stands for
Million of Instructions Per Second) in the case of 40 MHz.
2) Ethernet interface: It provides a standard 10Base-T interface that conforms to
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.3 standard.
3) Serial port communication rate: 187 kbit/s, asynchronous, RS422 standard
differential level.
4) Power supply voltage: Vcc = 4.75 V ~ 5.25 V
5) Working temperature: 0 OC ~ 70 OC
6) Power consumption: P ≤ 15 W
5
Board Manual
6 Attention
In normal conditions, loading mode should be selected as the program running

mode.
6
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/C802CTX
Plug-in Card of Centrex Operator Console

C802CTX
1 Overview
The C802CTX is inserted in the ISA bus slot of a Centrex console, for the
communication of the console with the switch.
Note:
The card is a computer card for ISA bus and can be used only in those Personal Computers (PC)
having an ISA bus slot.
2 Main Functions
The card is inserted in the ISA bus slot of a PC and connected to the 8-Channel
Remote Feed Digital Subscriber Board (DSL)/DCN board of the switch through an
ordinary twisted-pair line, to transmit the data, voice and control information of a
Centrex console through a 2B+D interface. It shares the fundamental functions of
the ISDN U interface. The card plays the same role as NT1 on the network.
I. Board functions
1) Provides a voice interface for the operator to answer calls.

2) Performs the function of D channel of the Data Link Layer.
3) Accomplishes the fundamental function of the ISDN U interface.
4) Provides an ISA bus interface for communicating with a PC.
II. Main features
The C802CTX is a computer card with an ISA bus.
1) Provides an ISDN U interface for connection to the switch.

2) Provides two earphone or microphone interfaces, out of which usually only one
is used.
1
Board Manual
3) Provides the standard ISA interface for connection to the computer.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C802CTX.
PCM encoder/ DTMF Serial communication U interface

decoder module transceiver controller module module
MPU
Mailbox
communication
module
PC
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C802CTX
PCM encoder/decoder module: Encodes the analog voice from the microphone and
decodes the digital voice.
DTMF transceiver: Sends and receives DTMF signals.
Serial communication controller module: Transmits the ISDN D channel data.
U interface module: Achieves the function of the ISDN U interface.
Main processing unit: Realizes the control function of this card.
Mailbox communication module: Transmits data between the card and the PC.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C802CTX.
2
Board Manual
RUN
Figure 2 C802CTX panel
1) Card indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the C802CTX indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C802CTX indicators

1. Flashes slowly: The board is working normally,
but the U interface is not activated.
Running status
RUN Red 2. Flashes fast: The board is working normally and Flashes fast
indicator
the U interface is activated.
3. ON or OFF: The board is faulty.
2) U interface
The bottom jack is the U interface, which is connected to the DSL of the switch.
3) Earphone and microphone interface
The two jacks on the top are for earphone and microphone and at present only the
upper one is used.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the jumpers on the C802CTX.
3
Board Manual
XS1
XS2
123
Figure 3 Jumpers on the C802CTX
1) For the versions earlier than C802CTX REV.C (including REV.C), the jumpers
on the CTX are as described in Table 2.
Table 2 Meanings of jumpers on the C802CTX

Sequence No. XS1 XS2 XS3 Mapping address in PC of mailbox
1 1-2 IN 1-2 IN 1-2 IN D000: 0000~D000: 1FFF
2 1-2 IN 1-2 IN 2-3 IN D000: 2000~D000: 3FFF
3 1-2 IN 2-3 IN 1-2 IN D000: 4000~D000: 5FFF
4 1-2 IN 2-3 IN 2-3 IN D000: 6000~D000: 7FFF
5 2-3 IN 1-2 IN 1-2 IN D000: 8000~D000: 9FFF
6 2-3 IN 1-2 IN 2-3 IN D000: A000~D000: BFFF
7 2-3 IN 2-3 IN 1-2 IN D000: C000~D000: DFFF
8 2-3 IN 2-3 IN 2-3 IN D000: E000~D000: FFFF
Note:
At present, XS1, XS2 and XS3 are set as per sequence No. 8 in Table 2, which is the default ex-factory
setting.
2) For C802CTX REV.D

Table 3 describes the jumpers on the C802CTX.
4
Board Manual
Table 3 Meanings of jumpers on the C802CTX
Sequence No. XS1 XS2 Mapping address in PC of mailbox
1 1-2 IN 1-2 IN D000:0000~D000:1FFF
2 2-3 IN 2-3 IN D000:E000~D000:FFFF
Note:
At present, XS1 and XS2 are set as described in sequence No.2 in Table 3, which is the default ex-
factory setting.
5 Technical Indices
1) It provides an ISA bus interface, an ISDN U interface and two earphone or
microphone interfaces.
2) The maximum distance for U interface communication is 4 km (in 0.6 wire
diameter).
3) When grounded well, the card can withstand a lightning strike of 2,000 V.
4) The design of the U interface complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.961.
5) Power consumption of the card is less than 5 W.
6 Attention
As required by anti-lightning design, computers should be grounded.
5
Board Manual
Centrex Console Card with PCI Interface C803CTX
1 Overview
The C803CTX is inserted in the Peripheral Computer Interface (PCI) bus slot of the
Centrex console, for the communication of the console with the switch.
Note:
This card is a computer card for PCI bus and can be used only in PCs with PCI bus slot.
2 Main Functions
The card is inserted in the PCI bus slot of the PC and connected to the DSL/DCN of the
switch through an ordinary twisted-pair line, to transmit the data, voice and control
information of Centrex console through a 2B+D interface. It shares the fundamental
functions of the ISDN U interface. This card plays the same role as NT1 on the network.
I. Board functions
1) It provides a voice interface for the operator to answer calls.

2) It performs the function of the D-channel of the Data Link Layer.
3) It accomplishes the fundamental function of the ISDN U interface.
4) It provides a PCI bus interface for communicating with the PC.
5) It achieves the function of a computer operator.
II. Main features
The C803CTX is a computer card with a PCI bus.
1) It provides an ISDN U interface for connecting to the switch.

2) It provides two earphone and microphone interfaces, out of which usually only one
is used.
3) It provides a standard PCI for connecting to the computer.
1
Board Manual
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C803CTX.
PCM PCM Serial

encoder/ DTMF encoder/ DTMF Voice communication U interface
decoder transceiver decoder transceiver module controller chip
module module module
Earphone/ Earphone/ Mailbox PCI logic PC slot

MPU communication
microphone microphone module module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C803CTX
PCM encoder/decoder module: Encodes the analog voice from the microphone and
decodes the digital voice.
DTMF transceiver: Sends and receives DTMF signals, and enables the computer
operator to receive the dialed numbers once again.
Voice module: Assists the computer operator and plays the prompt tone.
Serial communication controller module: Transmits the ISDN D channel data.
U interface module: Performs the function of the ISDN U interface.
MPU: Achieves the control function of this card.
Mailbox communication module: Transmits data between the card and the PC.
PCI logic module: For the PCI bus interface.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C803CTX.
2
Board Manual
RUN
Figure 2 C803CTX panel
1) Card indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the C803CTX indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C803CTX indicators

1. Flashes slowly: The card is working normally, but the U
interface is not activated.
Running status
RUN Green 2. Flashes fast: The card is working normally, and the U Flashes fast
indicator
interface is activated.
3. ON or OFF: The card is faulty.
2) U interface
The bottom jack is a U interface connected to the DSL of the switch.
3) Earphone/microphone interface
The two jacks on the top are for earphone and microphone and at present only the
upper one is used.
4 Layout
The C803CTX has no jumper and DIP switch.
5 Technical Indices
1) It provides a PCI bus interface, an ISDN U interface and two earphone and
microphone interfaces.
3
Board Manual
2) It achieves the functions of a computer operator.
3) The maximum distance for U interface communication is 4 km (in 0.6 wire
diameter).
4) When grounded well, the card can withstand a lightning strike of 2,000 V.
5) The design of the U interface complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.961.
6) The power consumption of the card is less than 5 W.
6 Attention
As required by anti-lightning design, computers should be grounded.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/DEL
µ Law Analog Subscriber Board CC05DEL
1 Overview
The CC05DEL is located in the subscriber frame of the Switching Module. It

implements the BORSCHT function for the 16 analog subscriber lines. It is capable of
connecting 16 pairs of subscriber lines out of which, the 8th and 9th channels can
perform the polarity reversal function.
2 Main Functions
The CC05DEL consists of the SLIC and the Control Circuit. The SLIC mainly
implements the BORSCHT function, and the Control Circuit controls the 16 subscriber
lines, allocates dynamically time slots and communicates with the upper-level master
node.
I. Board functions
1) Provides the feeding function.

2) Provides the over-voltage protection function.
3) Provides the ringing control function.
4) Provides the on-hook and off-hook test function.
5) Provides the encoding and decoding function and implements the conversion
between the analog and digital signal.
6) Provides the hybrid circuit to implement the conversion between the analog 2-wire
& 4-wire signals, and simultaneously implements the balanced matching with the
subscriber line impedance.
7) Provides the ‘internal line test’ and ‘external line test’ functions.
II. Main features
1) The µ law is adopted for coding.

2) The interface impedance is 600 ohm.
3) Multiple ringing modes are available.
4) It can display the caller number.
5) The Host software can set the upper and lower limits of hooking.
6) Key parts, such as the Thick Film Circuit and ASIC are self-designed and
developed.
1
Board Manual
1) Provides 16 pairs of subscriber line interfaces, that is, to connect 16 subscribers.

2) Provides two HWs to the DRV, and simultaneously receives two HW signals sent
by the DRV.
3) Receives Clock signals of 2 MHz and 8 kHz sent by the DRV.
4) Provides the Serial Port signal to implement master and slave node
communication with the NOD.
5) Receives the ‘ringing current’ signal sent by the PWX.
7) Provides the channel for the internal and external line tests.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CC05DEL.
HW
COMBO SLIC Line1
TxDI
Tx
NOD CPU
COMBO SLIC Line15
Rx
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CC05DEL
the working status of the ringing current relay and the SLIC.
CPU: Receives and carries out the commands sent by the NOD, monitors the working
status of this subscriber line board, and reports the message of this board to the NOD.
COMBO: Performs the conversion between analog and digital signals, and implements
functions such as coding, decoding and filtering.
SLIC: Implements the analog subscriber line feeding and the 2-wire/4-wire conversion,
and performs the off-hook and on-hook tests.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CC05DEL.
2
Board Manual
RUN
DEL
Figure 2 CC05DEL panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the CC05DEL indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CC05DEL indicators

1. Flashes fast: Request for configuration (ON for 0.5
To indicate running
RUN Red second and OFF for 0.5 second) Flashes slowly
status of the board
2. Flashes slowly: The board is normal.

None.
4 Layout
The CC05DEL has no DIP switch and jumper.
5 Technical Indices
1) Feeding mode: Dual constant current feeding.
3) Impedance characteristic: impedance of 600 ohm
3
Board Manual
4) Protection feature: Meets the ITU-T Recommendation K.20
5) Transmission distance: ≤ 500 m (cable diameter of 0.5 mm)
6 Attention
The CC05DEL provides only two channels with polarity reversal function. If all the 16
channels are to have the polarity reversal function, the CC01DDT is recommended.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/DIU
Data Interface Board CB01DIU
1 Overview
The CB01DIU is located in the subscriber frame of the SM and provides Digital Data
Interface function.
Note:
The CB01DIU is available in four types: CB01DIU0, CB01DIU1, CB01DIU2 and CB01DIU3.
1) CB01DIU0 has two V.24 (DCE) interfaces (DCE stands for Data Communications Equipment).
2) CB01DIU1 has two V.35 (DCE) interfaces.
3) CB01DIU2 has two co-directional interfaces of 64 kbit/s in the master mode.
4) CB01DIU3 has four co-directional interfaces of 64 kbit/s in the master mode.
2 Main Functions
The DIU provides the data interfaces of V.24, V.35 and co-directional 64 kbit/s, and
provides data transfer channel of 64 kbit/s for the subscribers. The DIU is plugged in
the subscriber frame of the C&C08 Switching System to provide two interfaces (V.24,
V.35 or co-directional 64 kbit/s), or plugged in another DIU frame to provide four
interfaces.
I. Board functions
1) Provides V.24 interfaces.

2) Provides V.35 interfaces.
3) Provides co-directional interfaces of 64 kbit/s.
II. Main features
1) Provides V.24 or V.35 interfaces of 64 kbit/s in the DCE mode.

2) Provides co-directional interfaces of 64 kbit/s in the master mode.
1) Provides two or four digital data interfaces.

2) Provides two HWs to the DRV, and simultaneously receives two HWs sent by the
DRV.
1
Board Manual
3) Receives Clock signals of 2 MHz and 8 kHz provided by the DRV.
4) Provides the serial port signal to perform the Master/Slave node communication
with the NOD.
5) Receives the board address selection signal provided by the backplane.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB01DIU.
D rive inte rfa c e

HW 0 S ig na l m o d ule 1
p ro c e s s ing V .3 5
HW 1 m o d ule D rive inte rfa c e
m o d ule 2
V .2 4
D rive inte rfa c e
RX M a in m o d ule 3
c o ntro l unit G .7 0 3
TX
D rive inte rfa c e
m o d ule 4
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB01DIU
Signal processing module: Deals with the conversion from interface signals to HW
signals and occupies two HWs.
Drive interface module: Performs the level conversion and the drive function of the
digital interface signal. Each interface occupies one time slot on the HW. For Drive
interface 1, any one time slot out of TS0 to TS15 of HW0 will be occupied; for Drive
interface 2, any one out of TS16 to TS31 of HW0 will be occupied; for Drive interface
3, any one out of TS0 to TS15 of HW1 will be selected; and for Drive interface 4, any
one out of TS16 to TS31 of HW1 will be selected.
Main control unit: Monitors the board status, receives the commands of the Host and
reports the board information.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB01DIU.
2
Board Manual
RUN
LNK1
LNK2
LNK3
LNK4
DIU
Figure 2 CB01DIU panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB01DIU indicators

1. Flashes slowly: Normal communication with the NOD
RUN Red Indicator 2. Flashes fast: Abnormal communication with the NOD Flashes slowly
1. ON: Link 1 (interface 1) is working normally.

Channel 2
LNK1 Yellow 2. OFF: Link 1 (interface 1) is working abnormally. ON
indicator
Channel 3 1. ON: Link 2 (interface 2) is working normally.

LNK2 Yellow 2. OFF: Link 2 (interface 2) is working abnormally. ON
indicator
1. ON: Link 3 (interface 3) is working normally.
Channel 4 2. OFF: Link 3 (interface 3) is working abnormally.
LNK3 Yellow ON
indicator
Channel 5 1. ON: Link 4 (interface 4) is working normally.
LNK4 Yellow ON
indicator 2. OFF: Link 4 (interface 4) is working abnormally.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the DIP switches and jumpers on the CB01DIU.
3
Board Manual
ON
1 2
S2
123
JP 3
JP 4
JP 2 JP 1
1
2
JP 8 3
1 1
2 2 JP 5
3
JP 7 3
1
2 1
3 2 JP 6
3
Figure 3 DIP switches and jumpers on the CB01DIU
1) Table 2 gives the meanings of JP1 and JP2 combinations.
Table 2 Meanings of JP1 and JP2 combinations
JP1, JP2 Meaning

1-2 8K SRAM
2-3 32K SRAM
2) Table 3 gives the meanings of JP3, JP4, JP5 and JP6 combinations.
Table 3 Meanings of JP3, JP4, JP5 and JP6 combinations
JP3, JP4, JP5, JP6 Meaning

1-2 Co-directional 64 kbit/s interface
2-3 V.35 interface
3) Table 4 gives the meanings of JP7 and JP8 combinations.
Table 4 Meanings of JP7 and JP8 combinations
JP7, JP8 Meaning

1-2 Default
2-3 Reserved for use
5 Technical Indices
1) The electrical features of V.24 interface meet the ITU-T Recommendation V.28,
and the functional features meet the ITU-T Recommendation V.24.
4
Board Manual
2) The electrical features of V.35 interface meet the ITU-T Recommendation V.35
and the functional features meet the ITU-T Recommendation V.24.
3) The co-directional interface of 64 kbit/s meets the ITU-T Recommendation
G.703, and the waveform meets the parameters shown in Table 5.
Table 5 Parameter indices of the co-directional waveform of 64 kbit/s
Parameters Data signal (V) Timing signal (V)

Waveform amplitude (the vertical midpoint as reference) 0.95 ~ 1.05 0.95 ~ 1.05
4) The static power consumption of the circuit board: 3.5 W
6 Attention
1) When the subscriber cabinet of the C&C08 Switching System is plugged in, only
interface1 and interface3 can be used, and the interface types can be randomly
combined.
2) When the DIU frame is plugged in, four interfaces can be provided, but there are
restrictions on the combination types.
3) If the co-directional interface of 64 kbit/s is used, there is no need to install the
Signal Processing module corresponding to V.24 or V.35.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CB01DRV
32-Port Dual Tone Number Receiving & Drive

Board CB01DRV
1 Overview
The CB01DRV is located in the 32-channel subscriber frame in the SM, driving HW
signal, serial port signal and clock signal in the frame and providing dual tone
number receiving function.
2 Main Functions
Each DRV can simultaneously receive signals of 32 channels from the subscriber
part. After the number is received, the DRV will report the number to the MPU
through the serial port. In addition, it converts the level of the signal at the
subscriber side and network side.
I. Board functions
1) Receives and drives HW signal, serial port signal and clock signal.
2) Converts the level of HW signal, serial port signal and clock signal.
3) Performs DTMF number receiving in the subscriber frame.
4) Communicates with the host in the master/slave node communication mode.
5) Supports two mutually aided DRVs.
z In normal working condition, each of the two mutually aided master nodes
manages the communication of a half frame respectively, but the number
receivers work in the load-sharing mode, supporting the subscribers of the
entire frame.
z If one DRV is faulty or the host forces the two DRVs to aid each other, the
master node of the local board is responsible for the communication of the
entire frame, but it is still the two DRVs that drive the HW signal and clock
signal.
z If only one DRV is in position, it drives the signal of the entire frame and
receives the DTMF numbers from the subscribers.
II. Main features
1) Supports A law and µ law.

2) Provides good suppression of receiving extra digits and repeated numbers.
3) Supports automatic mutual aid of HW signals in case of two DRVs in position.
1
Board Manual
1) Provides a maximum of eight HWs of 2.048 Mbit/s to connect with the network
board.
2) Receives the clock signals provided by the active and standby network boards.
3) Provides a master/slave node serial port to connect with the NOD.
4) Provides HW signal, clock signal and serial port signal whose level has been
converted for connection with the ASL and the DSL in the subscriber frame.
5) Provides HW signal, clock signal and serial port signal to the adjacent DRV.
Figure 1 shows the function principle of the CB01DRV.
Level driving
Level driving module
module ASL
control module
Mutual aid
B
N
Adjacent DRV
E
T
Switching DTMF number
network module receiving module
Main control module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB01DRV
Level driving module: Responsible for driving differential level and TTL level.
Mutual aid control module: Responsible for address decoding, HW signal control,
clock signal generation and board mutual aid logic implementation.
Switching network module: Responsible for switching between subscriber HW time

slot and DSP number receiving time slot.
DTMF number receiving module: Responsible for receiving DTMF signals from the
subscriber and then reporting the number to the CPU.
Main control module: Responsible for receiving commands sent by the host,
analyzing and carrying out them, and reporting the number and state received to the
host.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB01DRV.
2
Board Manual
RUN
A CT
B U SY
C OM
L OA D
D R V 32
Figure 2 CB01DRV panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB01DRV indicators

1. Flashes fast: The board is powered on or it is carrying
Indicates the
out self-detection on receipt of the reset command. Flashes every
RUN Red running state of
2. Flashes slowly: The board is working normally. one second
the board
3. OFF: No clock signal is inputted into the board.
Indicates the ON when the
1. ON: The board is in the active state.
ACT Green active/standby board is in active
2. OFF or flashes: The board is in the standby state.
state state
Indicates the ON when the
1. ON: The number receiver is working.
BUSY Green number number receiver
2. OFF: The number receiver is idle.
receiving state is in use
Indicates the
1. ON or flashes: The communication link is normal.
COM Green communication ON or flashes
2. OFF: The communication link is abnormal.
state
Flashes fast: The board software is upgrading or CPLD ON in case of
Indicates the
LOAD Green is loading, active/standby DRV network chips are loading and
loading state
backing up. backup
3
Board Manual
SW1: Reset switch of the board
SW2: 4-bit DIP switch

JP9: CPLD loading jumper
Table 2 Meanings of the CB01DRV switches
DIP/Reset
Meaning Normal status
Switch
SW1 Reset switch, for resetting the board CPU. None
SW2 Reserved OFF
CPLD forced loading connector. Connected: forced CPLD
JP9 OFF
loading; Disconnected: No CPLD loading.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the DIP switches and jumpers on the CB01DRV.
SW2
ON
12 34
JP9
SW1
Figure 3 DIP switches and jumpers on the CB01DRV
5 Technical Indices
1) Nominal frequency of DTMF
Low frequency groups: 697, 770, 852 and 941 Hz
High frequency groups: 1229, 1336, 1447 and 1633 Hz
4
Board Manual
2) DTMF frequency deviation: Reliable receiving within 2%, receiving is not
guaranteed within the range of 2%~3%, and non-receiving is guaranteed
outside 3%
3) DTMF level range: -4~-26 dBm; double-frequency level difference: ≤6 dB
4) DTMF signal limiting duration: 40-45 ms/bit
5) DTMF signal interval duration: 40-45 ms
6) Can simultaneously receive DTMF numbers of 32 channels.
7) The serial port rate of the master/slave node is 187.5 kbit/s.
8) The power consumption of the board: 10-15 W
6 Attention
None.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CC06DRV
SMT Dual Tone Number Receiving & Drive Board

CC06DRV
1 Overview
The CC06DRV is located in the subscriber frame of the SM. It implements the HW,
serial port & Clock signal driving and dual tone receiving functions of the subscriber
frame.
Note:
The CC06DRV is available in two types, CC06DRV0 and CC06DRV1. They are based on A-law and µ-law
number-receiving.
2 Main Functions
Each DRV can simultaneously receive DTMF numbers of 16 channels. The number
receiver receives the signals sent from the subscriber frame after switching. Then the
numbers are reported to the MPU by the DRV through the serial port. In addition, the
CC06DRV converts the signal level at the subscriber side and the network side.
I. Board functions
1) Receives and drives the signals of the HW, the serial port and the Clock.
2) Converts the signal level of the HW, the serial port and the Clock.
3) Receives the DTMF numbers from the subscriber frame.
4) Communicates with the Host by means of master/slave node communication.
5) Two DRVs work together and perform the ‘mutual aid’ function.
z In normal operation, each of the two ‘mutual-aid’ master nodes manages the
communication of half a frame separately, but the number receiver is in load-
sharing mode and can be used by the subscribers of the entire frame.
z When there is a fault on the adjacent DRV or in case the Host compels mutual aids,
the master node of the board implements the communication of the entire frame,
but still the two DRVs drive the respective half frame signals of the HW and the
Clock.
1
Board Manual
z If only one DRV is available, the board drives the signals of the entire frame and
receives the dual tone number dialed by the subscriber.
II. Main features
1) Supports the A/µ law, but a DRV supports only one mode at a particular time.
2) Provides well-developed multiple numbers, repeated numbers suppression
function.
3) If two boards are available, automatic mutual aid of the HW signals can be
achieved.
1) Provides two HWs of 2.048 Mbit/s to connect the BNET.

2) Receives two groups of Clocks provided by the active or standby network board.
3) Provides one master or slave node serial port to connect the NOD.
4) Provides the signals of the HW, the Clock and the serial port after level conversion
to interconnect with the ASLs and the DSLs in the subscriber frame.
5) Provides a set of signals of the HW, the Clock and the serial port to the adjacent
DRV.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CC06DRV.
Level driving
Mutual aid control logic
Level driving module
module ASL
B
N
E Adjacent DRV
T
Switching Dual tone

network module number-receiving
module
Main control module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CC06DRV
Level driving module: Drives the differential level and the TTL level.
Mutual aid control logic module: Translates the address, controls the HW signal,
generates the Clock signal, and accomplishes the board mutual aid logic.
Switching network module: Deals with the switching between the subscriber HW time
slots and the number-receiving time slots.
2
Board Manual
Dual tone number-receiving module: Receives the dual tone dialing numbers of the
subscribers and reports the information to the CPU.
Main control module: Receives the command of the Host, analyzes and carries it out. It
reports the received number and the status to the Host.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CC06DRV.
RUN
DRV
Figure 2 CC06DRV panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CC06DRV indicators
Indicator Color Meaning Description Normal status

1. Flashes fast: The board performs self-check after
power-on or receiving the reset command.
2. Flashes slowly: The board is working normally.
3. OFF: No clock is input for the board.

None.
3
Board Manual
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the CC06DRV.
CC06DRV
JP3
Figure 3 Layout of the CC06DRV
JP3 is a Joint Test Action Group (JTAG) port, providing boundary scanning function.
5 Technical Indices
1) DTMF nominal frequency
Low frequency groups: 697 Hz, 770 Hz, 852 Hz and 941 Hz
High frequency groups: 1229 Hz, 1336 Hz, 144 Hz and 1633 Hz
2) DTMF frequency deviation: Reliable receiving within 2%, receiving is not
guaranteed within the range of 2%~3%, and non-receiving is guaranteed outside
3%.
3) DTMF level range: -4~-26 dBm. Double-frequency level difference: ≤6 dB
4) DTMF signal limiting duration: 40~45 ms/bit
5) DTMF signal interval duration: 40~45 ms/bit
6) Can simultaneously receive DTMF numbers of 16 channel.
7) The serial port rate of the master/slave node is 187.5 kbit/s.
8) The power consumption of the board is 1.750 W.
4
Board Manual
6 Attention
The board provides 16 channels, which support either the A-law or µ-law to receive
numbers according to different board software.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/DSL
8-Channel Remote Feed Digital Subscriber Board

CB03DSL
1 Overview
The CB03DSL is located in the subscriber frame of the SM. It deals with the access of
the 8-channel ISDN Basic Rate Adaptation (BRA) Subscriber Interface (U interface)
and supports the access of the standard ISDN service and the Centrex console.
2 Main Functions
The CB03DSL provides eight ISDN BRA subscriber interfaces and supports the access
of the standard ISDN service and the Centrex console, according to the configuration.
The board is located in the slot in the subscriber frame of the SM, sharing the two
2 Mbit/s HWs provided by the backplane with other boards in the subscriber frame. The
B channel of the ISDN BRA interface is connected with the SM switching network
through HWs on the backplane after the switching in the small switching network of the
board.
I. Board functions
1) Provides the standard ISDN BRA subscriber access service.

2) Manages the activation and deactivation of the U interface.
3) Processes the messages of the D-channel of the Data Link Layer.
4) Transfers the ISDN Layer-3 message.
5) Provides access to the Centrex console.
II. Main features
1) Supports the access of both the standard ISDN service and the Centrex console at
a time, on a single board.
2) The U interface uses 2B1Q codes, and supports only the terminal access of the
same code type.
3) Provides the U interface with remote feeding of 95 V and less than 42 mA
according to the configuration. It is capable of cutting off feeding during
over-current conditions, and recovers feeding automatically when the loop fault
disappears.
4) The board software can be loaded when the board is in service.
5) The DSL's slot is compatible with that of the ASL.
1
Board Manual
1) Provides eight ISDN BRA subscriber line interfaces.

2) Provides two HWs of 2 Mbit/s to connect the SM switching network.
3) Provides one serial port for the master/slave node communication with the NOD.
4) Receives a Clock of 4 MHz and frame synchronization signals of 8 kHz provided
by the backplane.
5) Performs the U interface test with the internal line test bus and loop test bus of the
backplane.
6) Receives the board address selection signal provided by the backplane.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB03DEL.
Two HWs
U interface B channel SM switching network
line transceiver exchange
HDLC
controller
Match impedance
8-channel U interface Protection circuit
Remote feeding
Processor
control
Test switching
Serial
communication Master node
controllerr
Test control
Test bus
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB03DSL
U interface line transceiver: Responsible for the activation and deactivation of the
8-channel U interfaces, receiving and transmitting of the 2BIQ code, encoding &
decoding and receiving & transmitting of 2B+D data flow to U interface signal frames.
B channel exchange: Provides the unblocked switching function between the B

channel of the ISDN BRA interface and the HW on the backplane and helps the B
channel to connect to the SM switching network.
HDLC controller: Extracts and inserts messages of the D-channel of the 8-channel
subscriber interfaces, and receives & transmits the HDLC signaling simultaneously.
Processor: Provides the board initialization control, status supervision and the
signaling processing functions.
2
Board Manual
Serial communication controller: Achieves high-speed communication between the
board and the master node.
Impedance match: Provides impedance matching for the digital circuits.
Protection circuit: Protects the equipment from the damages caused by overvoltage
and overcurrent signals, such as lightning, surge current and industrial frequency
power.
Remote feeding control: Controls the remote feeding and performs ‘overcurrent
protection’ function for the port. The DSL controls the dc power supply and ON/OFF of
the 8-channel ports through the remote feeding control circuit. The power supply can be
set through the background data configuration, to define which port should be powered
on. The power supply circuits have such functions as over-current detection, automatic
protection and power supply automatic recovery by the software control.
Test switching: Switches the board to the test mode.
Test control: Works with the test board to perform internal and external loop tests of the
subscriber interface.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB03DSL.
3
Board Manual
RUN
L0
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
COM
DSL
Figure 2 CB03DSL panel
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB03DSL indicators

1.One second ON/one second OFF: It means the
board is working normally.
It is used to indicate One second
2.Half a second ON/half a second OFF: It means the
RUN Red the running status ON/one second
board is requesting configuration information from the
and program loading. OFF
Host.
3. ON or OFF: The board is not working normally.
1. ON: The port is activated.
Port activation
2. OFF: The port is deactivated.
indicator, indicating
3. 125 ms ON/125 ms OFF: U interface is being
L0-L7 Green the activation status Uncertain
activated.
of the eight ports
4. 250 ms ON/250 ms OFF: S/T interface is being
respectively
activated.
1. Flashes: Indicates the Master/Slave communication
Serial
is normal.
COM Red communication Flashes
2. ON or OFF for a long time: The board is not working
indicator
normally.
4
Board Manual
4 Layout
There are no DIP switch, jumper or SMT indicator on the CB03DSL.
5 Technical Indices
1) The CB03DSL supports the 8-channel ISDN BRA U interfaces.
2) Subscriber interface protection conforms to ITU-T Recommendation K.20.
3) Line interface of the U interface conforms to ITU-T Recommendation G.961,
European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) DTR/TM 3002 and
ETSI ETR 080.
z U interface signal code: 2B1Q code
z Transmission distance: ≤ 4 km (0.4 mm cable diameter)
≤ 5 km (0.5 mm cable diameter.
4) Each subscriber port can be provided with remote feeding of 95 V and not more
than 42 mA.
5) Table 2 gives the power consumption features of the CB03DSL.
Table 2 The power consumption features of the CB03DSL

No remote feeding, deactivation 40.6 mA
-48V power supply Remote feeding, activation 205 mA (eight channels)
Remote feeding, conversation 205 mA (eight channels)
Deactivation 560 mA
+5V power supply Activation 740 mA (eight channel)
Conversation 740 mA (eight channel)
Deactivation 12.8 mA
-5V power supply Activation 12.9 mA (eight channel)
Conversation 12.9 mA (eight channel)

7) Power consumption: about 20.5 W
8) The rate of asynchronous serial port communication is 187.5 kbit/s.
6 Attention
Since the CB03DSL needs to provide remote feeding to the subscriber ports, its power
consumption is much more than that of the ASL. Therefore, the limit of power
consumption should be taken into consideration during the configuration.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/DTF
Digital Trunk Board CB12DTF
1 Overview
The CB12DTF is located in the trunk frame of the SM. It provides the E1 trunk
interface for the SM to process the R2 signaling of all the countries, the international
No. 5 Signaling, the Russian Signaling and other special overseas signaling.
Note:
Based on the signaling processing modes, the CB12DTF is available in three types, CB12DTF0
(processing the Russian Signaling), CB12DTF1 (processing the R2 Signaling), and CB12DTF2
(processing the No. 5 Signaling).
2 Main Functions
The HW signals from the BNET go through the differential conversion and are
connected to the switching network board, where they are exchanged with the HW
signals from the E1 interface circuit and the DSP module.
I. Board functions
1) Provides two E1 (32 time slots) PCM interfaces to connect the other switches.
2) Extracts the Clock of the upper level office as the Reference Clock source of
the local office in order to synchronize with the upper level office.
3) Processes the R2 Signaling of every country to meet the requirements of
different countries and regions.
4) Provides the standard international No. 5 Signaling.
5) Provides the special signaling of Russia and the east European countries.
II. Main features
1) The board provides no Control Memory Read Back function of the network chip.
2) The communication serial port is fixed as Serial Port 2.
1) Provides two service HWs of 2 Mbit/s to connect the BNET.
1
Board Manual
2) Receives the BNET-provided Clock signals of 2 MHz or 4 MHz and the frame
synchronous signals of 8 kHz.
3) Provides two E1 interface signals.
4) Provides a serial port to communicate with the NOD.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB12DTF.
E1
B
D riv e
N
Switching module
in te rfa ce 2 x2 M m o d u le 2 x2 M
2 xE 1 2 x2 M
m o d u le E
T
DSP
2 x2 M
p ro ce s s in g
m o d u le
BUS
S e rial po rt
C P U p ro ce ssin g m o d u le
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB12DTF
E1 interface module: Deals with the conversion between the High Density Bipolar 3
(HDB3) code signals and the TTL level signals and the insertion & extraction of line
signaling.
Switching Module: Handles the TS conversion function of the UHWs and DHWs of
the board.
Drive module: Drives and receives the service HWs.
DSP processing module: Processes the receiving and sending of the international
No. 5 line signaling.
CPU processing module: Provides the board initialization control, status supervision
and signaling processing functions.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB12DTF.
2
Board Manual
RUN
CAS
LLB1
RLB1
RRA1
RMA1
SLP1
LOC1
RCL1
DSP
LLB2
RLB2
RRA2
RMA2
SLP2
LOC2
RCL2
DTF
Figure 2 CB12DTF panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB12DTF indicators

1. Flashes fast: The board is powered on for
initialization.
RUN Red Run Indicator 2. Flashes slowly: The board is working normally. Flashes slowly
3. ON: The board is not working normally.
4.OFF: The board is not working normally.
1. OFF: PCM1 and PCM2 are in the Common
Channel Signaling (CCS) mode.
2. ON: PCM1 and PCM2 are in the Channel-
Signaling mode
CAS Green Associated Signaling (CAS) mode. Uncertain
indicator
3. Flashes fast: PCM1 is the CAS, PCM2 is the CCS.
4. Flashes slowly: PCM1 is the CCS, PCM2 is the
CAS.
2) Table 2 gives the meanings and descriptions of the CB12DTF alarm indicators.
3
Board Manual
Table 2 Meanings and descriptions of the CB12DTF alarm indicators

LLB1 Reserved OFF
Channel 1 Remote Loop Back ON: Remote loop back
RLB1 Green OFF
Indication OFF: Working normally
Channel 1 Frame Remote Alarm ON: Frame remote alarm
RRA1 Green OFF
ON: Multi-frame remote
Channel 1 Multi-frame Remote Alarm
RMA1 Green alarm OFF
Indication
OFF: Working normally
ON: Slip frame
SLP1 Green Channel 1 Slip Frame Indication OFF
ON: Loss of Signal
LOS1 Green Channel 1 Loss of Signal Indication OFF
ON: Non-reception of signals
RCL1 Green Channel 1 Signal Unreceived Indication OFF
ON: DSP fault
DSP Green DSP fault indication OFF
LLB2 Reserved OFF
Channel 2 Remote Loop Back ON: Remote loop back
RLB2 Green OFF
Channel 2 Frame Remote Alarm ON: Frame remote alarm
RRA2 Green OFF
ON: Multi-frame remote
Channel 2 Multi-frame Remote Alarm
RMA2 Green alarm OFF
Indication
ON: Slip frame
SLP2 Green Channel 2 Slip Frame Indication OFF
ON: Loss of Signal
LOS2 Green Channel 2 Loss of Signal Indication OFF
ON: Non-reception of signals
RCL2 Green Channel 2 Signal Unreceived Indication OFF
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the DIP switches and jumpers on the CB12DTF.
4
Board Manual
ON
J1
S2
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 S4
J3 J4
ON J5
S1
1234
ON
S3
12345678
Figure 3 DIP switches and jumpers on the CB12DTF
I. Reset switch and DIP switch
1) Press-button switch S4: It is the hardware reset button.

2) DIP switch S1: It is a 4-bit switch to select a Russian signaling system. Table 3
gives its meaning.
Table 3 Setting of the signaling mode
DIP switch setting

Signaling mode
1 2 3 4
OFF OFF OFF OFF CAS2, NORKA
ON OFF ON OFF 1VF
OFF ON OFF ON Inductive
3) DIP switch S2: It is an 8-bit DIP switch, and the settings are given in Table 4.
Table 4 Channel 1 E1 interface mode selection (S2)
DIP switch setting E1 interface mode

Conductor outside the Conductor outside
8, 7, 6 5 4 3, 2, 1 Matching resistance
receiving end the sending end
XXX ON ON ON Grounded Grounded Matching resistance 75 ohn
XXX ON OFF ON Grounded Not grounded Matching resistance 75 ohm
XXX OFF ON ON Not grounded Grounded Matching resistance 75 ohm
XXX OFF OFF ON Not grounded Not grounded Matching resistance 75 ohm
XXX OFF OFF OFF Not grounded Not grounded Matching resistance 120 ohm
4) DIP switch S3: It is an 8-bit DIP switch, and the settings are given in Table 5.
5
Board Manual
Table 5 Channel 2 E1 interface mode selection (S3)
z E1 interface mode
Sending end
Receiving end external
8, 7, 6 5 4 3, 2, 1 external Matching resistance
conductor
conductor
XXX ON ON ON Grounded Grounded Matching resistance 75 ohm
XXX ON OFF ON Grounded Not grounded Matching resistance 75 ohm
XXX OFF ON ON Not grounded Grounded Matching resistance 75 ohm
XXX OFF OFF ON Not grounded Not grounded Matching resistance 75 ohm
XXX OFF OFF OFF Not grounded Not grounded Matching resistance 120 ohm
II. E1 chip debugging interface (J1)
JTAG interface, using the double 10 pins.
III. DSP debugging interface (J5)
JTAG interface, using the double 14 pins.
IV. Logic loading interfaces (J3, J4)
JTAG interface, using the single 3 pins.
5 Technical Indices
1) Provides two E1 line interfaces.
2) Provides the 256×256 full Digital Cross Connect Network.
3) Provides the Frequency Signal Processing function.
4) The signal-interface code error meets the ITU-T Recommendation G.826, that
is, the transmission-code error rate between the E1 interfaces is less than 1.0e-
9.
5) The E1 interface delay meets the ITU-T Recommendation G.703, that is, the
absolute group delay average of the E1 interface is not more than 900 µs within
the frequency range of 500~2800 Hz.
6) The E1 interface output waveform and output features are in accordance with
the provisions specified in GB6879-86 “Technical Requirements for 2048 kbit/s
Pulse Modulated Multiplexing Equipment”.
7) The maximum permitted jitter of the E1 interface signal meets the ITU-T
8) If the test is done within the frequency range, below 100 kHz and there is no
input jitter, the peak to peak jitter at the tributary output end is not more than
0.25 UI.
9) The E1 interface input impedance meets the ITU-T Recommendation G.703,
that is, the nominal input impedance of the E1 interface is 75 ohm (unbalance).
6
Board Manual
10) The return loss of the E1 interface meets the ITU-T Recommendation G.703
requirements, that is, the return loss of the E1 interface against the nominal bit
rate frequency (2.048 Mbit/s) percent is:
z bp≥12 dB at 2.5%~5%(51.2~102.4 kHz).
z bp≥18 dB at 5%~100%(102.4~2048 kHz).
z bp≥14 dB at 100%~150%(2048~3072 kHz).
11) The No. 5 line signaling transmission indices are as follows:
z Nominal frequency: f1=2400 Hz, f2=2600 Hz
z Frequency deviation: ±6 Hz
z Level: -9 ± 1 dBm0
z Dual frequency sending level difference: ≤1 dB
12) The No. 5 line signaling receiving level indices are as follows:
z Reliable receiving within 2400±15 Hz, non-receiving is guaranteed outside the
range of 2250 Hz ~ 2500 Hz.
z Reliable receiving within 2600±15 Hz, non-receiving is guaranteed outside the
range of 2500 Hz ~2750 Hz.
z Reliable receiving level range: -16 ~ -2 dBm0
z Reliable non-receiving level range: ≤-26 dBm0
z Double frequency receiving level difference ≤ 5 dB
13) Russian 2600 Hz single-tone signal transmission indices are as follows:
z Level: -9.5±1 dBm0
z Level: -4.3±0.5 dBm0
z Level: -4.3±0.5 dBm0
16) Russian 2600 Hz single-tone signal receiving indices are as follows:
z Reliable receiving within 2600±15 Hz, non-receiving is guaranteed outside
2600±100 Hz, and the receiving is not guaranteed within other frequency range.
z Reliable receiving level range: -15 ~ +4 dBm0
z Reliable non-receiving level range: ≤ -26 dBm0
2600±100 Hz, and the receiving is not guaranteed within other frequency
ranges.
z Reliable receiving level range: -15 ~ +4 dBm0
500±25 Hz, and the receiving is not guaranteed within other frequency ranges.
7
Board Manual
z Reliable receiving level range: -32 ~ -4 dBm0
450±50 Hz, and the receiving is not guaranteed within other frequency ranges.
z Reliable receiving level range: -32~ -4 dBm0
z Reliable non-receiving level range: ≤-34 dBm0
20) Transmission distance: ≤1000 m.
6 Attention
The S1, S2 and S3 are set in factory as: S1=0000, S2=00011111, S3=00011111.
8
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/DTR
Dual Tone Transmit/Receive Board CC04DTR
1 Overview
The CC04DTR is located in the Main control frame of the SM. It is used as the DTMF
signal receiver when the SM supports an access network, and may also be used as a
trunk signal transceiver of the DTMF inter-switch signaling.
Note:
The CC04DTR is available in three types.
The CC04DTR0 supports A law coding, and provides the DTMF signal receiving and transmitting function.
The CC04DTR1 supports µ law coding, and provides the DTMF signal receiving and transmitting function.
The CC04DTR2 supports A law coding, and provides only the DTMF signal receiving function.
2 Main Functions
The dual tone signal time slot from a trunk interface is switched, under the control of the
MPU, to an idle time slot of the HW allocated by a DTR through the BNET switching
network board. The MPU sends signal receiving commands through the mailbox
communication to a DTR, which starts receiving signals at the corresponding time slot
and acknowledges the received signal to the MPU. When a DTR is used as the DTMF
register of the trunk, in addition to the above function, it can work with the outgoing
trunks and perform the signal transmitting function of a forward register under the
control of the MPU.
I. Board functions
1) Sends the DTMF signals according to the commands from the Host.
2) Receives the DTMF signals that identify the incoming trunk and reports the result
to the Host.
II. Main features
1) Provides the self-test function, which starts after power-on, reset or ‘forced reset’
by the Host.
2) Provides well-developed ‘multiple numbers’, ‘repeated numbers suppression’
functions.
1
Board Manual
3) The DTR's slot is compatible with that of the boards such as MFC, NO.7, LAP.
1) Provides a set of buses for the mailbox communication.

2) Provides one HW signal of 2.048 Mbit/s.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CC04DTR.
B HW Dual tone
N signal receiving
E module
T
M Mailbox Main
P communication
control module
module
U
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CC04DTR
Dual tone signal receiving module: Receives, identifies, processes and transmits the
16-channel DTMF signals.
Main control module: Communicates with the Host through the mailbox, configures the
DSP according to the commands from the Host, and reports the detected numbers to
the Host.
Mailbox communication module: Exchanges information between the Host MPU and
the DTR.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CC04DTR.
2
Board Manual
RUN
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
DTR
Figure 2 CC04DTR panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CC04DTR indicators

1. Flashes fast: Indicates the board status shortly
RUN Red Indicator after power-on or reset. Flashes slowly
CH0~CH15 Green Channel indicator ON when the channel is occupied. ON

None.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the CC04DTR.
3
Board Manual
CC04DTR
JP4
Figure 3 Layout of the CC04DTR
JP4 is a JTAG interface, and provides the boundary scanning function.
5 Technical Indices
1) DTMF nominal frequency
High frequency groups: 1229 Hz, 1336 Hz, 1447 Hz and 1633 Hz
2) DTMF receiving conditions
Frequency deviation: Reliable receiving within 2%, receiving is not guaranteed
between 2%~3% and non-receiving is guaranteed outside the range of 3%.
DTMF level range: -4 ~ -26 dBm
Dual frequency level difference: ≤ 6 dB
DTMF signal limiting duration: 30 ms/bit ~ 40 ms/bit
DTMF signal interval duration: 30 ms ~ 40 ms

3) DTMF transmitting conditions
Frequency deviation: < ±2%
Level: Low frequency groups -9±3 dBm, high frequency groups -7±3 dBm. High and
low frequency level difference of the same signal should not exceed 2 dBm.
Signal duration: >40 ms/bit
Signal interval: >40 ms
4
Board Manual
4) Provides 16 DTMF receivers.
6 Attention
The CCO4DTR2 can only receive signals but cannot transmit signals.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/DTT
T1 Digital Trunk Board C801DTT
1 Overview
The C801DTT is located in the trunk frame of the SM, and performs T1 trunk interface
functions. Each board provides two standard T1 interfaces enabling the board with the
function of line alarm detection and the CAS transmission & receiving.
2 Main Functions
I. Board functions
1) Provides two T1 interfaces.

2) Provides the line alarm detection function.
3) Provides T1 CAS transmission and receiving.
4) Provides A/µ conversion function.
II. Main features
1) T1 interface provides the line protection function.

2) The board provides the self-loop test function.
3) The board provides the A/µ conversion function.
1) Provides two service HWs of 2 Mbit/s to connect the BNET.

2) Receives Clock signals of 2 MHz and 4 MHz and frame synchronization signals of
8 kHz provided by the BNET.
3) Provides two T1 interface signals.
4) Provides one master/slave node serial port to communicate with the NOD.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C801DTT.
1
Board Manual
B
T1 Drive N
interface 2x2M 2x2M
2xE1 2x2M Signal interface E
module processing module T
module
BUS
Serial port
CPU processing module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C801DTT
T1 interface module: Performs the inter-conversion between Bipolar 8 Zero

Substitution (B8ZS) code pattern signal and TTL level signal. Also, it performs the
insertion and extraction of line signaling.
Signal processing module: Performs A/µ law conversion function.
Drive interface module: Drives and receives the service HWs.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C801DTT.
2
Board Manual
RUN
PWR
S/ES
SLP1
BA1
YA1
LOS1
RCL1
RFA2
BLK1
DSP
B8/A
SLP2
BA2
YA2
LOS2
RCL2
BLK2
DTT
Figure 2 C801DTT panel
Table 1 Meanings of the C801DTT indicators
Indicator Color Meaning Normal status

1. Flashes: The board works normally.
RUN Red Flashes
2. OFF: Communication between the DTF and NOD failed.
1. ON: Power supply is normal.
PWR Red ON
2. OFF: Power supply is abnormal.
1. ON: The frame is SF-D4 formatted.
S/ES Green Configuration
2. OFF: The frame is Extended Super Frame (ESF) formatted.
1. ON: There is a slipped frame in the first channel.
SLP1 Green OFF
2. OFF: The signal in the first channel is normal.
1. ON: There is a ‘blue alarm’ in the first channel.
BA1 Green OFF
2. OFF: The first channel is normal.
1. ON: There is a ‘yellow alarm’ in the first channel.
YA1 Green OFF
2. OFF: The first channel is normal.
1. ON: The signal’s ‘loss of synchronization’ occurs in the first
LOS1 Green channel. OFF
1. ON: The signal loss occurs in the first channel.
RCL1 Green OFF
BLK1 Green Reserved for future use OFF
1. ON: The DSP is faulty.
DSP Green OFF
2. OFF: The DSP is normal.
B8/A Green Reserved for future use OFF
1. ON: There is a slipped frame in the second channel.
SLP2 Green OFF
2. OFF: The signal in the second channel is normal.
3
Board Manual
1. ON: There is a ‘blue alarm’ in the second channel.
BA2 Green OFF
2. OFF: The second channel is normal.
1. ON: There is a ‘yellow alarm’ in the second channel.
YA2 Green OFF
2. OFF: The second channel is normal.
1. ON: The signal’s ‘loss of synchronization’ occurs in the second
LOS2 Green channel. OFF
1. ON: The signal loss occurs in the second channel.
RCL2 Green OFF
BLK2 Green Reserved for future use OFF
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the DIP switches on the C801DTT.
C801DTT0
ON S2
ON S1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
Figure 3 DIP switches on the C801DTT
Table 2 gives the meanings of the reset switch and DIP switches on the C801DTT.
Table 2 Meanings of the reset switch and DIP switches
Switch Meaning Default setting

S1 Serial port mode setting Setting 1, 2 as OFF and 3, 4 as ON
S2 Reserved for future use Setting all as OFF
5 Technical Indices
1) Functional index: Each board provides two T1 interfaces.
2) Line code is B8ZS or Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI), communication rate is
1544 kbit/s, and trunk cable is 100 ohm, twisted pair.
4
Board Manual
3) The CPU is 80C31 and the master frequency is 12 MHz.
4) The power consumption of the board is 3 W.
5) The board conforms to ITU-T G.703, G.704 and HKTA2012.
6) The maximum transmission distance is 500 m.
6 Attention
100 ohm, balanced cable is used as the trunk cable.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/EMA
Emergency Action Board CC03EMA
1 Overview
The CC03EMA is located in the Main control frame of the SM, and is mainly used to
monitor the working status of the active and standby MPU. It coordinates dual-
processor data backup, controls dual-processor switching and carries out the hot
backup of the active processor in the SM.
2 Main Functions
After the switch is powered on, the MPU A is active and the MPU B is standby, by
default. When the active processor goes faulty, the EMA controls automatic
switching between the active and standby processors. To enable switching from
active (which has become faulty) to standby, the EMA reads data from the active
processor and saves them in its mailbox, then writes them into the standby
processor until all the data is read and written. Finally, the EMA compares the data
of the active processor with that of the standby and transfers the controlling right to
the standby processor if two sets of the data are found to be the same.
I. Board functions
1) Monitors the working status of the two processors (active and standby).
2) Judges the active and standby status of the MPU.
3) Controls the switching of the dual-processor.
4) Coordinates the data backup of the two processors.
5) Transfers and exchanges the information of the active and standby processors.
II. Main features
1) Reports the cause for switching.

2) Provides a transparent data channel between the active and standby
processors.
3) Provides board’s self-test function.
4) Provides status display function.
5) Provides hardware Watch Dog Timer (WDT) function.
1) Provides a set of buses for mailbox communication with the active MPU.
2) Provides a set of buses for mailbox communication with the standby MPU.
1
Board Manual
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CC03EMA.
MPU A PRAM MPU B
Communication Control Communication

mailbox A module mailbox B
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CC03EMA
Parameter Random Access Memory (PRAM): It is a big mailbox used for the active
and the standby processors to back up data at any moment.
Communication mailbox A: It is used to buffer the communication information

between the MPU A and EMA.
Control module: The CPU on the EMA exchanges information with the active and
standby processors (MPU A and MPU B) through the two communication mailboxes
A and B to supervise the operation of the dual-MPU software.
Communication mailbox B: It is used to buffer the communication information

between the MPU B and EMA.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CC03EMA.
2
Board Manual
RUN
A/B
ACT
SBY
OUT
ACT
SBY
OUT
EMA
Figure 2 CC03EMA panel
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CC03EMA indicators

Flashes at every two seconds when the Flashes at every 2
RUN Red Indicator
board is normal. seconds
Active board indicator ON when A is active, OFF when B is
A/B Yellow Uncertain
active.
ACT Green Indicator for A as active. ON when A is active. Uncertain
SBY Yellow Indicator for A as standby ON when A is standby. Uncertain
OUT Green Off-line indicator of A. ON when A is off line. OFF
ACT Yellow Indicator for B as active ON when B is active. Uncertain
SBY Green Indicator for B as standby ON when B is standby. Uncertain
OUT Yellow Off-line indicator of B. ON when B is off line. OFF
4 Layout
The board has no DIP switch and jumper.
3
Board Manual
5 Technical Indices
1) CPU master frequency: 16.384 MHz
2) The capacity of the mailbox on the board for backing up active and standby
processor data is 8 KB.
6 Attention
1) The MPU A is the upper MPU in the SM main control frame, and the MPU B is
the lower MPU.
2) The EMA cannot control the switching of the MPUs until S1.1 switch on the
backplane of the main control frame of the switching module is set to ON
(delivery time default setting).
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/C841ET16
16-Channel E1/T1 Interface Board C841ET16
1 Overview
The C841ET16 is the E1/T1 compatible trunk interface board, which receives, sends,
switches, multiplexes and demultiplexes the 16 E1/T1 signals, and supports the
processing of Channel-Associated No. 5 Signaling, R2 Signaling and Russian
Signaling & A/µ conversion of 8-channel E1/T1. It is located in the AM/CM interface
frame, and is slot-compatible with the 40M Optic Interface Board (OBC) and SDH
Photoelectric Interface Board (STU).
Note:
There are two kinds of C841ET16 finished boards: C841ET160 (DSP pinch plate not attached) and
C841ET161 (DSP pinch plate attached). To process the No. 5 Signaling, Russian channel associated
signaling or A/µ conversion of 8-channel E1/T1, select the C841ET161; otherwise, select the
C841ET160.
2 Main Functions
Each ET16 provides 16 E1/T1 interfaces, separates the voice and signaling of the
E1/T1 signal and multiplexes them into two service HWs of 16 Mbit/s and one link
HW of 2 Mbit/s. After the processing by the High-Speed System Interface Board
(QSI), the ET16 multiplexes the service HWs into the high-speed optical signals and
sends them to the CNET, converges the link information and sends it to the CCM
frame.
I. Board functions
1) Supports the connection of Remote Switching Module (RSM) and RSA

modules.
2) Supports the connection of the inter-office SS7 Signaling trunks.
3) Supports the connection of the inter-office R2 and No. 5 Channel-Associated
Signaling trunks.
4) Supports the V5 trunk connection of the standard access network.
5) Supports the SA7 bit processing function of the V5 service.
1
Board Manual
6) Supports the Digital Circuit Multiplication Equipment (DCME) connection
function.
7) Extracts the Clock from the upper level office through the trunk interface. The
port number can be randomly selected and set.
8) Provides the register signaling and line signaling processing function of the
No. 5 Signaling.
9) Meets the R2 Signaling standards of every country, including the digital line
signals, pulse line signals, metering pulse signals and number pulse signals.
10) The R2 Signaling parameters can be flexibly configured, including the
configuration of the pulse sending time duration, pulse receiving identification,
pulse sending & receiving bit and the sending & receiving polarity.
11) Supports Russia channel associated line signaling, including bi-directional and
unidirectional CAS2, unidirectional CAS1 (NORKA), bi-directional CAS1
(INDUCTIVE), 1VF line signaling and Decade Pulse (DP) register signaling.
12) Supports the channel associated signaling of high capacity, and the link
message between SPM and it is forwarded through the CPC_CAS board,
instead of the QSI. Two HDLC links of 64 kbit/s are provided by each ET16 and
connected to two CPC_CAS boards respectively. When the two links are
normal, the PCM of odd number and that of even number work in the load-
sharing mode, if one PCM is faulted, all the work will be switched over to the
normal link.
II. Main features
1) E1/T1 interfaces are compatible, but one ET16 supports only one interface
mode.
2) By default, the board is configured into the E1 working mode.
3) T1 interface does not support the Channel-Associated Signaling.
4) Board software, DSP software and logic software can be loaded when the
board is in service.
1) Provides two service HWs of 16 Mbit/s to the QSI, and receives two service
HWs of 16 Mbit/s from the QSI.
2) Provides one signaling link of 2 Mbit/s to the QSI, receives one signaling link of
2 Mbit/s from the QSI.
3) Receives the system Clock of 16 MHz and frame synchronous signals of 8 kHz
sent by the QSI.
4) Provides a serial port to facilitate the Master node/Slave node communication
with the QSI.
5) Provides 16 line interface signals to connect the ET16 Drive Card (ETD).
6) Provides the synchronous Clock of 8 kHz from the upper level office for the
Clock frame.
2
Board Manual
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841ET16.
Switching network module

MUX/ Q
E1/T1
ET16
16x2M DEMUX 2x16M

16 E1s/T1s Interface module S
16x2M
module
I
2M
HDLC 16x2M Signaling
processing
module
BUS
Serial port
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841ET16
E1/T1 interface module: Handles the conversion between the HDB3 code (E1) or
AMI code (T1) signals and the TTL level signals.
Switching network module: Handles the switching of time slots of UHWs and DHWs
and HDLC links in the board.
Multiplex/demultiplex module: Facilitates the conversion between the sixteen

2 Mbit/s signals and two 16 Mbit/s signals.
Signaling processing module: Deals with the receiving and sending of the
international No. 5 Signaling.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841ET16.
3
Board Manual
R UN
FAIL
E T 16
Figure 2 C841ET16 panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841ET16 indicators

1. Flashes at the interval of one second: The
board works normally.
Used to indicate the 2. Flashes at the interval of 0.5 second: The board Flashes at the
RUN Red running state and communication failed. interval of one
program loading 3. Flashes fast: Indicates that the board is being second
loaded.
4. ON or OFF: The board does not work normally.
1. ON: The board is abnormal.
FAIL Green RUN fault indicator OFF
2. OFF: The board is normal.

z Reset switch S1: This is the hardware reset button.
z DIP switch S3 is as shown in Table 2. ("Not to pull" by default)
4
Board Manual
Table 2 Meanings of the DIP switch S3
Bit Meaning ON OFF

S3.1 Debugging switch Debugging status Normal status
S3.2 Print setting switch Can print Cannot print
S3.3 Logic loading mode setting switch Cable loading Software loading
S3.4 Reserved for future use
z Ethernet interface (J4): It is used for software debugging and supervision.

z Debugging serial port (J3): It is an RS232 serial port, used to print information
during debugging. The software running process & its results can be observed
at the workstations.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the DIP switches and jumpers of the C841ET16.
C841ET16
1 2 3
VC01SDSP
J5 D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
J4
S2
J12 J3
4 3 2 1
1 2 3
J6
S1
1 2 3 4
S3
J1 J2
Figure 3 DIP switches and jumpers on the C841ET16
1) DIP switch S2
Table 3 gives the meanings of the DIP switch S2.
5
Board Manual
Bit Meaning ON ETD Board Type

75 ohm E1 line impedance matching SW2.1=ON; SW2.2=ON ETD_A
120 ohm E1 line impedance matching SW2.1=ON; SW2.2=OFF ETD_B
Combination of S2.1 100 ohm T1 line impedance matching SW2.1=OFF; SW2.2=ON ETD_C
and S2.2 The interface resistance of the first
eight E1 channels is 120 ohm, and that
SW2.1=OFF; SW2.2=OFF ETD_D
of the last eight T1 channels is 100
ohm.
S2.3 Board self-loop function HW not in self-loop HW in self-loop
2) Jumpers
Table 4 gives the default configuration of jumpers.
Table 4 Default configuration of jumpers
Jumper Function Default value in factory

J5 Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) 2-3
Master/Slave loading mode
J6 FPGA reset mode 1-2
3) SMT indicators
Table 5 gives the meanings of the SMT indicators on the C841ET16.
Table 5 Meanings of the SMT indicators on the C841ET16

ON: One or several links are faulty.
HDLC Red Link state indicator OFF
OFF: All the links work normally.
E1/T1 interface state ON: One or several trunks are faulty.
DT Red OFF
indicator OFF: All the trunk channels are normal.
ON: The clock of the local board is abnormal or the
CKI Red Local board indicator board does not have Clock. OFF
OFF: The clock of the local board is normal.
ON: The system clock is abnormal or there is no
System Clock
CKS Red system Clock. OFF
indicator
OFF: The system clock is normal.
ON: The DSP works abnormally or the DSP pinch
DSP working state
DSP Red plate is not in place. OFF
indicator
OFF: The DSP works normally.
4) Background Debug Mode (BDM) debugging interface (J1)

The interface is a 10-pin jack, through which the CPU, in the debug mode, directly
gets the commands to facilitate the debugging of software and hardware.
5) JTAG interface (J2, J12)
It provides the boundary scanning function.
6
Board Manual
5 Technical Indices
1) Supports the 16 E1/T1 line interfaces and provides two speech channels of
16.384 Mbit/s.
2) Provides the HDLC link of 2.048 Mbit/s and supports the N x 64 kbit/s structure.
3) E1 transmission signal code: HDB3 code
4) T1 transmission signal code: B8ZS code
5) Transmission distance: ≤1200 m
6) Line Clock jitter: ≤3 ns
7) Supports one RS422 communication serial port and one RS232 debugging
serial port.
8) Provides the standard 10 Mbit/s Ethernet 10Base-T standard. The Media
Access Control (MAC) layer uses the IEEE820.3 Carrier Sense with Multiple
Access/Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) protocol.
10) Power consumption of the board:
C841ET160 (DSP pinch plate not attached) about 7.5 W;
C841ET161 (DSP pinch plate attached) about 12.5 W

11) The ‘jitter wander’ of the E1 interface is less than -30 dB.
12) The No. 5 Signaling time duration indices are as follows:
a) Minimum sending time duration: for the seized: 40±10 ms, for the rest: 125±25
ms
b) Maximum sending time duration: for requesting to send the code, for releasing
the safeguard and for other Acknowledgement (ACK) signals (passive signals):
4~9 s; for busy, answer, clear conditions (active signals): 10~20 s
c) For the seizure signals, when the sending party detects circuit contention, it will
continuously send the seizure signals for 850±200 ms.
a) Nominal frequency: f1=2400 Hz, f2=2600 Hz
b) Frequency deviation: ±6 Hz
c) Level: -9±1 dBm0
d) Dual frequency sending level difference: ≤1 dB

14) The No. 5 register signaling transmission indices are as follows:
a) Nominal frequency: 700 Hz, 900 Hz, 1100 Hz, 1300 Hz, 1500 Hz, 1700 Hz
7
Board Manual
d) Dual frequency sending level difference: ≤1 dB
a) Reliable receiving within 2400±15 Hz, non-receiving is guaranteed outside the
b) Reliable receiving within 2600±15 Hz, non-receiving is guaranteed outside the

c) Reliable receiving level range: -16 ~ -2 dBm0
d) Reliable non-receiving level range: ≤ -26 dBm0
e) Dual frequency receiving level difference: ≤5 dB

16) The No. 5 register signaling receiving level indices are as follows:
a) Reliable receiving when the frequency bias is ±15 Hz.
b) Reliable receiving level range: -14 ~ 0 dBm0
c) Reliable non-receiving level range: ≤ -24 dBm0
d) Dual frequency receiving level difference: ≤ 4 dB
6 Attention
1) Based on the Host configuration, the board provides 16 E1/T1 interfaces and it
supports the E1/T1 mixed mode. In the default status, the board is configured
as the E1 mode.
2) In the E1 mode, the ET16 is configured as the 75 ohm and 120 ohm line
interface boards (ETDA, ETDB).
3) In the T1 mode, the ET16 board is configured as the 100 ohm line interface
board (ETDC).
4) The ET16s have no backups. A fully configured frame has 16 boards, and they
are inserted in slots 2~9, and 14~21.
8
Board Manual
16-Channel E1/T1 Interface Board C842ET16
1 Overview
The C842ET16 is the E1/T1 compatible trunk interface board, which receives, sends,
switches, multiplexes and demultiplexes 16 E1/T1 signals, and supports the
processing of Channel-Associated No. 5 Signaling, R2 Signaling & Russian
Signaling and bi-directional A/µ conversion of 16 channels. It is located in the
AM/CM interface frame, and is slot-compatible with the C841ET16, OBC and STU.
The C842ET16 board is upgraded from the C841ET16 board. It uses its 5420DSP
to achieve the bi-directional A/µ conversion of 16 E1s/T1s. The C841ET16 board
supports the bi-directional A/µ conversion of only a maximum of 8 E1s/T1s.
Note:
The C842ET16 board is available only in one printed circuit board.
It is available in two manufactured boards, C842ET16A (with A/µ DSP chip) and C842ET16B (without
A/µ DSP chip). When it is necessary to process A/µ conversion, the DSP chip is welded. Otherwise, it
is not welded.
Each C842ET16 manufactured board is available in two finished boards. So there are four finished
boards totally.
Finished DSP pinch No. 5 A/µ Remark

board board signaling/RUS conversion
CAS
C842ET16A0 Without Not support Not support Equivalent to the original C841ET160
(without the DSP pinch board)
C842ET16A1 With Support Not support Equivalent to the original C841ET161
(with the DSP pinch board) but not
support the A/µ conversion
C842ET16B0 Without Not support Support 16 Bi-directional A/µ conversion of 16 E1/T1
channels signals can be configured at will.
C842ET16B1 With Support Support 16 Reserved for future
channels
2 Main Functions
Each ET16 provides 16 E1/T1 interfaces, separates the voice and signaling of the
E1/T1 signal and multiplexes them into two 16-Mbit/s service HWs and one 2-Mbit/s
1
Board Manual
link HW. After the processing by the QSI board, the ET16 multiplexes the service
HWs into the high-speed optical signals and sends them to the CNET, converges
the link information and sends it to the CCM frame.
I. Board functions
1) Supports the connection of RSM and RSA modules.

2) Supports the connection of the inter-office SS7 Signaling trunks.
3) Supports the connection of the inter-office R2, No. 5 CAS and Russian CAS
Signaling trunks.
4) Supports the V5 trunk connection of the standard access network.
5) Supports the SA7 bit processing function of the V5 service.
6) Supports the DCME connection function.
7) Extracts the Clock from the upper level office through the trunk interface. The
port number can be randomly selected and set.
8) Provides the register signaling and line signaling processing function of the
No. 5 Signaling.
9) Meets the R2 Signaling standards of every country, including the digital line
signals, pulse line signals, metering pulse signals and number pulse signals.
10) Supports flexible configuration of R2 Signaling parameters, including the
configuration of the pulse sending time, pulse receiving identification, pulse
sending & receiving bit and the sending & receiving polarity.
11) Supports bi-directional A/µ conversion of 16 E1/T1 signals.
II. Main features
1) E1/T1 interfaces are compatible, but one ET16 supports only one interface
mode.
2) By default, the board is configured into the E1 working mode.
3) T1 interface does not support the Channel-Associated Signaling.
4) Board software, DSP software and logic software can be loaded when the
board is in service.
5) The A/µ conversion of 16 E1s/T1s can be configured flexibly.
1) Provides two 16-Mbit/s service HWs to the QSI, and receives two 16-Mbit/s
service HWs from the QSI.
2) Provides one 2-Mbit/s signaling link to the QSI, receives one 2-Mbit/s signaling
link from the QSI.
3) Receives the system Clock of 16 MHz and frame synchronous signals of 8 kHz
sent by the QSI.
4) Provides a serial port to facilitate the Master node/Slave node communication
with the QSI.
5) Provides 16 line interface signals to connect the ETD card.
2
Board Manual
6) Provides the synchronous Clock of 8 kHz from the upper level office for the
Clock frame.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C842ET16.

E1/T1 line interface board
E1/T1 Mux/ Q
Switching 16x2M Demux 2x16M A/u con-
16 E1s/T1s interface 16x2M -version S
module network module module I
module
2M 2M HDLC
HDLC 16x2M DSPpro-
-cessing
module
BUS
Serial ports
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C842ET16
E1/T1 interface module: Handles the conversion between the HDB3 code (E1) or
AMI code (T1) signals and the TTL level signals.
Switching network module: Handles the switching of time slots of UHWs and DHWs
and HDLC links in the board.
Multiplex/demultiplex module: Facilitates the conversion between the sixteen 2-

Mbit/s signals and two 16-Mbit/s signals.
A/µ conversion module: Processes the bi-directional A/µ conversion of 16 E1/T1

signals.
DSP processing module: Deals with the receiving and sending of the international
No. 5 Signaling.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C842ET16.
3
Board Manual
R UN
FAIL
E T 16
Figure 2 C842ET16 panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C842ET16 indicators

1. Flashes at the interval of one second: The
board works normally.
Used to indicate the Flashes at the
2. Flashes at the interval of 0.5 seconds: The
RUN Red running state and interval of one
board communication fails.
program loading second
3. Flashes fast: The board is being loaded.
4. ON or OFF: The board does not work normally.
1. ON: The board is abnormal.
FAIL Green RUN fault indicator OFF

z Reset switch S1: This is the hardware reset button.
z DIP switch S3 is as shown in Table 2.
4
Board Manual
Bit Meaning ON OFF Default status

S3.1 Debugging switch Debugging status Normal status OFF
S3.2 Print setting switch Cannot print Can print OFF
S3.3 Null Reserved Reserved OFF
S3.4 Clock selection Select the 32-MHz clock Select the 16-MHz double- OFF
switch of the board frequency clock from the QSI
z Ethernet interface (J4): It is used for software debugging and supervision.

z Debugging serial port (J3): It is an RS232 serial port, used to print information
during debugging. The software running process & its results can be observed
at the workstations.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the DIP switches and jumpers of the C842ET16.
C842ET16
VC01SDSP D7 DT
D8 CKS
D9 CKI
D10 DSP
D11 HDLC
J4
J3
S1
4
3
S3 2
1
Figure 3 DIP switches and jumpers on the C842ET16
5
Board Manual
Table 3 gives the meanings of the SMT indicators on the C842ET16.
Table 3 Meanings of the SMT indicators on the C842ET16

ON: One or several links are faulty.
HDLC Red Link state indicator OFF
OFF: All the links work normally.
E1/T1 interface state ON: One or several trunks are faulty.
DT Red OFF
indicator OFF: All the trunk channels are normal.
ON: The clock of the board is abnormal or the
Indicator of the clock
CKI Red board does not have Clock. OFF
of the board
OFF: The clock of the board is normal.
ON: The system clock is abnormal or there is no
System Clock
CKS Red system Clock. OFF
indicator
OFF: The system clock is normal.
ON: The DSP works abnormally or the DSP pinch
DSP working state
DSP Red board is not in place. OFF
indicator
OFF: The DSP works normally.
5 Technical Indices
1) Supports the 16 E1/T1 line interfaces and provides two speech channels of
16.384 Mbit/s.
2) Supports the bi-directional A/µ conversion of 16 E1/T1 signals when there is
the A/µ DSP chip.
3) Provides the HDLC link of 2.048 Mbit/s and supports a structure of N x 64 kbit/s.
4) E1 transmission signal code: HDB3 code
5) T1 transmission signal code: B8ZS code
6) Transmission distance: ≤1200 m
7) Line Clock jitter: ≤3 ns
8) Supports one RS422 communication serial port and one RS232 debugging
serial port.
9) Provides the standard 10-Mbit/s Ethernet 10Base-T standard. The MAC layer
uses the IEEE820.3 CSMA/CD protocol.
11) Power consumption of the board: about 13.5 W.
12) The ‘jitter wander’ of the E1 interface is less than -30 dB.
13) The No. 5 Signaling time duration indices are as follows:
a) Minimum sending time duration: for the seized: 40±10 ms, for the rest: 125±25
ms
b) Maximum sending time duration: for requesting code sending, releasing the
safeguard and other ACK signals (passive signals): 4~9 s; for busy, answer, clear
conditions (active signals): 10~20 s
c) For seizure signals, when the sending party detects dual seizure, it will
continuously send the seizure signals for 850±200 ms.
6
Board Manual
a) Nominal frequency: f1=2400 Hz, f2=2600 Hz
d) Dual-frequency sending level difference: ≤1 dB

15) The No. 5 register signaling transmission indices are as follows:
a) Nominal frequency: 700 Hz, 900 Hz, 1100 Hz, 1300 Hz, 1500 Hz, 1700 Hz
d) Dual-frequency sending level difference: ≤1 dB

a) Reliable receiving within 2400±15 Hz, non-receiving is guaranteed outside the
b) Reliable receiving within 2600±15 Hz, non-receiving is guaranteed outside the

c) Reliable receiving level range: -16 ~ -2 dBm0
d) Reliable non-receiving level range: ≤ -26 dBm0
e) Dual-frequency receiving level difference: ≤5 dB

17) The No. 5 register signaling receiving level indices are as follows:
a) Reliable receiving when the frequency bias is ±15 Hz.
b) Reliable receiving level range: -14 ~ 0 dBm0
c) Reliable non-receiving level range: ≤ -24 dBm0
d) Dual-frequency receiving level difference: ≤ 4 dB
6 Attention
1) Based on the Host configuration, the board provides 16 E1/T1 interfaces and it
supports the E1/T1 mixed mode (the first 8 channels fixedly for E1s and the last
8 channels fixedly for T1s). By default, the board is configured as the E1 mode.
2) The C842ET16 board supports the bi-directional A/µ conversion of 16 E1/T1
signals when there is the A/µ DSP chip. The DSP may use the straight-through
mode, instead of the A/µ conversion.
3) In the E1 mode, the ET16 is configured with the 75-ohm and 120-ohm line
interface boards (ETDA, ETDB).
7
Board Manual
4) In the T1 mode, the ET16 board is configured with the 100-ohm line interface
board (ETDC).
5) In the E1/T1 mixed mode, the ET16 board is configured with the 120-ohm or
100-ohm line interface board (ETDD).
6) The ET16s have no backups. A fully configured frame has 16 boards, and they
are inserted in slots 2~9, and 14~21.
7) The ETD board for the C842ET16 should be REV.A (or later).
8
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/ETD
ET16 Drive Card C841ETD
1 Overview
The C841ETD is located in the line interface frame of the AM/CM. It is connected to
the backplane of the interface frame to expand the ET16 area and to provide the
ET16 with the cable connection function of the E1/T1 interface.
Note:
Based on the line impedance, the ETD can be classified as ETDA, ETDB and ETDC. ETDA
corresponds to the 75 ohm line interface, ETDB corresponds to the 120 ohm line interface and ETDC
corresponds to the 100 ohm line interface.
2 Main Functions
The ETD provides the ET16 with the input and output signals of the E1/T1 interface
line, external E1/T1 signal isolation transformer and instant high voltage protection
circuit at the line side & logic side. It has a good lightning protection function and
meets the 1000 V outdoor requirements. The ETD matches the transmission signals
and re-arranges the signals for the convenience of cabling.
I. Main functions
1) Provides the lead-out function of the E1/T1 interface.

2) Provides the lightning protection function.
3) Provides the signal isolation function.
4) Provides the interface impedance matching function.
5) Sets the ground resistance of the 75 ohm co-axial cable.
II. Main features
1) ETDA, ETDB and ETDC are the same in all respects, but their impedances are
different such as 75 ohm, 120 ohm & 100 ohm.
2) The ET16 can automatically recognize the type of the ETD by reading the
status of the ETD.
3) The card uses the 4-in-1 transformer to improve the card reliability.
1
Board Manual
4) The card uses a ‘catching diode array’ to protect the transient low voltage at the
logic side.
1) Provides the 16 E1s/T1s to the line interface through the cable.

2) Provides the 16 E1/T1 internal interface signals to the ET16 through the
isolation transformer.
3) Receives the Reference Clock of 8 kHz output by the ET16 and outputs the
same through RJ45.
4) Provides the board in-position signal and ETD type signal.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841ETD.

E1/T1 line interface
Impedance match module

DC isolation module
protection module
protection module
Low voltage
High voltage
ET16
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841ETD
High voltage protection module: It provides the transient high voltage protection
function. It connects the E1 signals of the trunk cable through the high voltage
protector to the line side of the transformer.
DC isolation module: The module comprises transformers for the purpose of dc

isolation.
Low voltage protection module: Provides the transient low voltage protection
function at the logic side.
Impedance match module: Provides the impedance matching function of the trunk
interface.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841ETD.
2
Board Manual
Figure 2 C841ETD panel
1) E1/T1 interface jack

Figure 2 shows the two 32-pin jacks at the back of the ETD. The upper 32-pin jack
corresponds to 1~8 E1/T1 interfaces and the lower 32-pin jack corresponds to 9~16
E1/T1 interfaces.
2) RJ45 jack
It is used to connect the Clock frame and to provide synchronous signals of the
upper level office.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the jumpers of the C841ETD.
J9 J1
4 24 3
2 1 2 1
J10 J2
4 34 3
2 1 2 1
J11 J3
4 34 3
2 1 2 1
J12 J4
4 34 3
2 1 2 1
J13 J5
4 34 3
2 1 2 1
J14 J6
4 34 3
2 1 2 1
J15 J7
4 34 3
2 1 2 1
J16 J8
4 34 3
2 1 2 1
Figure 3 Jumpers on the C841ETD
3
Board Manual
Table 1 shows the functions and default configuration of the jumpers on the card.
Table 1 Default configuration of jumpers
Jumper Function Factory default configuration

16 E1 75-ohm coaxial cables with their sending ends grounded
J1-J8 Grounded
(each E1 is grounded separately)
16 E1 75-ohm coaxial cables with their receiving ends
J9-J16 Not grounded
grounded (each E1 can be grounded separately)
Note:
According to the requirements of the remote office and the customer, each E1 can be separately
grounded. To effect the grounding, just close the relevant jumpers in the above table.
5 Technical Indices
1) Provides 16 E1/T1 cable jacks.
2) The indices of the high voltage protection circuit of the E1 interface are as
follows:
a) IEC801-2 15 kV (air discharge)
b) IEC801-4 40 A (2.5 kHz)
c) IEC801-5 1.2/50 µs 4 kV
d) 8/20 µs 150 A
3) The indices and parameters of the ‘catching diode array’ are listed below:
a) Continuous peak backward voltage: 18 V
b) Continuous peak positive current: 12 A
c) Backward leakage current: 2 µA

4) The isolation voltage of the transformer can go up to 1500 Vrms.
6 Attention
1) The selection of the three kinds of boards shall be consistent with the setting of
the ET16 by the Host.
2) When installing the ETD, make sure to insert it in the right way.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/FSN
Frame Switching Netboard C841FSN
1 Overview
The C841FSN is located in the communication control module of the AM/CM and is
used to provide the switching functions of multiple HDLC links.
2 Main Functions
The FSN comprises four Frame Switching Network Chips, and each network chip
consists of two FPGAs. After the configuration by the BAC, the FSN receives the
message packets from the receiving channels (multiplexed to HDLC channels of
2 Mbit/s). It then sends them to relevant destination channels according to their
destination addresses, and fulfills the switching of inter-board or intra-board
receiving units to any transmitting units through the switching bus.
I. Board functions
1) Configures the channel data through the BAC configuration bus.

2) Fulfills the switching of inter-board or intra-board receiving units to any
transmitting units through the switching bus.
3) Coordinates with the BAC in performing the inter-board bus arbitration and also
the bus arbitration of the intra-board receiving units.
4) Receives the HDLC frames from the UHW, saves them to the buffer RAM and
then sends them to the bus if it is an authorized bus.
5) Receives the data on the switching bus. It recognizes the destination address,
saves the effective frame information to the RAM, and sends them out when
the DHW is free.
6) Tests the two Clocks to determine which Clock should be selected for the
receiving & transmitting units.
7) Generates various control signals by reading and writing from or to the
configuration bus and reads back the various states.
II. Main features
1) Uses the dual-plane working mode and fulfills the fast switching of HDLC
frames through the hardware.
2) The Frame Switching Network Chip is accomplished by using the large-scale
programmable logic device, FPGA.
3) The board has no processor and it is configured & managed by the BAC.
1
Board Manual
1) Provides the board configuration bus interface signal (CPU bus).

2) Provides the backplane signal bus for frame switching (switching bus).
3) Provides the token request arbitration signals used for frame switching and
control.
4) Provides 16 HDLC link HW differential signals.
5) Receives the two Clock signals of the Clock frame.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841FSN.
HDLC link
Frame switching
group 1 Switching bus
HDLC link
Frame switching
group 2
Token B
Intra-board arbitration
HDLC link frame switching A
Frame switching
group 3 control C
HDLC link
Frame switching
group 4
Clock C
processing
K
M
Configuration bus
Configuration bus interface
FSN
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841FSN
Frame switching module: Handles the frame switching function of the HDLC link.
Each frame switching unit has the capability to provide 32 channels or four links of
2.048 Mbit/s. The board has four groups of frame switching units.
Intra-board frame switching control module: Provides the control function that is
needed by the intra-board Frame Switching Network Chip.
Clock processing module: Fulfills the Clock testing and selection functions.
Configuration bus interface module: Provides the interface function of the BAC
configuration bus.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841FSN.
2
Board Manual
RUN
FAIL
FSN
Figure 2 C841FSN panel
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841FSN indicators

Indicates the running 1. Flashes: The board is working normally.
RUN Red Flashes
status 2. OFF: The board is not working normally.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the C841FSN.
3
Board Manual
LED3
LED4
LED5
LED6
SW1
Figure 3 Layout of the C841FSN
1) Reset switch SW1: It is the hardware reset button

Table 2 Meanings and descriptions of the SMT indicators on the C841FSN

ON: The network chip is working
Indicator for the Frame Switching
LED3 Red normally. ON
Network Chip of the first group
OFF: The network chip is faulty.
Network Chip of the second group
Network Chip of the third group
Network Chip of the fourth group
5 Technical Indices
1) Frame switching processing capability: 128 channels or 16 links of 2.048 Mbit/s.
2) Switching delay: The loss rate is 10E-8, the occupation rate is 0.8 Erl [Erlangs],
and the maximum switching delay that can be introduced is 12.5 ms.
3) Power supply voltage: Vcc=4.75 V ~ 5.25 V
4) Working temperature: 0 ~ 70 OC
5) Power consumption: About 15 W
4
Board Manual
6 Attention
This board is not slot-compatible with other boards.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/GECP
8-Channel Echo Canceller Board GM11GECP
1 Overview
The GM11GECP is located in the line interface frame of the AM/CM, and provides a
256-channel shared resources pool of echo cancellation to suppress the noise
introduced by the transmission delay of international toll calls. The GM11GECP is
slot-compatible with the C841ET16, and its speech channel HW resources are the
same as those of the ET16.
Note:
Two kinds of finished GM11GECP boards are available with or without the E1 interface. When used as
only the Echo Cancellation (EC)-pool type, it does not take the E1 interface and only one GECD pinch
plate is inserted; when used as the EC16 type, it takes the E1 interfaces and two GECD pinch plates
are inserted. The following section describes only the EC-pool type.
2 Main Functions
The GM11GECP is configured in the interface frame and exists in the system as a
shared resource module. Each board provides 256-channel echo cancellation
resources and is connected through two pairs of QSI high-speed optical fibers to the
CNET. The speech channels that need the echo cancellation shall go through the
second switching in the CNET to enter the EC-pool, but the signaling does not go
through the shared resource module.
I. Board functions
1) Provides echo cancellation functions.

2) Supports fax and other data services.
3) Different trunk groups can be configured with different parameters of echo
cancellation.
II. Main features
1) The most important part in the GECP is the echo canceller, which is made out
of special chips.
1
Board Manual
2) The GECP works in the EC-pool mode and the entire office shares the EC
resources.
3) It is slot-compatible with the ET16 and can be flexibly configured.
4) In the EC-pool mode, the data services will not go through the GECP.
5) The parameters can be configured accurately to the board chip level.
6) The software and hardware logic support the in-service loading for easy
upgrade.
7) It provides a powerful interactive maintenance mechanism by means of the
"super terminal".
1) Provides two uplink service HWs of 16 Mbit/s to the QSI and receives two
service HWs of 16 Mbit/s from the QSI.
2) Receives the System Clock of 16 MHz and frame synchronous signals of 8 kHz
sent by the QSI.
3) Provides a serial port for Master node/Slave node communication with the QSI.
4) Provides a debugging serial port.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the GM11GECP.

Switching network
2M x 16 EC-POOL1
module
16M x 2 2M x 16 EC-POOL2
2M x 16 E1 E1x16
interface
BUS
HDLC
2Mx2
Main control
UART module FLASH SRAM
Figure 1 Functional principle of the GM11GECP
Switching network module: Deals with the loop-back of the EC-pool function and the
demultiplexing/multiplexing function from 16 Mbit/s HWs to 2 Mbit/s HWs and that
from 2 Mbit/s HWs to 16 Mbit/s HWs in the board.
EC-pool module: Provides two EC-pool units and each unit provides 8×32 echo
cancellation resources. Only one module is provided, when used as the EC-pool
board.
2
Board Manual
E1 interface module: Provides the E1 interface.
Main control module: Provides the board control functions and external
communication channels, including two HDLC links of 2 Mbit/s and one UART.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the GM11GECP.
RUN
FA IL
GECP
Figure 2 GM11GECP panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the GM11GECP indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the GM11GECP indicators

Indicates the 1. Flashes slowly: The board is working normally.
RUN Red Flashes slowly
running state 2. Flashes fast: The board is not working normally.
FAIL Green Run fault indicator OFF

3
Board Manual
Bit Meaning ON OFF

SW2.1 HW loop-back setting (hardware control) Loop-back No loop-back
SW2.2 Print switch Print permitted No printing
SW2.3 E1 matching impedance 120 ohm 75 ohm
Bit Meaning ON OFF

Combination of EC-pool mode SW1.1=OFF; SW1.2=OFF
S1.1 and S1.2 EC trunk mode SW1.1=ON; SW1.2=OFF
ET16 mode SW1.1=OFF; SW1.2=ON
Reserved for future use SW1.1=ON; SW1.2=ON
SW1.3 Program availability Available (do not run BIOS) Unavailable (can run BIOS)
SW1.8 SW1.X enable Allows SW1.X to act Does not allow SW1.X to act
3) Reset switch S3 is the reset button of the board.

4) Debugging serial port (J8)
It is an RS232 serial port, used for the debugging and printing. The software running
process and the result can be observed through the super terminal.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the GM11GECP.
GM11GECP
DTM
EC
CKS
GM11GECD S3
4
3
2
1
S2
J8
S1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 3 Layout of the GM11GECP
4
Board Manual
1) SMT indicators
Table 4 gives the meanings of the indicators of the GM11GECP.
Table 4 Meanings of the indicators of the GM11GECP
Meaning Color Normal status

DTM E1 alarm indicator, it is ON when the E1 is faulty. Red OFF
EC EC chip fault indicator, it is ON when the chip is faulty. Red OFF
CKS Clock fault indicator, it is ON when the Clock is faulty. Red OFF
2) J8 is the debugging serial port.
5 Technical indices
1) The board supports the echo cancellation function of eight code streams of
2 Mbit/s to provide the maximum delay of about 64 ms.
2) The return loss of the end can be set to 6 dB, 3 dB or 0 dB.
3) The return loss gain of the end is better than 34 dB.
4) The echo cancellation conforms to ITU-T Recommendations G.164, G.165 and
G.168.
5) The board supports one RS422 communication serial port and one RS232
debugging serial port.
6) The board supports the SS7, V5, R2 and SS1.
7) The board supports the fax and other data services.
8) The power consumption of the board is about 30 W.
6 Attention
1) As the GECP board is the common resource, configure it according to the trunk
0.7 Erl [Erlang] value, that is, configure only 70% of the EC-supported trunks.
2) S2.1 is used for testing purpose only. It is not used arbitrarily for the telephone
calls and it cannot be connected in the loop-back mode.
3) At present, the S1 functions are not open to the users, so the default S1.X is
set to OFF.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/HBC
Outlet Transfer Board C841HBC
1 Overview
The C841HBC is located in the interface frame of the AM/CM. As an outlet board for
the C841MHI, it converts and outputs the HWs of the C841MHI.
2 Main Functions
In the AM/CM, 12# and 13# interface frames are dedicated for connecting the
Specialized Resource Module (SRM) and SPM. To meet the cable installation
requirements, eight HBCs are installed on the backplane of each interface frame.
The HBC multiplexes the signals of the active and standby MHIs and provides eight
cable jacks, which are marked 0#~7# from top downwards. The jacks 0#, 1#, 2# and
4# provide both interfaces of 8 Mbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, while the jacks 3#, 5#, 6# and 7#
provide interfaces of 2 Mbit/s only.
I. Board functions
1) Provides HW signals of 8 Mbit/s to connect with the SRM frame.

2) Provides HW signals of 2 Mbit/s to connect with the SPM frame.
II. Main features
1) For uniform cabling, the HBC follows the cable-accessing mode of the DRV
frame. Therefore, the AMP connectors of the connection cables can be
interchanged.
2) The board has only the passive components (plug-in units).
3) The board has eight groups of outlets, each group connected with an AMP
connector.
1) The board provides eight groups of 3×8 AMP plugs, of which four groups of
plugs are used by signals of 8 Mbit/s and 2 Mbit/s.
2) Each group of plugs contains two groups of HW signals, namely, the uplink
Clock & frame signals of 8 MHz and the downlink Clock & frame signals of 8
MHz.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CF841HBC.
1
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/HBC
First group
of outlets
MHI board interface

Second group
of outlets
HW, clock and

frame head HBC
signal
Eighth group
of outlets
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841HBC
3 Panel
The board has no indicator.
4 Layout
5 Technical Indices
1) The HBC provides eight groups of outlets.
2) The HBC provides 16 HW signals of 2 Mbit/s or eight HW signals of 8 Mbit/s.
6 Attention
1) Eight pairs of twisted pair cables (8 Mbit/s HW signal lines) connect the SRM
frame and the interface frame, the two ends of which are 8×3PIN plugs and
each cable provides two HWs of 8 Mbit/s.
2) The 2 Mbit/s HW signal line is an 8×3PIN plug at the interface frame side, and
each plug leads out two HW signals of 2 Mbit/s. At the other side, there are two
2×5PIN plugs; each plug providing one HW of 2 Mbit/s. The 2 Mbit/s HW signal
lines are connected through the upper row of the plug/socket holes.
2
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/HSL
High-Speed Synchronization Line Interface Board

H301HSL
1 Overview
The H301HSL is located in the subscriber frame of the SM, and provides two
N×64 kbit/s (N=1~31) digital synchronous interfaces and subscriber lines with
N×64 kbit/s data service access.
2 Main Functions
The H301HSL provides two V.35 ports and two FE1 ports of N×64 kbit/s (1≤N≤31) rate
in the C&C08 Switching System. The V.35 port works in the DCE or Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) mode. The Clock modes of the port include the internal mode,
external mode and slave mode. The FE1 port connects remote data service units, used
for the remote access of N×64 kbit/s data service or as a trunk to bear N× 64 kbit/s data
service.
I. Board functions
1) Provides V.35 data communication port.

2) Provides E1 communication port and bears data service.
3) Phase-locks different Clock sources.
4) Provides digital cross connection function.
II. Main features
1) Phase-locks the Clock provided by the backplane of the subscriber frame or that
extracted from the FE1 port.
2) Slot-compatible with the subscriber boards.
3) The V.35 port works in the DCE or DTE mode.
1) Provides two HWs to the DRV, and receives two HW signals sent by the DRV
simultaneously.
2) Receives the Clock signals of 2 MHz and 8 kHz sent by the DRV.
3) Provides the serial port signal, performing master and slave node communication
with the NOD.
4) Provides two V.35 data interfaces.
1
Board Manual
5) Provides two E1 interfaces.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the H301HSL.
Switching network FE1 interface

BNET module module
Transmission equipment
or subscriber equipment
Framing/deframing V.35 interface

module
FIFO module
module Subscriber equipment
Main control BUS

NOD
module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the H301HSL
Switching network module: Switches HW time slots according to the time slot switching
command sent by the Host.
FE1 interface module: Its hardware is similar to the E1 interface board. The difference
is that the FE1 interface can designate part of the time slots for the circuit board to add
or drop data, and can deal with the conversion between Non Return to Zero (NRZ) code
flow of 2.048 Mbit/s rate and the HDB3 code flow of the same rate, that is, E1 encoding
and decoding of signals.
Framing/deframing module: Implements the conversion between HW and V.35

interface data.
First In First Out (FIFO) module: Used for data buffering when the interface receives
and sends data.
V.35 interface module: Performs the conversion between the N×64 kbit/s data & V.35
interface electrical features, and Clock signal TTL level & V.35 interface electrical
features.
Main control module: Performs the circuit board initialization, master node/slave node
communication, sending the configuration information and reporting the monitoring
information.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the H301HSL.
2
Board Manual
RUN
RXD0
TXD0
RXD1
TXD1
LFA0
LOSO
LFA1
LOS1
LINK
HSL
Figure 2 H301HSL panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the H301HSL indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the H301HSL indicators

Flashes fast: The board is powered
Running status ON and the self-check is ON.
RUN Red Flashes fast
indicator Flashes slowly: The self-check has
passed.
ON: The V.35 port is receiving data.
Indicator for V.35 port
RXD0~1 Green OFF: The V.35 port is not receiving Uncertain
data receiving
data.
ON: The V.35 port is sending data.
Indicator for V.35 port
TXD0~1 Green OFF: The V.35 port is not sending Uncertain
data sending
data.
E1 port out of frame ON: Out of frame
LFA0~1 Green OFF
indicator OFF: Normal
E1 port signal loss ON: Signal is lost.
LOS0~1 Green OFF
indicator OFF: Normal
ON when there is a signal in any FE1
LINK Green E1 signal indicator Uncertain
on the circuit board.

None.
3
Board Manual
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the H301HSL.
H 301H SL
ON
1 2 3 4
S1
ON
1 2 3 4
S5
ON
1 2 3 4
S2
S3
ON
1 2 3 4
S4
Figure 3 DIP switches on the H301HSL
1) Table 2 gives the meanings of the DIP switches S1 and S2.
Table 2 Settings of the DIP switches S1 and S2
Bit Meaning ON OFF

S1 Sets the impedance of the first FE1 interface 75 ohm 120 ohm
S2 Sets the impedance of the second FE1 interface 75 ohm 120 ohm
Table 3 Settings of the DIP switch S4
DIP switch setting

Meaning
1 2 3 4
ON ON OFF OFF Selects DCE working mode (default) for the second V.35 interface
OFF OFF ON ON Selects DTE working mode for the second V.35 interface
DIP switch setting Meaning

1 2 3 4
ON ON OFF OFF Selects DCE working mode (default) for the first V.35 interface
OFF OFF ON ON Selects DTE working mode for the first V.35 interface
4
Board Manual
5 Technical Indices
1) Data interface parameters
a) Interface type: V.35
b) Data rate: N×64 kbit/s (N=1~31)
c) Working mode: DTE or DCE
d) Clock modes: Internal mode, external mode and slave mode

2) FE1 interface parameters
a) Line rate: 2.048 Mbit/s
b) Data rate: N×64 kbit/s (N=1~31)
c) Line code pattern: HDB
d) Frame structure: Complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.704
e) Input jitter toleration: Complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.823
f) Signal output waveform: Complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.703

3) Static power consumption of the circuit board: 2.5 W
6 Attention
1) The H301HSL outputs two E1 signals which are on the pins of Row 7 and Row 8 of
the upper HEADER (the first E1) and the pins of Row 31 and Row 32 of the lower
HEADER (the second E1) respectively.
2) The V.35 port on the H301HSL works in the DCE mode. In this mode, the
meanings of the Clock selections for the ports are as follows:
a) DCE-external mode
The Clock for the opposite DTE to receive and transmit data is provided by the DCE, as
shown in Figure 4.
DCE DTE
P
Send Data(A) S
Send Data(A)
Send Data(B) Y Send Data(B)
Transmit Timing(A) AA Transmit Timing(A)
Transmit Timing(B) R Transmit Timing(B)
Receive Data(A) T Receive Data(A)
Receive Data(B) Receive Data(B)
V
Receive Timing(A) Receive Timing(A)
X
Receive Timing(B) Receive Timing(B)
Terminal Timing(A) Terminal Timing(A)
Terminal Timing(B) Terminal Timing(B)
Figure 4 V.35 port in the DCE-external mode
5
Board Manual
b) DCE-internal mode
The Clock for the opposite DCE equipment to receive data is provided by the DCE, and
the clock for the DTE to transmit data is provided by the internal DTE, as shown in
Figure 5.
DCE DTE
P
Send Data(A) Send Data(A)
Send Data(B) S
Send Data(B)
Transmit Timing(A) Transmit Timing(A)
Transmit Timing(B) Transmit Timing(B)
R
Receive Data(A) Receive Data(A)
Receive Data(B) T
Receive Data(B)
Receive Timing(A) V Receive Timing(A)
Receive Timing(B) X
Receive Timing(B)
U
W
Figure 5 V.35 port in the DCE-internal mode
c) DCE-slave mode
The Clock for the opposite DTE equipment to receive and transmit data comes from the
receive Clock that the DCE provides for the DTE, as shown in Figure 6.
DCE DTE
P
Send Data(A) S Send Data(A)
Send Data(B) Send Data(B)
R
Receive Data(B) T
Receive Data(B)
Receive Timing(B) X Receive Timing(B)
Figure 6 V.35 port in the DCE-slave mode
3) The V.35 port on the H301HSL works in the DTE mode. In this mode, the meaning
of Clock selections of the port is as follows.
a) DTE-external mode
The Clock for the V.35 port on the H301HSL to receive and transmit data is provided by
the DCE, as shown in Figure 7.
6
Board Manual
V.35 port on the HSL board
DCE P DTE
Send Data(A) Send Data(A)
S
Send Data(B) Send Data(B)
Y
AA
R
T
Receive Data(B) Receive Data(B)
V
Receive Timing(A) Receive Timing(A)
X
Receive Timing(B) Receive Timing(B)
Figure 7 V.35 port in the DTE-external mode
b) DTE-internal mode
The Clock for the V.35 port to receive data is provided by the DCE, and the Clock to
transmit data is provided by the internal H301HSL, as shown in Figure 8.
Send Data(A)
DCE P DTE Send Data(A)
Send Data(B) S
Send Data(B)
Receive Data(A) R
Receive Data(A)
Receive Data(B) T Receive Data(B)
Receive Timing(B) X
Receive Timing(B)
Terminal Timing(A) U
Terminal Timing(A)
W
Figure 8 V.35 port in the DTE-internal mode
c) DTE-slave mode
The DCE equipment only provides the Clock for the V.35 port on the H301HSL to
receive data while the V.35 port on the H301HSL uses this Clock to transmit data, as
shown in Figure 9.
Send Data(A)
DCE P DTE Send Data(A)
Send Data(B) S
Send Data(B)
Receive Data(A) R
Receive Data(A)
Receive Data(B) T Receive Data(B)
Receive Timing(B) X
Receive Timing(B)
Figure 9 V.35 port in the DTE-slave mode
7
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/LAP
Protocol Processing Board CB03LAP
1 Overview
The CB03LAP is located in the main control frame of the SM and processes the layer-2
protocols of various protocols, including SS7, V5, Packet Handling Interface (PHI),
PRA, RSA, HDLC and other data link layer protocols.
Note:
The CB03LAP is available in the following five types.
1) CB03LAPA0: No.7 Signaling processing board
2) CB03LAP1: Supports V5 link access protocol
3) CB03LAP11: Supports module communication link access protocol
4) CB03LAP8: Supports RSA link access protocol
5) CB03LAP7: Supports PRA/PHI link access protocol
2 Main Functions
The LAP is used to process the protocol of data link layer, to create and maintain the
links, to fetch the time slots of DHWs and report them to the Host through mailboxes
after these time slots are processed. It is also used to transform the commands and
data sent by the Host to the specified frame format, and then deliver them to the
stipulated time slots of UHWs simultaneously.
I. Board functions
1) Controls the inter-module communication, and provides link layer service for the
communication between SMs and other modules.
2) Supports four SS7 links and long messages when configured as the LAPN7.
3) Substitutes the CC01NO7 when configured as NO7, supporting two SS7 links and
Short Messages.
4) Processes the ISDN 30B+D protocol when loaded with the PRA protocol software.
5) Performs the function of remote line concentrating in the LAPRSA+DT mode when
loaded with the RSA protocol software.
6) Processes the V5 protocol of the access network when loaded with the V5
protocol software.
6
Board Manual
7) Processes the protocol of packet switching when loaded with the PHI protocol
software.
II. Main features
1) Communicates with the active MPU through mailboxes.

2) Processes the data link layer protocols of various protocols.
3) Provides RS232 debugging serial port for data printing and dynamic tracing of
program during debugging.
4) Provides a tool for software debugging.
1) Provides a set of buses for mailbox communication.

2) Provides two HW signals at the rate of 2.048 Mbit/s.
3) Receives Clock signals of 2 MHz and frame alignment signals of 8 kHz provided
by the NET.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB03LAP.
HW
BNET Link access protocol
Mailbox
MPU communication
Main processing unit
module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB03LAP
Link access protocol module: Receives and sends the layer-2 protocol information.
Main processing unit: Communicates with the MPU through mailboxes, reports protocol
information to the Host, sends and receives link information through the link access
protocol simultaneously.
Mailbox communication module: Implements switching of the information between the

active MPU and LAP.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB03LAP.
7
Board Manual
VCC
RUN
LNK0
LNK1
LNK2
LNK3
LNK4
LNK5
LNK6
LNK7
RUN
LNK0
LNK1
LNK2
LNK3
LNK4
LNK5
LNK6
LNK7
LAP
Figure 2 CB03LAP panel
1) Board indicators
As shown in Figure 2, there are 17 indicators on a LAP. The indicators on the upper half
and the lower half represent two sets of protocol processing units respectively, with the
same meanings.
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the CB03LAP indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB03LAP indicators

VCC Red Power indicator ON when the normal power is available. ON
1. Flashes slowly: Normal board
operation
RUN/LINK0 Green Operation indicator 2. Flashes fast: Board not accessed by Flashes slowly
the Host
3. OFF: Board not in operation
1. ON: Link created
LINK1 Green Link status indicator 2. Flashes slowly: Link not created ON
3. OFF: Link not configured
Others Reserved
Table 2 gives the meanings of the indicators when the LAP is configured as LAPN7.
8
Board Manual
Table 2 Meanings of the indicators when the LAP is configured as LAPN7

Flashes slowly: Normal board
VCC Red Working status indicator Flashes slowly
operation
ON: Links created successfully
Status indicator of links
RUN/LINK0~LINK3 Green Flashes: Links not created ON
0-3
OFF: Link not configured
Other indicators Reserved OFF
Table 3 gives the meanings of the indicators when the LAP is configured as SS7
signaling.
Table 3 Meanings of the indicators when the LAP is configured as SS7 signaling

VCC Red Operation indicator Board operation status Flashes
Indicator for ON: Normal operation
RUN/LINK0 Green initialization of the first OFF: Abnormal operation ON
physical link
Indicator for operation ON: Normal operation
LINK1 Green ON
of the first physical link OFF: Abnormal operation
Indicator for the ON: Processor is normal
LINK2 Green processor fault of the OFF: Processor is faulty ON
first physical link
Indicator for ON: Normal operation
LINK3 Green initialization of the OFF: Abnormal operation ON
second physical link
Indicator for operation ON: Normal operation
LINK4 Green of the second physical OFF: Abnormal operation ON
link
Indicator for processor ON: Processor is normal
LINK5 Green fault of the second OFF: Processor is faulty ON
physical link
Other indicators Reserved for future use OFF
Table 4 gives the meanings of the indicators of the LAPRSA and LAPRA.
Table 4 Meanings of the indicators of the LAPRSA and LAPRA

VCC Red Power indicator ON during normal power ON
RUN/LINK0 Green Operation indicator Indicator for operation status of Processor B Flashes
ON: Links created successfully
LINK1~LINK7 Green Indicator for Links 0-6 ON
OFF: Links interrupted or not configured
Table 5 gives the meanings of the LAPV5 indicators.
9
Board Manual
Table 5 Meanings of LAPV5 indicators

VCC Red
Power indicator ON: Normal power available ON
Indicator for operation
RUN/LINK0 Green Flashes: Normal operation Flashes
status of Processor B
Indicator for Links 1-4 ON: Links created successfully
LINK1~LINK4 Green ON
status OFF: Links interrupted or not configured
LINK5~LINK7 Reserved for future use OFF

None.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the DIP switches and jumpers on the CB03LAP.
JP6
AEN5
AEN1
JP11
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
E I
JP8
JP13 E I JP10
B
N L
A
ON
A B
JP3
S1
JP4
JP5
JP12
Figure 3 DIP switches and jumpers on the CB03LAP
1) DIP switch S1
10
Board Manual
Switch set and Switch set Meaning Default status

its location status
The Host reads and writes mailbox in 8-bit pattern. Used
ON
in module A.
S1/1 Uncertain
The Host reads and writes mailbox in 16-bit pattern.
OFF
Used in module B.
ON Software is readable
S1/2 ON
OFF Software is not readable
ON Software is readable
S1/3 ON
OFF Software is not readable
ON HW data reverse phase position
S1/4 OFF
OFF HW data normal phase position
ON Mailbox A (U11) ahead
S1/5 OFF
OFF Mailbox B (U10) ahead
ON Used in module A
S1/6 Uncertain
OFF Used in module B
ON Selects NO7 board type Used to select
S1/7 NO7 board
OFF Selects LAPNO7
type
ON
S1/8 Reserved, the software is readable OFF
OFF
2) Jumpers
Table 7 gives the meaning of the jumpers.
Table 7 Meanings of the jumpers
Jumper 1-2 2-3 Remarks

JP3-JP5, JP12 Reserved Selects ID line of Processor-B 1-A, 3-B
Selects the signal allowed by
JP6 Reserved 1-AEN5, 3-AEN1
Processor-B
JP11, JP8 Selects system Clock Selects board Clock 1-E, 3-I
JP10 Always connected to B position
JP13 Normal working mode Self-loop working mode 1-N, 3-L
3) DIP switches and jumper

Table 8 gives the settings of the DIP switches and jumpers.
Table 8 DIP switches and jumpers
Board type Model Default setting of jumpers Default setting of DIP switches
JP3-JP5,JP12 = A SW1-SW3, SW6, SW7 = ON
No.7 A
JP6 = AEN5 SW4, SW5, SW8 = OFF
JP3-JP5,JP12 = B SW2, SW3=ON
B
JP6 = AEN1 SW1, SW4~SW8 = OFF
LAPNO7
JP3-JP5,JP12 = A SW1-SW3, SW6 = ON
A, C
JP6 = AEN5 SW4, SW5, SW7, SW8 = OFF
LAPV5
LAPRSA JP3~-JP5, JP12 = B SW2, SW3 = ON
B
LAPPRA JP6 = AEN1 SW1, SW4~SW8 = OFF
LAPMC2
11
Board Manual
5 Technical Indices
1) It processes all the 64 time slots of two HWs or 64 HDLC links.
2) The LAPRSA processes a maximum of 32 RSA protocols, but only 16 protocols
are recommended for use.
3) The LAPV5 has two microprocessors and processes eight V5 signaling links
simultaneously. Each link processes a traffic of 3,000 circuits.
4) The LAPNO7 processes four SS7 links.
5) The LAPPRA/PHI processes eight channels of Digital Subscriber Signaling No.1
(DSS1).
6 Attention
1) The CBO3LAPAO has evolved from the CBO3LAP, which is a dual-processor
board. Since SS7 Signaling protocol uses only one of these processors, a set of
processing systems can be removed from the CBO3LAP to reduce the cost, thus
giving rise to the evolution of a new type of board, the CBO3LAPA (the basic
printed circuit board is the same as the CBO3LAP).
2) The CBO3LAPAO can be configured as either a LAPN7 or NO7 to substitute the
CCO1NO70 and can be used in all systems equipped with the NO7 and LAPN7.
12
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/MEM
Memory Board CB01MEM
1 Overview
The CB01MEM is located in the Main control frame board of the SM. Internally, it
communicates with the MPU through the internal bus and externally it provides
10Base-T Ethernet interface. Therefore, the communication between the main control
system of Module-B and all servers on the Ethernet is accomplished.
Note:
The CB01MEM is available in the following types, which include CB01MEM0, CB01MEM3 and
CB01MEM4. Among them, the CB01MEM0 adopts Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) and is used in the Intelligent Network (IN); the CB01MEM3 also adopts the TCP/IP and is used in
Campus cards; the CB01MEM4 adopts a NAMEPIPE protocol and is used on a Number Portability (NP)
platform.
2 Main Functions
The CB01MEM communicates with the MPU through the mailbox (shared memory
mode), and provides 10Base-T Ethernet interface. Therefore, it not only implements
the communication between the main control system of Module-B and the Ethernet, but
also provides external interface for the main control system of Module-B.
I. Board functions
1) Supports mass data storage in the hard disk.

2) Communicates with the active MPU through the mailbox at a high rate.
3) NE2000 compatible Network Adapter gains access to the Ethernet through
Unshielded Twisted Pair cable at a rate of 10 Mbit/s.
4) Supports HDLC communication. HDLC enables this board to connect with the
outside equipment through the Switching System at the rate of two time slots, that
is 2×64 kbit/s.
II. Main features
1) This board occupies two slots.
1
Board Manual
2) Only the network interfaces located less than 50 m apart can communicate
effectively.
3) Provides a reset button to reset the board reliably.
4) Supports mass data storage.
1) Provides a set of buses for communication with the MPU.

2) Provides a 10Base-T Ethernet interface.
3) Provides one HDLC link HW for connection with the Switching Network.
4) Provides two communication serial ports.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB01MEM.
Network interface
Network interface
module
Mailbox Main board of

Hard disk storage
Backplane bus communication the industrial
module
computer
module
Serial port Serial port 1

communication
module Serial port 2
Serial communication
Switching network controller module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB01MEM
Network interface module: It is a standard Network Adapter compatible with NE2000,

and provides PC104 bus for external use. Through this card, the MEM communicates
with 10Base-T Ethernet.
Mailbox communication module: It communicates with the MPU through the bus of the
standby board.
Main board of the industrial computer: It implements CPU functions, such as Mailbox,
Network Adapter, HDLC link controller and Debugging port through PC104 bus. Its hard
disk interface can be connected to a small-sized hard disk fixed on THE board. Two
serial ports can be connected to the backplane slots for serving the outside entities and
the keyboard port may be connected to the debugging port for debugging the software
of the board.
Hard disk storage module: It achieves the connection to the computer hardware, thus
saving system data.
2
Board Manual
Serial port communication module: It performs the function of serial port
communication.
Serial communication controller module: It accomplishes the HDLC link communication

function, and is capable of being connected to remote information center through the
switching network.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB01MEM.
-5V
RUN
NET
MEM
Figure 2 CB01MEM panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB01MEM indicators

1. ON: +5V power supply of the board is normal.
To indicate the conditions
+5V Red 2. Otherwise: +5V power supply of the board is ON
of +5V power supply
abnormal.
1. Flashes slowly: Abnormal operation
RUN Green Operation indicator Flashes fast
2. Flashes fast: Normal operation
Indicator for network 1. Flashes slowly: Abnormal network
NET Green Flashes fast
status 2. Flashes fast: Normal network
3
Board Manual
There is a hardware reset switch located at the lower part of the front panel.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the CB01MEM.
XP12 X P 11
Figure 3 Layout of the CB01MEM
Table 2 gives the default configurations of the jumpers.
Table 2 Default configurations of the jumpers
Jumper Function Default value set before delivery

XP11 To control the read and write mode of the mailbox Pins 1 and 2 are short-circuited
XP12 To control the read and write mode of the mailbox Pins 1 and 2 are short-circuited
5 Technical Indices
1) The effective communication distance of the Network Adapter is less than 50 m,
but less than 20 m is recommended for applications.
2) The communication distance of the serial port is less than 15 m.
3) The voltage of the power supply is +5 V, the steady-state current is 1.35 A, and the
maximum current is 1.9 A.
4) The power ripple wave and noise input should be less than 250 mVp-p.
5) The static power consumption of the board is 6.75 W, and the maximum power
consumption is 9.5 W.
4
Board Manual
6) HDLC communication rate is 2×64 kbit/s, and the bit error rate is 10-9.
7) The adopted standards are IEEE802.3, RS232 and HDLC.
6 Attention
The reset button should be used while resetting a board. The board should not be
inserted and pulled out frequently, as it may cause damage to the board.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/MFC
MFC Processing Board CC04MFC, CB11MFC
1 Overview
The MFC Processing Board (MFC stands for Multi-Frequency Compelled) is located in
the Main control frame of the SM. It fulfills receiving and sending of R2, No. 5, and other
signaling register signals. It can be set to either 16-line mode or 32-line mode, or it can
be used for the continuity check of the SS7 signaling.
Note:
The CC04MFC is available in two types, CC04MFC0 and CC04MFC2. The CC04MFC0 is used to receive
and send multi-frequency signals of R2 inter-exchange signaling, and the CC04MFC2 is used for the
continuity check of the SS7 signaling. The CB11MFC0 uses the PCB of the CC04MFC to process the
register signals of Russia signaling and No. 5 Signaling.
2 Main Functions
Under the control of the MPU, the forward register signal time slot from a trunk interface
is switched to an idle HW time slot assigned by the MFC through the BNET. The MPU
sends number receiving commands through the mailbox to the MFC, which initiates
number receiving at the corresponding time slot and reports the received numbers to
the MPU. After receiving the forward numbers, the MPU instructs the MFC to send the
corresponding backward signals. The MFC stops the sending of backward signals
when there is no forward signal, thus completing a compelled signaling cycle.
I. Board functions
1) Supports R2, No. 5, and Russia signaling.

2) Sends forward or backward the Multi-Frequency (MF) register signals to the
opposite switch through the Switching Network according to MPU commands.
3) Receives and identifies the MF register signals, and reports the result to the Host.
4) Supports the continuity check.
5) Supports the self-testing function.
1
Board Manual
II. Main features
1) It checks its working status after power-on, performs the reset or forced reset of
the Host and self-loop test.
2) It can be applied to R2, No. 5 and Russia signaling systems simultaneously, after
the board software is replaced accordingly.
3) This board is slot-compatible with NO7, LAP and other boards.
1) It provides a set of buses for mailbox communication.

2) It provides one line of HW signal at the rate of 2.048 Mbit/s.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the MFC.
B HW Signaling processing
N
E module
T
M
Mailbox communication
P module
Main control module
U
Figure 1 Functional principle of the MFC
Signaling processing module: Receives and sends inter-exchange MF signals.
Main control module: Communicates with the Host through the mailbox, configures
DSP according to the Host commands and reports the detected numbers to the Host.
Mailbox communication module: Implements the information switching between the

Host MPU and MFC.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the MFC.
2
Board Manual
RUN
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
MFC
Figure 2 MFC panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of the MFC indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the MFC indicators

1. Flashes fast: Initial board status when powered on
RUN Red Running indicator or reset Flashes slowly
2. Flashes slowly: Normal board operation
CH0~15 Green Channel indicator ON: The channel is occupied. ON

None.
4 Layout
None.
5 Technical Indices
It provides 16 lines or 32 lines for sending and receiving MF signals.
3
Board Manual
6 Attention
1) According to the configuration made in the Host, this board can provide 16 or 32
lines for MF transceivers.
2) The CB11MFC uses a PCB, which is similar to the CC04MFC, but certain
components (devices) are different from those in the CC04MFC.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/MHI
Multi-HW Interface Board C841MHI
1 Overview
The C841MHI is the multi-HW conversion interface board and is located in the interface
frame of the AM/CM, which is slot-compatible with other interface boards. It
demultiplexes/multiplexes the HWs of 16.384 Mbit/s, 2.048 Mbit/s or 8.192 Mbit/s. In
addition, the MHI transfers the link information of the SRC/SPT.
Note:
Although the MHI is slot-compatible with the OBC, E16, ET16 and STU, in the engineering configuration, it
must be configured in two interface frames of the shared resource cabinet.
2 Main Functions
The C841MHI receives the four HWs of 16.384 Mbit/s from the QSI, then demultiplexes
them and outputs 32 HWs of 2.048 Mbit/s to the CPC in the SPM frame or eight HWs of
8 Mbit/s to the SPT/SRC in the SRM frame. The MHI works in three modes, 2 Mbit/s
HW interface mode, 8 Mbit/s HW interface mode and 2 Mbit/s & 8 Mbit/s HW mixed
interface mode.
I. Board functions
1) Provides HW justification function of speech channels.

2) Transfers the link information of four SRCs/SPTs.
3) Provides the system Clock for the SRM frame.
II. Main features
1) Multiplexes the output signals of 8 Mbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, and automatically

distinguishes between the 2 Mbit/s mode, 8 Mbit/s mode or 2 Mbit/s & 8 Mbit/s
mixed mode according to the configured data rate.
2) Enables smooth capacity expansion even while the system is running.
3) Does not provide the link HW signal of the SRC/SPT separately, its link time slot
occupying four time slots of an 8 Mbit/s HW.
1
Board Manual
1) Provides 16 differential HW signals, of which eight HW signals are multiplexed to

8 Mbit/s and 2 Mbit/s signals.
2) Provides 16 differential signals of 2.048 Mbit/s to connect the SPM frame.
3) Provides eight differential signals of 8.192 Mbit/s to connect the SRM frame.
4) Provides one link HW of 2.048 Mbit/s to connect the QSI.
5) Receives the system Clock of 16 MHz and the frame signals of 8 kHz sent by QSI.
6) Provides a serial port to fulfill the Master node/Slave node communication with the
QSI.
7) Provides the frame signals of 8 kHz and the timing signals of 8 MHz to the SRM
frame, and simultaneously, receives the timing signals of 8 MHz and the frame
signals of 8 kHz returned by the SRC/SPT.
8) Provides the active or standby switchover signals.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841MHI.
QSI
4 x 16 Mbit/s
Delay Frame
adjustment module
16 MHz
4 x 16 Mbit/s Communication
serial port
Switching network module
32 MHz
Clock frequency 2 Mbit/s
multiplication
module
2 x 16 Mbit/s 4 x 16 Mbit/s 1 x 16 Mbit/s

Main control
2 Mbit/s module
Mux/Demux module
C841MHI
2 Mbit/s HW 8 Mbit/s HW
CPC SRC/SPT
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841MHI
Delay adjustment module: Adjusts the delay between the MHI and the QSI.
Switching network module: Handles the service HW time slot switching and link time
slot switching functions.
2
Board Manual
Clock frequency multiplication module: Completes the conversion of timing signals of
16.384 MHz to timing signals of 32.768 MHz.
Mux/Demux module: Multiplexes/Demultiplexes two HWs of 16.384 Mbit/s & 16 HWs of

2.048 Mbit/s, four HWs of 16.384 Mbit/s& eight HWs of 8 Mbit/s, and one 16.384 Mbit/s
signal & one 2.048 Mbit/s signal.
Main control module: Completes the board initialization, status monitoring and
SRC/SPT link information transfer functions.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841MHI.
RUN
FA IL
MHI
Figure 2 C841MHI panel
3
Board Manual
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841MHI indicators

Running status 2. ON: The board is working in the standby state.
indicator 3. Flashes fast: The board is requesting for loading.
4. OFF: The board is faulty or is not working.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the C841MHI.
S1
S21 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J7
J1
JP3
Figure 3 Layout of the C841MHI
1) Reset switch S1: It is a hardware reset button.

2) DIP switch S2
Bit Meaning ON OFF

S2/1 Sets the upper half mode of the MHI 8 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s
S2/2 Sets the lower half mode of the MHI 8 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s
S2/3 Boots ROM write protection Can be written Read only
S2/4 Internal and external Clock selection Internal Clock External Clock
S2/5 Run and debugging status selection Debugging status Run status
S2/6 Software and hardware mode selection Hardware mode Software mode
S2/7 Reserved for future use
S2/8 Reserved for future use
4
Board Manual
3) SMT indicators
The SMT indicators Light Emitting Diode (LED) 1, LED2 and LED3 are used only for the
board debugging.
4) BDM debugging interface (JP3)
The BDM interface is a 10-PIN jack. In the debugging mode, the CPU directly takes the
commands from the debugging interface to facilitate the software and hardware
debugging.
5) JTAG interface (J1)
It provides the boundary scanning function.
It is an RS232 serial port used for debugging and printing. The software running
process and results can be observed through the super terminal.
5 Technical Indices
1) When the C841MHI works together with the CPC, it outputs 16 HWs of
2.048 Mbit/s, with a total bandwidth of 32 Mbit/s. When the C841MHI works
together with the SRC/SPT, it outputs eight HWs of 8.192 Mbit/s, with a total
bandwidth of 64 Mbit/s.
2) Interface features: The signals in the frame are at the TTL level, and the
inter-frame signals use the RS-422 level.
3) CPU master frequency: 50 MHz
4) Power consumption of the C841MHI: 10 W
6 Attention
1) The HBC must be used along with the MHI.
2) Each HBC provides eight plugs and each plug contains two HW signals.
3) Priority is given to the mixed mode.
4) When the MHI is connected to the SRC/SPT, the cabling method used is
top-to-bottom.
5) When the MHI is connected to the CPC, the bottom-to-top cabling method is used.
6) Only when the DIP switch is set to the hardware mode, can the DIP switch be used
to set the 2 Mbit/s and 8 Mbit/s working modes; otherwise the 2 Mbit/s and 8 Mbit/s
modes will be automatically set at the background.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CB35MPU
Main Processor Unit CB35MPU
1 Overview
The CB35MPU board uses the Intel Celeron 400 CPU as its core processor. Its
program flash memory is 8 MB and its data flash memory is 3.5 MB. Its CPU
addressing space is up to 4 GB. The CB35MPU board is compatible with the
CB34MPU board and works as the main control board in the SM/ESM.
2 Main Functions
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB35MPU. Its primary functions are as
follows:
1) Isolates, buffers, and drives the three-channel data and address control signals of
the main control frame and EMA boards.
2) Generates control signals for the boards in the main control frame.
3) Communicates with the BAM through HDLC serial ports.
4) Generates hardware WDT and reset signals.
5) Monitors the status of the board and provides status indicators.
ULV C400
GMCH
815 SDRAM
BIOS CICH Serial port

PCI
FPGA
ISA
Data flash Program flash Backplane driving HDLC
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB35MPU
The CPU, chipset, BIOS, and memory, form the minimum system of the board. When
used in the SM/ESM, its memory is 256 MB.
1
Board Manual
The BIOS stores the initialization program of the system and the bottom layer driver of
the switch. It is through the BIOS that the program and data are loaded to the Host.
The MPU communicates with other boards (NOD, MFC, DTR, LAP, NO7, SIG, EMA,
OPT, MC2, NET, MEM, ALM, TCI, CHD, and so on) through the on-board mailbox
interface to control various boards in the main control frame.
The CMOS module provides real-time clock for the board and uses its RAM to store the
check sum of the switch data.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB35MPU.
RUN
MUI
BUI
DPE
DWR
PPE
PWR
LAD
S3
S2
MPU
Figure 2 CB35MPU panel
2
Board Manual
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB35MPU indicators
Normal
status
One flash per 100 ms during normal running. When the
Running board serves as a standby board, one flash per 100 ms Flash per 100
RUN Red
indicator if the backup is complete, and one flash per 400 ms if ms
the backup is incomplete.
ON if this board is active and OFF if this board is See the
MUI Yellow Active indicator
standby meaning
Standby ON if this board is standby. Note that the standby MPU See the
BUI Green
indicator cannot operate any boards, except the EMA. meaning
It is controlled by the fifth DIP switch on the active
Data storage
board. When the DIP switch is set to ON, this indicator See the
DPE Yellow write-protect
is ON, otherwise, it is OFF. It means that the MPU meaning
indicator
program can back up data into data Flash.
Indicator for data When it is ON, it indicates MPU program is writing data
storage (when into data Flash. When this indicator is flashing, it See the
DWR Green
data is being indicates that MPU program failed to write data into meaning
written) data Flash, causing data in the data Flash unavailable.
It is controlled by the sixth DIP switch on the active
Program storage
PPE Yellow write-protect
is ON, otherwise, it is OFF. It means that BIOS can meaning
indicator
back up program into program Flash.
Program storage It is ON, it indicates that BIOS is writing programs into See the
PWR Green
writing indicator program Flash. meaning
1. ON: The host is waiting for loading.
2. Flash: The host is loading.
Loading See the
LAD Yellow 3. OFF: Loading is complete.
indicator meaning
If the loading is not completed, BIOS will turn on this
indicator to request for loading again.
Figure 3 shows the settings and meanings of the DIP switches.
OFF ON
SW3/1
Combined to select module communication bandwidth
SW3/2
SW3/3 OFF: program in the program memory cannot be used. ON: can be used
SW3/4 OFF: data in the data memory cannot be used. ON: can be used
SW3/5 OFF: data cannot be written into the data memory. ON: can be written into
SW3/6 OFF: program cannot be written into the program memory. ON: can be written into
SW3/7 OFF: remote control is not selected. ON: remote control is selected.
SW3/8 It works along with SW2/3 and SW2/4 to select loading mode.
SW2/1 OFF: Line-level backup ON: Board-level backup

SW2/2 OFF: Active/Standby mode ON: Load Sharing mode
Figure 3 Settings of the DIP switches
3
Board Manual
I. SW3/1 and SW3/2
By combining the DIP switches SW3/1 and SW3/2, you can select four communications
bandwidths.
Table 2 gives SW3/1 and SW3/2 combinations and their corresponding bandwidths.
Table 2 SW3/1 and SW3/2 combinations and their corresponding bandwidths
SW3/1 SW3/2 Number of time slots Communication bandwidth

OFF OFF 2 128 kbit/s
ON ON 4 256 kbit/s
ON OFF 8 512 kbit/s
OFF ON 12 768 kbit/s
Both the host program and BIOS program decide communication bandwidth by reading
the settings of hardware switches. When adding a module, you will set the
communication bandwidth.
II. SW3/8, SW2/3 and SW2/4
By combining the DIP switches SW3/8, SW2/3 and SW2/4, you can select eight
different loading modes.
II. Table 3 gives loading modes set by the combinations of the DIP switches SW3/8,
SW2/3 and SW2/4.
Table 3 Combinations of SW3/8, SW2/3 and SW2/4
SW3/8 SW2/3 SW2/4 Loading mode

OFF OFF Loading C&C08 ESM Switch (LAPMC2 and OTU inter-networking)
OFF ON Loading C&C08 ESM Exchange (LAPMC2 and IDT)
OFF
ON OFF Loading C&C08 single-SM Switch (HDLC)
ON ON Reserved for future use
OFF OFF Reserved for future use
ON ON Loading mode for the LAPMC2 and IDT networking mode (RSM)
ON Loading mode for the LAPMC2 and OPT networking mode (SM
ON OFF
Switch)
OFF ON Loading C&C08 single-ESM Switch (HDLC)
III. SW3/3 and SW3/4
They are reserved in the case of interactive remote control.
IV. SW3/7
SW3/7 is the remote control switch. When pushed to OFF, the MPU is working in the
non-remote control status. SW3/3, SW3/4, SW3/5 and SW3/6, together decide whether
4
Board Manual
to load the program & data, and whether to write FLASH after loading. When pushed to
ON, the MPU is working in the remote control status. In this case, the DIP switches
SW3/3 and SW3/4 are invalid, and SW3/5 & SW3/6 should be pushed to ON. The MPU
decides, according to the background switch, whether to load the program & data and
whether to write FLASH after loading.
In addition, you can set data backup software switches for active and standby MPUs on
the maintenance console and use the switches to control the backup between the two
MPUs.
In remote control, level-3 and level-4 restarts need no interaction between the BIOS
and BAM. After running, the host program will set the loading software switches to data
unavailable and program available (for level-3 restart), and data unavailable and
program unavailable (for level-4 restart).
V. SW2/1
SW2/1 is for the ESM.

z OFF: The connection between the ESM and AM/CM applies the
line_spare_mode.
z ON: The connection between the ESM and AM/CM applies the
board_spare_mode.
VI. SW2/2
The host program and BIOS program determine whether to use the OPT
active-standby mode or load-sharing mode by reading the settings of hardware
switches. When loading an SM switch, this switch is to set the module type.
z OFF: the active-standby mode;
z ON: the load-sharing mode.
When loading in the RSM networking mode, it is to set the clock source to be
phase-locked by the network switching board.
z OFF: DT8K0 is phase-locked;
z ON: the clock frame (board) is phase-locked.
When the board is used for ESM, SW10 is used to set the working mode of OTU board.
z OFF: active/standby;
z ON: load sharing.
When the board used for ESM, the setting of DIP switches corresponds with the
networking mode, as shown in VI. Table 4.
5
Board Manual
Table 4 Usage description of DIP switches for ESM
Module Type SW3/8 SW2/1 SW2/2 SW2/3 SW2/4

LAPMC2+OTU OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
OTU_line_spare_mode
LAPMC2+OTU OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
OTU_board_spare_mode
LAPMC2+OTU OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
OTU_share_mode
LAPMC2+DTF frame IDT_mode OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
For the ESM, the meaning of the switch which controls whether the system can write
program to the program memory is the same as that of a general SM. For the switch
which controls whether the system can write data to the data memory, the system can
actually write data to the data memory only when both the just mentioned switches are
set to ON, because the data takes partial FLASH memory of the program.
4 Layout
Figure 4 shows the layout of the CB35MPU.
S1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S3
1 2 3 4
S2
Figure 4 Layout of the CB35MPU
6
Board Manual
5 Technical Indices
I. Performance
The HDLC communications rate is 64 kbit/s (one time slot) and can reach 2 Mbit/s (32
time slots).
II. Power comsumption
z The power voltage is +5 V. There are various working voltages after the
conversion of the power module.
z The CPU core voltage is 0.95 V and its IO voltage is 1.25 V.
z The chipset's core voltage is 1.8 V and its IO voltage is 3.3 V.
z The FPGA's core voltage is 2.5 V and its IO voltage is 3.3 V.
z Both SDRAM's and FLASH's working voltages are 3.3 V.
z The interface driving chip's working voltage is 5 V.
z The board's power consumption limit is 17 W. In normal situations, its maximum
current is less than 2 A.
6 Attention
The type and memory of the active MPU must be the same as those of the standby one.
7
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CB34MPU1
Universal Main Control Board CB34MPU1
1 Overview
The CB34MPU1 is located in the Main control frame of the SM. It is the core control
element of the SM, used to process all the functions of the SM, and to control other
boards in the Main control frame. It has different BIOS software compared with the
CB34MPU0.
2 Main Functions
The hardware of the CB34MPU1 includes CPU, Dynamic Random Access Memory
(DRAM), Asynchronous serial controller, Synchronous serial controller, Program
FLASH, Data FLASH, Logic control unit and BIOS software board.
I. Board functions
1) Receives subscriber and trunk status through the NOD, and sends back the
corresponding commands.
2) Controls the SIG to send corresponding signal tone and voice signal according to
subscriber status.
3) Controls the MFC to receive and send MFC signals according to the status of
local subscribers and trunks.
4) Controls the switching network board for access.
5) Communicates with the Module Communication board (LAPMC2) in the mailbox
mode, and controls the exchange of information among modules through the
LAPMC2.
6) Communicates with the BAM through the HDLC synchronous serial port, and
loads software to the Host.
7) Performs active-standby switching and provides hot backup of Host data through
the EMA.
II. Main features
1) It uses the K62 processor of AMD Company, which has features like low cost,
low power consumption and powerful processing capabilities. The board
supports a maximum of 256 MB memory.
2) It supports BIOS software of multiple versions to reduce the number of types of
finished boards and to make them more compatible.
1
Board Manual
1) It provides an external mailbox communication bus.

2) It provides an HDLC synchronous serial port for communication with the
background.
3) It provides an asynchronous serial port.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB34MPU1.
CPU
AMD_K62
North Bridge
SDRAM
VT82C598
PCI
South Bridge BIOS Ethernet Controller Network

VT82C586B 82559 Interface
ISA
FLASH Logic Serial Port Bus Drive of HDLC SRAM

the Backplane
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB34MPU1
The basic system of this board is made up of AMD_K62 CPU, north bridge, south
bridge, SDRAM and BIOS.
North Bridge: Achieves data processing, memory control and the conversion from the
CPU bus to PCI bus.
SDRAM: Is the universal memory of 512 KB. It stores the program, data and metering
bills when the Host is running.
BIOS: Stores the initialization program of the system and the bottom layer driver of the
switch. It is through the BIOS that the program and data are loaded to the Host.
South Bridge: Achieves the conversion between the PCI bus and ISA bus.
ISA bus: Responsible for the communication of peripheral equipment such as mailbox
and FLASH with the CPU.
SRAM: Stores debugging information.
HDLC: Achieves the communication between the FAM and BAM.
2
Board Manual
The Bus Drive of the Backplane: Performs the buffering and driving of signals
between the MPU and the left, middle & right buses. The MPU communicates with
other boards (NOD, MFC, DTR, LAP, NO7, SIG, EMA, OPT, MC2, NET, MEM, ALM,
TCI, CHD, and so on) through the on-board mailbox interface to control various
boards in the main control frame.
Ethernet Controller: For the software & hardware debugging and for the network
expansion in the future.
FLASH memory: Stores the Host program and module data of the switch.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB34MPU1.
RUN
MUI
BUI
DPE
DWR
PPE
PWR
LAD
MPU
Figure 2 CB34MPU1 panel
1) Board indicators
3
Board Manual
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB34MPU1 indicators
Normal
status
One flash per 100 ms during normal running. When
serving as a standby board, one flash per 100 ms if the Flash per 100
backup is complete, and one flash per 400 ms if the ms
backup is incomplete.
ON if this board is active and OFF if this board is See the
MUI Yellow Active indicator
standby meaning
ON if this board is standby. Note that the standby MPU See the
BUI Green Standby indicator
cannot operate any boards, except for the EMA. meaning
It is controlled by the fifth DIP switch on the active
Data storage
DPE Yellow write-protect
is ON, otherwise, it is OFF. It means that the MPU meaning
indicator
program can backup data into data Flash.
When it is ON, it indicates MPU program is writing data
Indicator for data
into data Flash. When this indicator is flashing, it See the
DWR Green storage (when data
indicates that MPU program failed to write data into meaning
is being written)
data Flash, causing data in the data Flash unavailable.
It is controlled by the sixth DIP switch on the active
Program storage
PPE Yellow write-protect
is ON, otherwise, it is OFF. It means that BIOS can back meaning
indicator
up program into program Flash.
Program storage It is ON, it indicates that BIOS is writing programs into See the
PWR Green
writing indicator program Flash. meaning
1. ON: The host is waiting for loading.
2. Flash: The host is loading.
See the
LAD Yellow Loading indicator 3. OFF: Loading is complete.
meaning
If the loading is not completed, BIOS will turn on this
indicator to request for loading again.
2) Reset switch S1: This is the hardware reset button located in the center of the
board panel.
3) DIP switches
Figure 3 shows the setting of the DIP switches.
OFF ON
SW1
Combined to select module communication bandwidth
SW2
SW3 OFF: program in the program memory cannot be used. ON: can be used
SW4 OFF: data in the data memory cannot be used. ON: can be used
SW5 OFF: data cannot be written into the data memory. ON: can be written into
SW6 OFF: program cannot be written into the program memory. ON: can be written into
SW7 OFF: remote control is not selected. ON: remote control is selected.
SW8 It works along with SW11 and SW12 to select loading mode.
SW9 Reserved
SW10 OFF: Active/Standby mode ON: Load Sharing mode
Figure 3 Setting of the DIP switches
4
Board Manual
a) By combining the DIP switches SW1 and SW2, four values of module
communication bandwidths can be selected.
Table 2 gives corresponding bandwidth values of different SW1 and SW2

combinations.
Table 2 SW1 and SW2 combinations and the corresponding bandwidth values
SW1 SW2 Number of time slots Communication bandwidth
OFF OFF Two time slots 128 kbit/s
ON ON Four time slots 256 kbit/s
ON OFF Eight time slots 512 kbit/s
OFF ON Twelve timeslot 768 kbit/s
b) Combining DIP switches SW8, SW11 and SW12, eight different loading modes can
be selected.
Table 3 gives corresponding loading modes of the combinations of the DIP switches
SW8, SW11 and SW12.
Table 3 Combinations of SW8, SW11 and SW12
SW8 SW11 SW12 Loading mode

OFF OFF Loading C&C08 ESM Switch (LAPMC2 and OTU inter-networking)
OFF ON Loading C&C08 ESM Exchange (LAPMC2 and IDT)
OFF
ON OFF Loading C&C08 single-SM Switch (HDLC)
ON ON Reserved for future use
OFF OFF Reserved for future use
ON ON Loading mode for the LAPMC2 and IDT networking mode (RSM)
ON
ON OFF Loading mode for the LAPMC2 and OPT networking mode (SM Switch)
OFF ON Loading C&C08 single-ESM Switch (HDLC)
c) SW3, SW4
During the host loading, the program or data stored in the FLASH can be determined
to be usable or not through reading the setting information of the DIP switches SW3
and SW4.
When SW3 is ON, the program is usable; when SW4 is ON, the data is usable;
otherwise, unusable.
During the interactive remote control, that is, when SW7 is in the position of ON, SW3
& SW4 are reserved and unused.
d) SW7
5
Board Manual
SW7 is the remote control switch. When pushed to OFF, the MPU is working in the
non-remote control status. SW3, SW4, SW5 and SW6, together decide whether to
load the program & data, and whether to write FLASH after loading. When pushed to
ON, the MPU is working in the remote control status, at this juncture, the DIP switches
SW3 and SW4 are invalid, and SW5 & SW6 should be pushed to ON. The MPU
decides, according to the background switch, whether to load the program & data and
whether to write FLASH after loading.
e) SW9
SW9 is used for ESM.

z OFF: The connection mode of ESM and AM/CM is line_spare_mode.
z ON: The connection mode of ESM and AM/CM is board_spare_mode.
f) SW10
The host program and BIOS program determine whether to use the OPT
active-standby mode or load-sharing mode through reading hardware switch. When
loading an SM switch, this switch is to set the module type. When it is in OFF position,
the active-standby mode is selected; and when ON, the load-sharing mode is
selected. When loading in the RSM networking mode, it is to set the clock source to
be phase-locked by the network switching board. When it is in OFF position, DT8K0 is
phase-locked; and when ON, the clock frame (board) is phase-locked.
When the board used for ESM, SW10 used to set the working mode of OTU board:
ON/OFF-load sharing/active/standby.
When the board used for ESM, the setting of DIP switches corresponds with the
networking mode, as shown in Table 4.
Table 4 Usage description of DIP switches for ESM
Module Type SW8 SW9 SW10 SW11 SW12

LAPMC2+OTU OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
OTU_line_spare_mode
LAPMC2+OTU OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
OTU_board_spare_mode
LAPMC2+OTU OTU_share_mode OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
LAPMC2+DTF frame IDT_mode OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
For the ESM, the meaning of the switch which controls whether the system can write
program to the program memory is the same as that of a general SM. But for the
switch which controls whether the system can write data to the data memory, only
when both the just mentioned switches are set to ON can the system actually write
data to the data memory because the data takes part original FLASH space of the
program.
6
Board Manual
4 Layout
Figure 4 shows the layout of the CB34MPU1.
S1
OFF ON
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
SW9
SW10
SW11
SW12
Figure 4 Layout of the CB34MPU1
The CB34MPU1 has no jumper.
5 Technical Indices
1) Memory: 256 MB
2) Data FLASH: 3.5 MB
3) Program FLASH: 8 MB
4) The processing capability for a common subscriber is more than 300 kBHCA.
5) CPU: AMD-K6-2
6) The designed BHCA value for ordinary TUP incoming trunk is 350 k.
7) The designed CAPS value for Service Switching Point (SSP) Telephone User
Part (TUP) incoming trunk is 22.
6 Attention
None.
7
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/NET
ESM 16K Time-Slot Switch Board CB03NET
1 Overview
The CB03NET (also called XNET) is the switching network board in the main control
frame of the Enhanced Switching Module (ESM). It fulfills the internal information
switching function and call switching function of the ESM.
2 Main Functions
I. Board functions
1) Ensures non-blocking switching of 16K×16K time slots.

2) Provides the transmission processing of the caller number digital signals.
3) Provides teleconference facility for a single group with a maximum of 64 parties,
or simultaneous multi-group or multi-party teleconferences not exceeding 64
subscribers in total.
4) Provides various Clocks’ phase-locking function, and outputs the working Clock
of a module.
II. Main features
1) Ensures the non-congestion in switching of 16K×16K time slots.

2) Provides simultaneous teleconference facility with 64 parties.
3) Sends and processes 192-channel FSK caller numbers.
4) The active XNET provides working clock for the system. It has various Clock
working modes.
z Board provided Clock (free-run mode)
z Phase locked frame Clock
z Phase locked DT Clock
z Phase locked OPT Clock
5) Supports OTU active-standby or load sharing working mode.
6) Supports the hot-swappable function.
7) Supports to store board information.
8) The switching network chip has the following features.
z It supports the functions of inserting and extracting of each time slot and reading
back the control memory, and self-loop tests of the network when the board is in
service.
z It supports integrated serial-parallel and parallel-serial conversion circuit
avoiding a different circuit for each.
1
Board Manual
z It supports the broadcasting mode, that is, it can simultaneously switch one input
time slot, to any number of output time slots.
9) For the teleconference facility, it uses a specialized integrated circuit, having the
following features.
z The voice is very clear. Each receiver picks up the loudest voice of other
participants, in addition to his own.
z It supports A/µ law PCM code pattern and even-bit overturn.
z It supports simultaneous multiple teleconferences, with the total conference
participants not exceeding 64. It supports a maximum of 21 groups of three-party
communication.
10) To ensure the stability and reliability of the switching network, the NET board has
the following features.
z The active-standby switching network can be hot backed up in the
write-together-read-separately mode.
z It provides auto active-standby switching.
z The switching can be controlled by background man-machine commands.
z It supports active-standby switchover, hot backup of the standby board, and
ensures uninterruptible speech paths during an active-standby switchover.
1) Both the active and standby XNETs provide two 393 Mbit/s optical ports (on the
board panel) respectively for connecting the active and standby QSIs in the LIM
frame, so as to achieve the transmission of speech paths.
2) The active XNET provides two differential 2 Mbit/s HWs to the LIM frame to
achieve link transmission to the LIM frame, and it also provides 64 differential
2 Mbit/s HWs to the subscriber frame or trunk frame.
3) Provides a set of addresses, data and control buses communicating with the
MPU.
4) Provides the HW signal and the Clock signal between the trunk frames or the
subscriber line frames.
5) Receives differential Clock signals of 2 MHz and 8 kHz provided by the Clock
frame.
6) Provides the HW signal and the Clock signal to connect with the other boards of
the Main control frame.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB03NET.
2
Board Manual
16K switching
module Optical
To OTU OTU Optical port
channel HW HW
transmission
selection module
To each
board HW
Differential HW driving
HW
Connectors on backplane
FSK
module
COF
module
MPU bus CPU interface bus

Driving
Interconnection between active Control/state signal

board and standby board Administraion To each
module module
Clock input/output Clock Various clock

To each
module module
£«5V input Power Various power To each

module module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB03NET
16K switching module: Is a 16K×16K T-net and fulfills the time slot switching function.
Optical transmission module: Providing optical ports of 393 Mbit/s.
FSK module: Provides the caller number display resources.
COF module: Provides the teleconference resources.
Administration module: Provides the bus communication interface of the Switching

Module MPU.
Clock module: Provides the phase-locked synchronous Clock source (8 kHz) and
outputs the system Clock signal.
Power module: Provides a power supply of +/- 5 V.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB03NET. There are totally five indicators on the NET
board.
3
Board Manual
RUN
ACT
CLK
CH1
CH2
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
XNET
Figure 2 CB03NET panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB03NET indicators
Indicator Color Meaning Description Normal Status

ON: Indicates that the board is powered on.
ON and OFF
Running ON and OFF every one second: Indicates that the
RUN Red every one
indicator board is working normally.
second
OFF: Indicates that the board is faulty.
ON: Indicates that the board is in the active status. ON
ACT Green Active indicator OFF: Indicates that the board is in the standby (active)/OFF
status. (standby)
ON: Indicates that the clock source is being locked
CLK Green Clock indicator and set. ON
OFF: Indicates that the board clock runs freely.
ON: Indicates that the optical port 1 is working
Optical port 1
CH1 Green normally. ON
indicator
OFF: Indicates that the optical port 1 is faulty.
ON: Indicates that the optical port 2 is working
Optical port 2
CH2 Green normally. ON
indicator
OFF: Indicates that the optical port 1 is faulty.
4
Board Manual
2) Network port
Network ports 1 and 2 are connected to the active and standby QSIs respectively.
4 Layout
The CB03NET has no DIP switch and jumper.
5 Technical Indices
1) Optical port
Mode: Multi-mode
Rate: 393.216 MBaud
Wave length: 1310 nm
Interface type: SC
Transmission distance: <500 m

2) Total power consumption of the board: <30 W
6 Attention
None.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/NETA
NetWork Board CB02NETA
1 Overview
The CB02BNETA is located in the Main control frame of the SM and fulfills the internal
information switching and call switching of the SM. In addition, it provides the caller
number identification and teleconference functions.
2 Main Functions
I. Board functions
1) Ensures non-blocking switching of 4096×4096 time slots.

2) Provides the transmission processing of the caller number digital signals.
3) Provides teleconference facility for a single group with a maximum of 64 parties, or
simultaneous multi-group or multi-party teleconferences not exceeding 64
subscribers in total.
4) Provides various Clocks’ phase-locking function, and outputs the working Clock of
a module.
II. Main features
1) Ensures the non-congestion in switching of 4096×4096 time slots.

2) Provides simultaneous teleconference facility with 64 parties.
3) Provides a 32-line caller number display function.
4) Offers various Clock working modes.
z Board provided Clock (free-run mode)
z Phase locked frame Clock
z Phase locked DT Clock
z Phase locked OPT Clock
5) Supports OPT active-standby or load sharing working mode.
6) Provides self-testing function of the board.
7) The switching network chip has the following features.
z It supports the functions of inserting and extracting of each time slot and reading
back the control memory, and self-loop tests of the network when the board is in
service.
z It supports integrated serial-parallel and parallel-serial conversion circuit avoiding
a different circuit for each.
z It supports the broadcasting mode, that is, it can simultaneously switch one input
time slot, to any number of output time slots.
1
Board Manual
8) For the teleconference facility, it uses a specialized integrated circuit, having the
following features.
z The voice is very clear. Each receiver picks up the loudest voice of other
participants, in addition to his own.
z It supports A/µ law PCM code pattern and even-bit overturn.
z It supports simultaneous multiple teleconferences, with the total conference
participants not exceeding 64. It supports a maximum of 21 groups of three-party
communication.
9) The caller number identification generator has the following features.
z It supports CID - I mode (to display the caller number in the ringing status) and CID
- II mode (to display the caller number during conversation status and to send the
call waiting tone to the caller).
z It supports A/µ law coding.
z It supports sending of CID signal simultaneously in 32×N lines. N is the total
number of modulating DSP circuits.
10) To ensure the stability and reliability of the switching network, the NETA has the
following features.
z The active-standby switching network can be hot backed up in the
write-together-read-separately mode.
z It provides auto active-standby switching.
z The switching can be controlled by background man-machine commands.
1) Provides a set of addresses, data and control buses communicating with the MPU.
2) Provides the HW signal and the Clock signal between the trunk frames or the
subscriber line frames.
3) Receives differential Clock signals of 2 MHz and 8 kHz provided by the Clock
frame.
4) Provides the HW signal and the Clock signal to connect with the other boards of
the Main control frame.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB02NETA.
2
Board Manual
UHW Sw itching DHW

netw ork
module
CLK
CLK Clock processing CPU interf ace
MPU
module Telephone conference module
module
Caller number
module
8K
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB02NETA
Switching network module: Is a 4k×4k T-net and fulfills the time slot switching function.
Telephone conference module: Provides the teleconference resources.
Caller number module: Provides the caller number display resources.
CPU interface module: Provides the bus communication interface of the Switching
Module MPU.
Clock processing module: Provides the phase-locked synchronous Clock source

(8 kHz) and outputs the system Clock signal.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB02NETA. There are totally five indicators on the
NETA.
3
Board Manual
RUN
ACT
ANT
OPT
CKI
BNETA
Figure 2 CB02NETA panel
1) Board indicators:
Table 1 Meanings of the CB02NETA indicators

Flashes: Alternatively ON and OFF for a duration of one second indicates
RUN Red Flashes
that the self-test of the NET is normal and FSK is in normal service.
Active/standby indicator, ON when the board status is active and OFF when
ACT Green ON/OFF
it is standby.
Indicates that the opposite board is in-position. It is ON when the opposite
ANT Green board is in position, that is, ANT indicator will be ON when both the Switching ON/OFF
Network boards are in position, and OFF when only one board is in position.
Table 2 gives the meanings of the CB02BNETA indicators OPT and CKI.
Table 2 Meanings of the CB02BNETA indicators OPT and CKI
Indication mode Meanings

OPT CKI Multi-SM switch Single-SM switch
OFF OFF This board provides the Clock. This board provides the Clock.
The phase lock ring of the Switching The phase lock ring of the Switching
Flashing Flashing
Network board is faulty. Network board is faulty.
OFF ON Phase locked OPT-0 Phase locked Clock frame
ON OFF Phase locked DT8K-0
ON ON Phase locked OPT-1 Phase locked DT8K-1
4
Board Manual
None.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the CB02NETA.
J5
J3
J4
Figure 3 Layout of the CB02NETA
1) Table 3 gives the meanings of the jumpers JP3 and JP4.
Table 3 Meanings of the jumpers JP3 and JP4
JP3 status JP4 status Meanings of the jumper

ON OFF Default setting
OFF ON Emergency setting after the phase lock ring failure
2) Table 4 gives the meaning of the jumper JP5.
Table 4 Meaning of the jumper JP5
JP5 status Meanings of the jumper

ON Teleconference as per A law
OFF Teleconference as per µ law
5 Technical Indices
1) The differential HWs and Clocks comply with the RS422 standard.
2) DSP Clock is 40 MHz.
3) The power consumption of the board is 7.75 W.
5
Board Manual
4) The board provides a non-congestion switching of 4096X4096 time slots.
6 Attention
None.
6
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/NOD
Master Node Board CC02NOD
1 Overview
The CC02NOD is located in the Main control frame of the SM. It receives and transmits
four RS422 differential asynchronous serial port signals.
2 Main Functions
Each NOD board is divided into four independent master nodes. Each exchanges
commands and data with the MPU through the mailbox, mounted on the MPU bus and
communicates with the master nodes of the subscriber frame and trunk frame in the
asynchronous communication mode.
I. Board functions
1) It provides four independent master nodes, which access the slave nodes in the
master/slave communication mode.
2) Each master node exchanges commands and messages with the active MPU
through the dual port RAM (mailbox).
II. Main features
1) The NOD board supports eight asynchronous communication modes of serial port
communication between master nodes and slave nodes.
2) The rate of serial port communication of master and slave nodes can be
configured in the background.
3) Serial port communication is a character-oriented asynchronous communication
mode. The basic communication unit is one character.
1) Provides a set of buses to communicate with the MPU.

2) Provides four RS422 serial ports of the standard UART mode.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CC02NOD.
1
Board Manual
Main control module
Serial port communication

Mailbox communication
module
MPU RS422
module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CC02NOD
Mailbox communication module: Acts as a buffer for the communication information of

the MPU.
Main control module: Provides the board initialization control, carries out the status
supervision and the management of message queue reporting and sending.
Serial communication module: Performs serial port communication between master

and slave nodes.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CC02NOD.
2
Board Manual
VCC
NOD0
NOD1
NOD2
NOD3
NOD
Figure 2 CC02NOD panel
Table 1 Meanings of the CC02NOD indicators

Indicates power 1. ON: The power supply is normal.
VCC Red ON
supply status 2. OFF: The power supply is abnormal.
1. 100 ms ON and 100 ms OFF: Before configuration
(power-on or SM Host)
2. 200 ms ON and 200 ms OFF: Before configuration (AM
Host)
Running status
3. 500 ms ON and 500 ms OFF: Configured to the ST board One second ON
indication of
NOD 0 ~ 3 Red type, searching slave node to define left/right half frame and one second
Serial port 0 to
(SM Host) OFF
serial port 3
4. One second ON and one second OFF: Configuration is
over and equipment is in service.
5. Two seconds ON and two seconds OFF: Communication
with the Host mailbox is interrupted while in service.
4 Layout
There is no jumper and DIP switch on this board.
3
Board Manual
5 Technical Indices
1) The board provides four RS422 serial ports of standard UART mode. The
transmission distance is less than 50 m. The serial ports comply with ITU-T
Recommendation V.11.
2) The default rate of the asynchronous serial port is 187.5 kbit/s. The rate of the
serial port communication can be changed to 375 kbit/s through Host
configuration.
3) The character format of master and slave node serial port communication protocol
is as follows: one initial bit, eight data bits (information byte), one control bit (TB8),
one stop bit, eleven bits in total. TB8 can be the multi-Host communication bit of
the serial port controller or can be a parity check bit.
4) The NOD supports eight modes of slave node serial port communication.
z Mode 0: fixed length, unidirectional acknowledgement, SM mode
z Mode 1: variable length, unidirectional acknowledgement, SM mode
z Mode 2: fixed length, bi-directional acknowledgement, SM mode
z Mode 3: variable length, bi-directional acknowledgement, SM mode
z Mode 4: fixed length, unidirectional acknowledgement, AM mode
z Mode 5: variable length, unidirectional acknowledgement, AM mode
z Mode 6: fixed length, bi-directional acknowledgement, AM mode
z Mode 7: variable length, bi-directional acknowledgement, AM mode
6) Power consumption of the board: <2 W
6 Attention
1) When the NOD board and the slave node board are located in different racks, care
should be taken for maintaining both the racks at the same potential.
2) When the NOD board is far away from the slave node board, while inter
connection wiring is done, care should be taken to avoid intense electromagnetic
interference (such as air switch, lightning) so that the interface of the board does
not get damaged.
3) When the master node 0 or 1 of the NOD board is manually reset on the
background, the mailbox communication between the other three master nodes
and the MPU may get interrupted for some time.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/OBC
40M Optic Interface Board C841OBC
1 Overview
The C841OBC is located in the line interface frame of the AM/CM, which is
connected to the OPT at the SM side providing communication between the SM and
the AM/CM.
Note:
The OBC uses a multi-mode laser, as its transmission distance is small. The board with a single mode
laser on it is called an RBC. The OBC and RBC have the same PCB, but are different in their optical
modules.
2 Main Functions
The OBC receives two code streams of 40.96 Mbit/s sent by the SM over the optic
fibers and after decoding and justification, it separates four HWs of 16 Mbit/s and
two HDLC signaling links of 2 Mbit/s. In the reverse direction, the OBC multiplexes
four 16 Mbit/s HWs and two 2 Mbit/s HDLC signaling links. At the same time, it adds
the scrambling code, frame alignment code, signaling code, comparison code and
frame header checking code. After justification, it multiplexes these codes into two
code streams of 40.96 Mbit/s, and sends them to the SM through the optical
modules and then optical fibers.
I. Board functions
1) Transmits the information of speech channels between the AM/CM and the SM.
2) Transmits the HDLC link signals between the AM/CM and the SM.
3) Communicates with the QSI through the serial port.
4) Provides the Clock signals for the SM.
5) Provides the optical channel monitoring function. Based on the definition of
“8B1C1H” code pattern, it monitors the status of three optical channels, namely,
Out of step, Code error and Remote alarm.
6) With the “local self-loop” function, it directly loops back the output of the
40.96 Mbit/s code streams or directly loops back the 16 Mbit/s code streams of
the QSI.
1
Board Manual
II. Main features
1) The board works in the active-standby mode and has an automatic switchover
function.
2) The major functions of the board are provided by the FPGA logic.
3) The code stream format at the optical interface is “8B1C1H” code pattern.
4) It uses the multi-mode laser and multi-mode optical fiber for short distance
communication.
1) Provides two pairs of 40.96 Mbit/s optical signals to connect with the SM.
2) Provides four speech channel HWs of 16.384 Mbit/s to the QSI.
3) Provides two link HWs of 2.048 Mbit/s to the QSI.
4) Provides one serial port to fulfill the Master node/Slave-node communication
with the QSI.
5) Provides a differential serial port as the emergency channel.
6) Receives the 16 MHz Clock signals and 8 kHz frame signals from the QSI.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841OBC.
Optic
interface Opto-electric Signal HW, link, clock Q
S conversion processing
module S
M module
I
Clock processing
module
Compelled signal
Active/standby
switchover module
Comm port Emergency serial port

Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841OBC
Opto-electric conversion module: Converts the two optical signals of 40.96 Mbit/s to
electrical signals.
Signal processing module: Extracts the HW signals and link signals from the
40.96 Mbit/s signals and in the reverse direction multiplexes these HW signals and
link signals into the 40.96 Mbit/s signals. It also monitors the status of the optical
channels such as out of step, code error and remote alarm, and has the frame
adjustment function.
2
Board Manual
Clock processing module: Extracts the 40.96 Mbit/s timing signals from the optical
interface and generates the timing signals to be sent through the optical interface.
Active/standby switchover module: Achieves the monitoring of the board status and
automatic switchover functions.
CPU processing module: Handles the board initialization control and status
monitoring functions.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841OBC.
RUN
FAIL
OBC
Figure 2 C841OBC panel
1) Board indicators
3
Board Manual
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841OBC indicators

Running status 2. ON: The board is in the standby status.
indicator 3. Flashes fast: The clock is faulty.
1. OFF: Both optical fibers of the board are working
normally.
FAIL Green Fault indicator 2. ON: Code error, out of frame, remote alarm, or ‘no light’ OFF
occurs.
3. Flashes fast: The clock is faulty.
2) Optical interfaces
Two pairs of optical interfaces are available on the OBC front panel. For both the
upper and lower pairs of optical interfaces, the top cable is for receiving and the
bottom one is for transmitting.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the C841OBC.
ON S1
S2
1 2 3 4
ON
S3
1 2 3 4
Figure 3 Layout of the C841OBC

4
Board Manual
Bit Meaning ON OFF

S2.1 FPGA loading switch Programmable Read Cable loading mode
Only Memory
(PROM) loading
mode
S2.2 Type of the board corresponding to X -optical channel SM Reserved
S2.3 Type of the board corresponding to Y- optical channel SM Reserved
S2.4 Type of the corresponding board OPT OLE
3) DIP switch S3 is reserved for future use.
5 Technical Indices
1) Optical interface link rate: 40.96 Mbit/s
2) Each optical channel provides: two HWs of 16.384Mbit/s (512 time sltos) and
one HW of 2.048 Mbit/s (HDLC signaling)
3) Serial port communication rate: 187.5 kbit/s, asynchronous
4) Transmission signal code: Huawei “8B1C1H” type
5) Transmission parameters of the optical interface
Distance: short distance: ≤200 m
Wavelength: 850 nm (800 nm ~ 900 nm)
Mean transmitting optical power: -12 ~ -20 dBm
Receive sensitivity: -12 ~ -27 dBm
Receiving saturated optical power: > -12 dBm

7) Working temperature: 0 ~ 70 OC
8) Power consumption: about 20 W
6 Attention
1) When connected to the OPT, all bits of the DIP switch S2 should be put to ON.
2) The board cannot work normally unless S3 is set as follows:
S3.1 = OFF; S3.2 = OFF;
S3.3 = ON; S3.4 = ON;
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/OLE
Remote Optical Fiber Interface Board C804OLE
1 Overview
The C8040LE is located in the Main control frame of the SM, and is used to connect
with the 40M Remote Optical Interface Board (RBC) at the AM/CM side. It provides
the inter-module communication connection between the SM and AM/CM, and is
responsible for the transmission of speech channel service signals (HW signals) and
signaling control signals (HDLC signals).
2 Main Functions
The OLE performs the optical-electrical conversion and signal amplification of the
optical signal transmitted from the AM/CM. It extracts the Clock, recovers the signal
code, and then demultiplexes the HW signal to the NETA board and the HDLC link
signal to the LAPMC2 board. It also multiplexes the HW signal sent from the NETA
and the HDLC link signal sent from the LAPMC2 to a high speed code flow, which,
after level adjustment, is sent to the optical module for electrical-optical conversion
and then sent out through the fiber.
I. Board functions
1) Provides the speech channel transmission path between the SM and the
AM/CM.
2) Provides the transmission path for inter-module control information.
3) Provides the Clock signal for the NETA in the SM.
4) Provides the loop-test function to the entire switching network.
5) Supports the code flow synchronization function.
6) Supervises the status of the RBC connected at the other end.
II. Main features
1) Uses the standard receiving and transmitting integrated optical module.

2) Adopts the single-mode optical device.
3) Supports remote fiber transmission, where the maximum distance is 50 km.
4) Supports two OLEs in a load-sharing mode with corresponding fibers of varying
lengths.
1) Provides 16 HW output signals of 2.048 Mbit/s.
1
Board Manual
2) Provides one HDLC link output signal of 2.048 Mbit/s.
3) Provides 16 HW input signals of 2.048 Mbit/s.
4) Provides one HDLC link input signal of 2.048 Mbit/s.
5) Provides four output Clock synchronizing signals, namely, 8 kHz, 2.048 MHz,
4.096 MHz and 16.384 MHz.
6) Provides the bus signals to the Host MPU board interface, including 16-bit
address bus, 8-bit data bus and 3-bit control bus.
7) Provides four input Clock synchronizing signals.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C804OLE.
CLOCK
CLOCK
Demultiplexing module
Clock NET
Level
Optical signal Optic/electric conversion extraction
conversion module module
module LAPMC2
Electric/optic Level
conversion Multiplexing NET
Optical signal conversion
module module module LAPMC2
Status monitoring module Communication bus
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C804OLE
Optic/electric (Electric/optic) conversion module: Effects the conversion from

40.96 bit/s optical signal to 40.96 Mbit/s electrical signal and conversely.
Level conversion module: Converts the signal level to achieve the interface between
the digital device and the receiving/transmitting integrated optical module.
Clock extraction module: Extracts the 40.96 MHz Clock from the 40.96 Mbit/s
electrical signal received, for the in-board signal processing and as the Clock source
of the entire SM.
Demultiplexing module: Demultiplexes sixteen lines of 2.048 Mbit/s HW signals & one
line of 2.048 Mbit/s HDLC link signal from the received 40.96 Mbit/s code flow, and
carries out synchronization process with the Clock signals sent back from the NETA.
Finally it sends them to other related boards (including BNET and LAPMC2).
Multiplexing module: Multiplexes sixteen lines of 2.048 Mbit/s HW signals and one
line of 2.048 Mbit/s HDLC link signal sent from the BNET board and LAPMC2 board to
the 40.96 Mbit/s code flow signals, and then sends them to the level adjustment
module.
2
Board Manual
Status monitoring module: Monitors the status of the entire board, communicates with
the active MPU, reports the board status and statistics data to the active MPU and
carries out the commands sent by the MPU.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C804OLE.
ACT
RNL
LFA
BER
RMT
OLE
Figure 2 C804OLE panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C804OLE indicators

ACT Green Active/Standby indicator ON when it is active, OFF when it is standby Uncertain
ON when there is no optical signal and OFF
RNL Green Optical Signal indicator OFF
when there is optical signal
Indicator for optical channel ON for loss of sync and OFF for
LFA Green OFF
loss of sync synchronization
ON when there is error code and OFF when
BER Green Error code indicator OFF
there is no error code
ON when remote end is faulty and OFF when
RMT Green Remote end fault indicator OFF
it is normal
3
Board Manual
None.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the jumpers on the C804OLE.
J2 J3
J5
J1
J4
Figure 3 Jumpers on the C804OLE
As shown in Figure 3, there is no switch on the board. Table 2 gives the meanings of
the jumper settings.
Table 2 Meanings of the OLE jumper settings
Jumper Meaning
J1 It is used only for debugging. Open for normal working and shorted for debugging
J2 It is used (shorted) only for debugging with the cable head loaded
J3 Shorted when it is used in the C&C08 C-type module and kept open for the C&C08 SM
J4 It is used (shorted) only for debugging
J5 It is used (shorted) only for debugging and is the test port for board software.
5 Technical Indices
1) The error rate is less than 10-9 under normal working conditions.
2) When the error rate reaches 10-3, the optical channel will be completely cut off.
3) It has “8B1H1C synchronous byte multiplexing code” to fulfill the inter-module
information transmission.
4) The transmission optical power is more than or equal to -14 dBm.
4
Board Manual
5) The optical receive sensitivity is -40 dBm and the received optical signal is
usually greater than -38 dBm.
6 Attention
1) The two optical interfaces of the receiving/transmitting integrated optical module
are connected to two ring flanges on the back of the board through fiber
connectors. The top ring flange is for transmitting while the bottom one is for
receiving. Care should be taken not to connect them in the reverse order.
2) The settings of optical channel synchronization digits are compatible with the SM
and the C&C08 C-type module, which is realized through the jumper J2. See the
silk screen printed description on the PCB for jumper setting details.
3) Two modes of working are supported in the load-sharing mode: Fibers with the
same length or fibers with varying lengths. Both these modes can be set through
the jumper J3. See the silk screen printed description on the PCB for jumper
setting details.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/OPT
Optical Interface Board C805OPT
1 Overview
The C805OPT is located in the Main control frame of the SM. It is used to interconnect
with the RBC at the AM/CM side, to provide the inter-module communication
connection between the SM and the AM/CM. It is also responsible for the transmission
of speech channel service signals (HW signals) and the signaling control signals
(HDLC signals).
Note:
The OPT uses HP-developed “discrete” multi-mode optical device for short transmission distances. So, it
can only be used in local connections, which is different from the remote optical interface board OLE. The
optical devices used by OLEs are also different.
2 Main Functions
The OPT performs the optical-electrical conversion and signal amplification of the
optical signal transmitted from the AM/CM. It extracts the Clock and recovers the signal
code, and then demultiplexes HW signals to the NETA board and the HDLC link signals
to the LAPMC2 board. It also multiplexes the HW signals from the NETA and the HDLC
link signals from the LAPMC2 to a high speed code flow, which is sent, after the level
adjustment, to the optical module for the electrical-optical conversion and then sent out
through the fiber.
I. Board functions
1) Provides the speech channel transmission path between the SM and the AM/CM.
3) Provides the Clock signal for the NETA in the SM.
4) Provides the loop test function to the entire switching network.
5) Performs the real-time error test and generates error rate statistics report.
6) Provides the code flow synchronization function.
7) Monitors the status of the RBC at the other end.
1
Board Manual
II. Main features
1) Used for short distance fiber transmission.

2) Board devices are highly integrated.
3) Sufficient maintenance information can be reported from the board, facilitating
easy location of the system faults.
1) Provides sixteen HW output signals of 2.048 Mbit/s.

2) Provides one HDLC link output signal of 2.048 Mbit/s.
3) Provides sixteen HW input signals of 2.048 Mbit/s.
4) Provides one HDLC link input signal of 2.048 Mbit/s.
5) Provides four output Clock synchronization signals, including 8 kHz, 2.048 MHz,
4.096 MHz and 16.384 MHz.
6) Provides bus signals to the interface of the active MPU, including 16-bit address
bus, 8-bit data bus and 3-bit control bus.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of C805OPT.
CLOCK
Demultiplexing module
Signal NET
Optical/electrical Clock ext
conversion module amplification raction module
OBC
module
LAPMC2
Level
Electrical/optical adjustment Multiplexing NET
OBC conversion module module module
LAPMC2
Communication bus
Status monitoring module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C805OPT
Optical/electrical conversion module: Provides the conversion from 40.96 Mbit/s optical
signals to 40.96 Mbit/s electrical signals.
Electrical/optical conversion module: Provides the conversion from 40.96 Mbit/s

electrical signals to 40.96 Mbit/s optical signals.
Signal amplification module: Amplifies the received signals and provides the
quantization function to facilitate the normal connection with digital devices.
2
Board Manual
Level adjustment module: Adjusts the signal level to facilitate driving of the
electrical/optical conversion module.
Clock extraction module: Extracts 40.96 MHz Clock from the received 40.96 Mbit/s
electrical signals for signal processing within the board and is also used as the Clock
source of the entire SM.
Demultiplexing module: Demultiplexes sixteen HW signals of 2.048 Mbit/s and one

HDLC link signal of 2.048 Mbit/s from the received 40.96 Mbit/s code flow, and then
sends them to other related boards (including BNET and LAPMC2).
Multiplexing module: Multiplexes sixteen HW signals of 2.048 Mbit/s and one HDLC
link signal of 2.048 Mbit/s from the BNET and LAPMC2 respectively to the 40.96 Mbit/s
code flow signals, and then sends them to the level adjustment module.
Status monitoring module: Monitors the status of the entire board, communicates with
the active MPU, reports the board status and statistics data to the active MPU and
carries out the commands sent by the MPU.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C805OPT.
RUN
ACT
RNL
LFA
BER
RMT
LOF
LOP
LFAP
DONE
OPT
Figure 2 C805OPT panel
3
Board Manual
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C805OPT indicators

1. Flashes slowly: The board is running
normally.
RUN indicator Red Running indicator Flashes slowly
2. Flashes fast: The board is
communicating with the Host.
ON when it is active, OFF when it is
ACT Green Active/Standby indicator Uncertain
standby
ON when there is no optical signal and
RNL Green Optical signal indicator. OFF
OFF when there is optical signal
Indicator for optical path loss ON for loss of synchronization and OFF for
LFA Green OFF
of synchronization synchronization
ON when there is error code and OFF
BER Green Error code indicator OFF
when there is no error code
ON when it is faulty and OFF when it is
RMT Green Opposite end fault indicator OFF
normal
ON when there is no Clock, OFF when
LOF Green Clock test indicator OFF
there is a Clock
ON for self-loop and OFF when working
LOP Green Self-loop indicator OFF
normally
ON when the link is out of sync and OFF
LFAP Green Link loss of sync indicator OFF
when it is synchronous
ON while loading and OFF when working
DONE Green FPGA loading indicator OFF
normally

None.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the jumpers on the C805OPT.
4
Board Manual
J1 05
J10 3
J10 2
J10 1
J1 04
Figure 3 Jumpers on the C805OPT
As shown in Figure 3, the board has no switch.
Table 2 gives the meanings of the jumpers of the OPT.
Table 2 Meanings of the OPT jumpers
Jumper Meaning
J101 It is used only for debugging. Open for normal working and shorted for debugging
J102 It is used (shorted) only for debugging, as the cable loading head
J103 Open by default
J104 It is used (shorted) only for debugging
J105 It is used (shorted) only for debugging as a test port of board software
5 Technical Indices
1) The error rate is less than 10-9 under normal working conditions.
2) When the error rate reaches 10-3, the optical path is cut off.
3) “8B1H1C synchronous byte multiplexing code” is used to transmit the
inter-module information.
6 Attention
1) The two optical devices from top-down are: LD1 which is for transmitting, LD2
which is for receiving. Care should be taken not to connect them in the reverse
order.
5
Board Manual
2) The setting of optical channel synchronous digits is compatible with the SM and
setting is made through the jumper J103. The jumper is left open in the default
condition.
6
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/OTU
STM-1 Optic Interface Board for ESM CB01OTU
1 Overview
The CB01OTU provides standard Synchronous Transfer Mode-1 (STM-1) interface

for the ESM, so that the interconnection between the ESM and transmission
equipment is simplified, the capacity of the channels between the AM/CM and the
ESM is increased, the maintainability and scalability of the equipment is enhanced,
and the transmission cost is saved.
2 Main Functions
I. Board functions
1) Accomplishes the interconnection between the ESM and the AM, and provides a
standard STM-1 optical interface.
2) Provides the speech channel transmission path between the ESM and the
AM/CM.
4) Provides such conversion and processing as framing, deframing, mapping,
overhead between the HW signal (equal to 63 E1 time slots) of the XNET board
and the STM-1 signal, and implements self-loop for easy maintenance.
5) Abstracts the line clock of the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) to provide
synchronization reference for the switch. The synchronization reference is
provided to the network board directly and to the clock frame through the cable
from behind the backplane. The latter case is applied in the standalone office or
when the customer requests a higher-level clock.
6) Supports the active-standby working mode and load-sharing mode.
II. Main features
1) Board devices are highly integrated.

2) Sufficient maintenance information can be reported from the board, facilitating
easy location of the system faults.
The CB01OTU provides a standard STM-1 optical interface.
1
Board Manual
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB01OTU.
2 Mbit/s HW 16 Mbit/s HW
155.52 Mbit/s
Photoelectric Aggregate SDH
conversion Tributary Framer
Logic control unit

Control
Backplane interface
Data bus bus
Address bus
Chip selection signal
Read & write signal
Clock unit Communication bus
3.3 V, 2.5 V etc.

Power unit 5V
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB01OTU
SDH: Converts electric signal into standard optical signal through the four
components, namely, framer, tributary, aggregate and photoelectric conversion.
Logic control unit: Demultiplexes HW signals and HDLC link signal from the received
155.52 Mbit/s code flow, and then sends them to other related boards (including
BNET and LAPMC2).
Clock unit: Abstracts the line clock of the SDH to provide synchronization reference
for the switch.
Power unit: Provides different power supplies for internal parts.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB01OTU.
2
Board Manual
RUN
FAIL
RX
TX
OTU
Figure 2 CB01OTU panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB01OTU indicators
Normal
Indicator Color Meaning Description
Status
ON and OFF every 0.25 seconds: Indicates that the ON and OFF
board is waiting for configuration. every one
ON and OFF every one second: Indicates that the second
Running
RUN Red board is working as configured in the active status. (active) or
indicator
ON all the time: Indicates that the board is working as ON all the
configured in the standby status. time
OFF: Indicates that the board is faulty. (standby)
ON: Indicates that the board or line is faulty.
FAIL Green Fault indicator OFF: Indicates that the board or line is working OFF
normally.
2) The two optical interfaces from top downwards are: RX for receiving, TX: for
transmitting.
4 Layout
The CB01OTU has no jumper or switch.
3
Board Manual
5 Technical Indices
1) The bit error rate is less than 10-9 under normal working conditions.
2) Total power consumption of the board is smaller than 10 W.
6 Attention
The two optical interfaces RX is for receiving and TX is for transmitting. Take care not
to connect them in the reverse order.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/PWC
Secondary Power Board CC05PWC
1 Overview
The CC05PWC is located in the Main control frame or trunk frame of the SM, and
provides the SM with the output voltage of +5 V/20 A.
The CC05PWC uses an RM100 module power supply unit, which is light in weight,
good in appearance and provides assured high level performance.
2 Main Functions
I. Board functions
1) Provides an output voltage of +5 V.

2) Provides status monitoring and generates alarm outputs.
3) Provides the power supply backup function.
II. Main features
1) The board has an independent auxiliary stabilized voltage supply of 12 V, and

provides power supply for the control loop and alarm loop, to ensure reliable and
safe operation of the board.
2) Hot backup is used to isolate the diode, to prevent damages, in case of the current
flowing in the reverse direction due to unexpected occasion from the loading end.
1) It operates on -48 V input.

2) It provides a +5 V output.
3) It outputs alarm signals.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CC05PWC.
1
Board Manual
DC/DC power Over-voltage/under-voltage

Power supply module detection module Power
-48V
supply +5V
supply
input
output
module
Auxiliary power Audio/visible alarm ERR module
supply module signal
module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CC05PWC
Power supply input module: Implements LC network filtering and over-voltage

protection of the input voltage of -48 V.
DC/DC power supply module: It is an RM100 power module, implementing voltage

conversion function.
Over-voltage/under-voltage detection module: Detects the over-voltage/under-voltage

conditions of the output voltage of the power module.
Audible/visible alarm module: Generates audio/visual alarms and alarm signal outputs.
Power supply output module: Provides the voltage output and prevents the output
current flowing in the reverse direction.
Auxiliary power supply module: Provides input power for the audio/visual alarm circuit.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CC05PWC.
2
Board Manual
VIN
VA0
FAIL
PWC
Figure 2 CC05PWC panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CC05PWC indicators

ON when -48 V input is available, and OFF
VIN Red -48V input indicator ON
when there is no -48 V input
+5V A module working
VAO Green ON when normal and OFF when faulty ON
indicator
Fault alarm indicator OFF when normal and ON when faulty
FAIL Yellow OFF

None.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the switches and jumpers on the CC05PWC.
3
Board Manual
XP1
S1
S2
XP3
Figure 3 Switches and jumpers on the CC05PWC
1) Table 2 gives the meanings of the CC05PWC switches.
Table 2 Meanings of the CC05PWC switches
Switches Switch status Meaning Default status

ON Intra-board module output is permitted.
S1 ON
OFF Intra-board module output is prohibited.
ON ALM alarm tone output is permitted.
S2 ON
OFF ALM alarm tone is prohibited.
2) Table 3 gives the meanings of the CC05PWC jumpers.
Table 3 Meanings of the CC05PWC jumpers
Jumper Description Meaning Delivery setting

The jumper device is
1. Set the jumper device across pins 1 & 2 for
used to make the board
alarm box version 02. Jumper across pins 1
XP1 compatible with the
2. Set the jumper device across pins 2 & 3 for and 2
versions of the system
alarm box version 03.
alarm box.
The jumper device is
1. Set the jumper device across pins 1 & 2 when
used to debug +5V
the module is working normally. Jumper across pins 1
XP3 module output
2. Set the jumper device across pins 2 & 3 for and 2
over-voltage/under-volt
output over-voltage/under-voltage debugging.
age.
5 Technical Indices
1) Input voltage range: -40 V ~ 60 V
2) Output voltage: +5/20 A
4
Board Manual
3) Power conversion efficiency: More than 70%
6 Attention
1) If the power board is hot-plugged/unplugged directly into/from the slot in a working
system, there may be some sparking at the PWC slot on the backplane, which can
be ignored, as it is a normal occurrence.
2) It is prohibited to hot-plug/unplug the power board when the switch S1 is in ‘ON’
position. When the power board needs to be replaced in a working environment,
set the switch S1 to ‘OFF’ before plugging-in or unplugging, and later set it to ‘ON’
after it is in position.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/PWS
Secondary Power Board C841PWS
1 Overview
The C841PWS is a secondary power supply board of the AM/CM. It is located in all
the frames to provide the +5 V input power for all the other boards and works in the
N+1 backup mode.
2 Main Functions
The C841PWS comprises the input return circuit, output return circuit, monitoring
module with microprocessor, alarm circuit and environmental monitoring circuit.
I. Board functions
1) It fulfills the secondary power conversion function. It inputs the power of -40 V ~
-60 V and outputs the power of +5 V.
2) When the input/output power supply voltage is abnormal, the board sends out
the audio and visual alarms at 25 Hz.
3) The board provides communication with the ALM board, to test and report the
intra-cabinet environmental temperature, status of the secondary power supply
board and the status of the input -48 V dc power supply. When the board status
is not normal, it will send out audio and visual alarm signals. Simultaneously, it
reports the alarm information to the ALM board and the background.
4) The board provides communication with the QSI board, which reports the
environment temperature inside the interface frame, the status of the
secondary power supply board and various other alarm information to the QSI,
which then sends these alarm information to the background.
5) It provides the temperature reporting function for the SNU board in the
switching network frame.
II. Main features
1) It uses a high power density, ultra thin and highly effective dc/dc converter
power module.
2) It uses the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) technology, advanced software
switches and synchronous rectification technology to improve the efficiency of
conversion and to reduce the power consumption as much as possible.
1
Board Manual
3) The board uses the 2+1 or 1+1 redundant hot standby working mode to supply
power for the system, and the current can be distributed equally among the
secondary power supply boards.
4) It has the voltage and temperature monitoring functions.
1) Provides the communication of a Master node/Slave node differential serial port

with the ALM board.
2) Provides the communication of a Master node/Slave node TTL level serial port
with the QSI board.
3) Provides the equalizing current line interface between the power supply boards.
4) Provides the site alarm signal interface and outputs the high and low resistance
signals through the selection of the RTSW3 jumper switch.
5) Provides the temperature-monitoring interface of the SNU board in the
switching network frame.
6) Provides the power supply interface: input –48 V, output +5 V.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841PWC.
Input
-48V DC/DC Output +5V
protection
converter filter
module
Output voltage
monitoring
Alarm signal
CPU Alarm function
Serial port Serial port processing
selection module
Temperature
monitoring
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841PWS
Input protection module: Comprises circuits, such as the input protection return
circuit, soft start and Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) filter.
DC/DC converter: Converts the -48 V input to +5 V output.
Output filter module: Provides the output voltage filtering and isolation functions.
2
Board Manual
Output voltage monitoring module: Monitors the high and low output voltages and
generates the corresponding alarm signals.
Serial port selection module: Selects the communication serial port to communicate
on the basis of occupied slots.
CPU processing module: Monitors the status of the board and environmental
temperature.
Alarm function module: Sends out the audio and visual alarms in the case of a fault.
Temperature monitoring module: Detects the temperature level.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841PWS.
RUN
FAIL
PWS
Figure 2 C841PWS panel
3
Board Manual
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841PWS indicators

2. Flashes fast: The communication is not established or
abnormal conditions exist.
3. OFF: There is no output from the +5 V power supply.
2. Flashes fast: The board is faulty.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the switches and jumpers on the C841PWS.
Figure 3 Switches and jumpers on the C841PWS
1) Reset switch SW1: This is the hardware reset button.

2) Table 2 gives the meanings of the DIP switches.
4
Board Manual
Table 2 Meanings of the DIP switches
Meaning ON OFF
The output power supply is The output power supply is not
S101 Output power supply switch
available. available.
FAILURE indicator and the audio FAILURE indicator and the audio
S301 Alarm sound switch
alarm sound are enabled. alarm sound are not available.
DS26C32 interface chip DS26C32 interface chip resistance DS26C32 interface chip resistance
SW1
resistance matching matching is accessed. matching is disconnected.
3) Table 3 gives the meanings of the jumper RTSW3.
Table 3 Meaning of the jumper
Meaning Across 1 & 2 Across 2 & 3

Selects the output of the site High resistance signal alarm will be Low resistance signal alarm will be
RTSW3
alarm signal output. output.
4) Table 4 gives the meanings and descriptions of the indicators.
Table 4 Meanings and descriptions of the SMT indicators on the C841PWS

LED1 Green Input voltage indicator ON: The input voltage is normal. ON
LED2 Green Output voltage indicator ON: The output voltage is normal. ON
5 Technical indices
1) The input voltage range of the board is from -40 V to -60 V.
2) The output voltage range of the board is from +4.9 V to +5.2 V, which is subject
to the load. It is +4.9 V when fully loaded and +5.2 V when idle, that is, on no
load.
3) The nominal output power of the board is 300 W.
4) The serial port communication rate is 187.5 kbit/s.
6 Attention
1) The power supply boards should not be inserted in the slots of other boards.
2) The power supply boards shall be configured strictly according to the
specifications in the Configuration Manual.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/CC03PWX
Secondary Power Supply Board CC03PWX
1 Overview
The CC03PWX is located in the subscriber frame of the SM or the Remote Module.
2 Main Functions
In communications systems, the power supply that converts ac to dc is called

primary power supply and the one that converts dc input to dc output is called
secondary power supply. Each subscriber frame has one or two PWXs (usually one
is required).
I. Board functions
1) Provides +5 V output.
2) Provides -5 V output.
3) Provides 75 V ringing current signals.
4) Operates with the -48 V input voltage.
5) Supports power backup.
II. Functional principle
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CC03PWX.

overvoltage
G1 Overvoltage, overcurrent
Input
V IN Ringing
LC filtering RING OUT
-48 V -75 V/0.4 A and overheat protection
G2 VD1
Undervoltage
+5 V/10 A protection +5 V OUT
Auxiliary REM
power +12 V REM G3 VD2
Undervoltage -5 V OUT
-5 V/5 A protection
err
Start circuit
Audio & visual alarm
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CC03PWX
1
Board Manual
The CC03PWX board converts the voltage of – 48 V to 75 V/0.4 A, +5 V/10 A, and
-5 V/5 A respectively, first through the LC network filtering, then the input over-
voltage protection module, finally the independent over-voltage protection module,
overhead protection module, over-current protection module, and under-voltage
protection module. When there is a fault (such as over-voltage, overhead, over-
current, under-voltage), the board reports an alarm through the audio and visual
alarm circuit. The "err" is the interface of the fault alarm signal. VD1 and VD2 are
hot-backup isolation diodes that prevent reverse pouring due to sudden changes at
the load end.
At the moment that the PWX board is switched on, the start circuit imposes a start
level on the REM terminal of each module. When the output of each module
becomes normal, it ensures stable output through the corresponding control loop
self-locking.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CC03PWX.
2
Board Manual
VIN
VAD
VBD
VCD
FAIL
ON
S1
OFF
ON
S2
OFF
PWX
Figure 2 CC03PWX panel
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CC03PWX indicators

1. ON: There is the -48 V input.
VIN Red -48 V input indicator ON
2. OFF: There is no -48 V input.
Ringing current 1. ON: The ringing current output is normal.
VA0 Green working status 2. OFF: The ringing current output is ON
indicator abnormal.
+5V working status 1. ON: +5 V output is normal.
VB0 Green ON
indicator 2. OFF: +5 V output is abnormal.
-5V working status 1. ON: -5 V output is normal.
VC0 Green ON
indicator 2. OFF: -5 V output is abnormal.
1. Flashes: Any one module in the board is
abnormal.
FAIL Yellow Fault status indicator OFF
2. OFF: No module in the board is
abnormal.
3
Board Manual
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the switches and jumpers on the CC03PWX.
F2
S1
F1
S2
F3
Figure 3 Switches and jumpers on the CC03PWX
You can see the switches S1 and S2 on the board panel.
Table 2 Meanings of the switches
Switch Meaning Normal status

S1 Controls the -48 V input ON
S2 Controls the alarm sound ON
The positions of PWX fuses are as shown in Figure 3.
F3: For the -48 V input (5 A)
F2: For ringing output (2 A)
F1: For ringing input (2 A)
5 Technical Indices
Input voltage: -36 – 72 V
4
Board Manual
Types of output voltage: +5 V/10 A, -5 V/5 A
Ringing current: 75 V AC/0.4 A
Power consumption: 30 W
Conversion efficiency of the power board: over 75%
6 Attention
None.
5
Board Manual
Secondary Power Supply Board CC04PWX
1 Overview
The CC04PWX is located in the subscriber frame of the SM or the Remote Module.
It provides +5V/30A power output, -5V/10A power output and 75V/0.4A ringing
current signal source (the ringing current can be increased to 1 A, by replacing the
ringing current module).
2 Main Functions
Each subscriber frame is configured with one or two PWXes (usually one is
configured). The CC04PWX is used for inter-frame power supply backup of the
Switch. Normally, one frame is configured with one PWX or with two under special
requirements. This makes the CC04PWX different from the CC03PWX. Power
supply with hot backup is provided for the subscriber frame loading to facilitate safe
and reliable system operation. Besides, the board detects input over-voltage, output
over-voltage and under-voltage, and automatically equalizes the output current. It
communicates with the background in real time.
I. Board functions
1) Provides +5 V output.
2) Provides -5 V output.
3) Provides 75 V ringing current signals.
II. Main features
1) The board uses an automatic switching circuit with a relay cold/hot status, to
effect ringing current switchover on the backplane of the subscriber frame of
new version, so that it can correctly identify the working status of the relay on
the backplane of the subscriber frame.
2) It automatically coordinates with the backplane of the subscriber frame of both
the old and new versions.
3) It performs automatic detection, flow equalization, and so on.
4) It communicates with the background in real time through the RS-422 or TTL
level interfaces of the board.
1) It operates with the -48 V input voltage.
1
Board Manual
2) It provides +5 V voltage output.
3) It provides -5 V voltage output.
4) It provides 75 V ringing current signal outputs.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CC04PWX.
OUT+5V/30A
GND1
-48VB DC/DC converter GND
GND1 OUT-5V/10A
-48VB DC/DC converter GND
GND1 RNG
-48VA DC/AC converter GND1
Fault detection
Main
control
module
CM
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CC04PWX
DC/DC converter module: Provides output voltages of +5 V and -5 V to the

backplane of the subscriber frame through the isolation diode, thus providing the
subscriber line board with the voltage of ±5 V.
DC/AC converter module: Outputs the AC ringing current of 75 V.
Main control module: It consists of a single-chip microcomputer and corresponding

detection and control circuits. It dynamically monitors the operation of intra-board
modules and the input voltage of -48 V, and sends present status of the board to the
background.
Fault detection module: Responsible for detecting the status of the output power
from the board.
Communication module: Communicates with the Host through the Master

node/Slave-node serial port.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CC04PWX.
2
Board Manual
VIN
RUN
VAD
VBD
VCD
FAIL
ON
POWER
OFF
ON
ALM
OFF
PWX
Figure 2 CC04PWX panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CC04PWX indicators

1. Flashes slowly: The communication is
Circuit board running normal.
status indicator 2. Flashes fast: The communication is
abnormal.
Ringing current 1. ON: The ringing current output is normal.
VA0 Green working status 2. OFF: The ringing current output is ON
indicator abnormal.
+5V working status 1. ON: +5 V output is normal.
VB0 Green ON
indicator 2. OFF: +5 V output is abnormal.
-5V working status 1. ON: -5 V output is normal.
VC0 Green ON
indicator 2. OFF: -5 V output is abnormal.
1. Flashes: Any one module in the board is
abnormal.
FAIL Yellow Fault status indicator OFF
2. OFF: No module in the board is
abnormal.

Table 2 gives the meanings and descriptions of the DIP switches on the CC04PWX
panel.
3
Board Manual
Table 2 Meanings and descriptions of the DIP switches on the CC04PWX panel
Toggle switch set Description Meaning Normal status

1. ON: Normal output of respective modules
Control switch of
inside the board is permitted.
POWER respective modules ON
2. OFF: Output of respective modules inside
inside the board
the board is prohibited.
1. ON: Both audio and visual alarms are
enabled at the same time, when a fault
Audio/visual alarm
ALM occurs. ON
conversion switch
2. OFF: Audio alarm is disabled and only
visual alarm is permitted.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the switches and jumpers on the CC04PWX.
JPA1 CC04PWX
JPB1
ON
1 2
S101
JP402V
SW402 1 2 3
S401
SW401
Figure 3 Switches and jumpers on the CC04PWX
1) Reset switch SW401: It is used to reset the CPU inside the circuit board.
2) DIP switch SW402
One part of the DIP switch, that is, SW402-1, is used to switch over the -24 V input
voltage status monitoring, and the other part, that is, SW402-2, is used to control the
power supply used by the intra-board auxiliary loop, as given in Table 3.
4
Board Manual
Table 3 Meanings and description of the SW402
Toggle switch set Description Meaning Normal status

Used to switch 1. ON: The board is set to detect the working ON when the
-24 V input status of the -24 V voltage input. system has -24 V
SW402-1
voltage status 2. OFF: The board is set not to detect the input supply,
monitoring working status of -24 V voltage input. otherwise OFF
Used to control 1. ON: The auxiliary power supply controlling
the power supply the loop in the board is connected.
SW402-2 used for the intra- 2. OFF: The auxiliary power supply ON
board auxiliary controlling the loop in the board is
loop disconnected.
3) Jumper JP402
Table 4 gives the meaning and description of the CC04PWX jumper.
Table 4 CC04PWX jumper
Jumper Description Meaning Delivery setting

The jumper device that should 1. Set the jumper across pins 1 & 2 for the
be used to make the board alarm box of the version 02. Connect pins 1 and
JP402
compatible with the alarm 2. Set the jumper across pins 2 & 3 for the 2
box. alarm box of the version 03.
4) NOD monitoring serial port

The NOD communication serial port is connected to the subscriber backplane
through pins 61 and 62 of JPB1, and the respective signals are TXD1 and RXD1.
5 Technical Indices
1) The input voltage is from -40 V to -72 V.
2) The output voltages are +5 V/30 A and -5 V/10 A.
3) The ringing current is 75 V ac/400 mA.
4) The power board conversion efficiency is more than 70%.
6 Attention
The board has a jumper to select between the RS422 and TSS communication
mode. If there is no special requirement, TSS communication mode is the default
selection. Therefore, the jumper at the TSS side is kept shorted at the time of
delivery.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/H301PWX
Power X DC/DC Convertor H301PWX
1 Overview
The H301PWX is a kind of secondary power supply board, which is developed

based on the CC04PWX. It has such new functions as self-reset after self-locked
due to over-voltage of module output, auto-detection and current equalization.
One H301PWX is inserted in each RSP frame. Power supply hot backup between
different subscriber frames is adopted to ensure security and reliability of the system.
2 Main Functions
The H301PWX has such functions as input over-voltage detection, output over-
/under-voltage detection and output current auto-equalization. It communicates with
the BAM in real time.
I. Board functions
1) Provides +5 V power supply.

2) Provides -5 V power supply.
3) Provides a ringing current signal.
II. Main features
1) The relay cold/hot auto-conversion circuit is employed on the backplane of the

new subscriber frame to switch over ringing current, enabling the board to
accurately identify the working status of the relay on the backplane of the
subscriber frame.
2) It automatically cooperates with the backplane of the subscriber frame in either
old or new versions.
3) It provides auto-detection and current equalization functions.
4) It communicates with the BAM in real time through the RS-422 or TTL level
interface.
1) Inputs a -48 V power supply signal.

2) Outputs a +5 V power supply signal.
3) Outputs a -5 V power supply signal.
4) Outputs a ringing current signal.
1
Board Manual
Figure 1 shows the function principle of the H301PWX.
OUT+5V/30A
GND1
-48VB Ring current module GND
GND1 OUT-5V/10A
Ring current module GND
-48VB
GND1 RNG
DC/AC converter
-48VA module GND1
Fault detection
module
MPU
CM
Figure 1 Functional principle of the H301PWX
2
Board Manual
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the H301PWX.
VIN
RUN
VAD
VBD
VCD
FAIL
ON
POWER
OFF
ON
ALM
OFF
PWX
Figure 2 H301PWX panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the H301PWX indicators

Indicates the
1. Flashes slowly: The board is working
running status
RUN Red normally. Flashes slowly
of the circuit
2. Flashes fast: The board is faulty.
board
Indicates the
running status 1. ON: Ringing current is outputted normally.
VA0 Green ON
of the ringing 2. OFF: Ringing current output has fault.
current
Indicates the
running status 1. ON: +5 V power supply output is normal.
VB0 Green ON
of +5V power 2. OFF: +5 V power supply output is abnormal.
supply
3
Board Manual
Indicates the
running status 1. ON: -5 V power supply output is normal.
VC0 Green ON
of -5V power 2. OFF: -5 V power supply output is abnormal.
supply
1. Flash: A module of the board is not running
Indicates normally.
FAIL Yellow OFF
running fault 2. OFF: All modules of the board are running
normally.
2) DIP switches
Table 2 Meanings and descriptions of the H301PWX DIP switches
DIP Switch Description Meaning Normal status

1. ON: The modules of the board can output normally.
Module control
POWER 2. OFF: The modules of the board are prohibited from ON
switch
outputting.
Audio/visual 1. ON: Both audio alarm and visual alarm are activated if
alarm a fault occurs.
ALM ON
conversion 2. OFF: Audio alarm is disabled, and only visual alarm is
switch enabled.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the H301PWX.
JPA1 CC04PWX
JPB1
ON
1 2
S101
JP402V
SW402 1 2 3
S401
SW401
Figure 3 Layout of the H301PWX
a) Reset switch SW401: It is used to reset the CPU in the circuit board.
4
Board Manual
b) DIP switch SW402
Table 3 Meanings of the DIP switch SW402
Original
DIP Switch Description
setting
Indicator RUN: ON-flash, OFF-on all the time. It is set to
SW402-1 OFF
OFF when cooperating with the CC03PWX.
Used to monitor the state of switching -24 V input If the system
voltage. has -24 V
ON: indicates to detect the status of -24 V input voltage voltage, it is set
SW402-2
by the H301PWX. to ON;
OFF: indicates not to detect the status of -24 V input otherwise, it is
voltage by the H301PWX. set to OFF.
ON: Compatible with H301HEB and H301HCB.
SW402-3 OFF: Compatible with H301HFB, H301HGB, H301HIB OFF
and CB01SLB.
ON: DC/DC module locked can be reset.
SW402-4 ON
OFF: DC/DC module locked cannot be reset.
3) Jumper JP402V
By default, Pins 1 and 2 are connected.
5 Technical Indices
1) Range of input voltage: -40 V~-72 V
2) Output voltage: +5 V/30 A; -5 V/10 A
3) Ringing current: 75 VAC/1 A
4) Conversion efficiency of the circuit board: over 70%
6 Attention
None.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/QSI
High-Speed System Interface Board C841QSI
1 Overview
The C841QSI is located in the line interface frame of the AM/CM, and is the high-
speed interface board connecting the line interface frame and the switching network
frame. It processes the speech channels and links on various interface boards in the
line interface frame in a centralized manner, accomplishes the connection with
393.2 Mbit/s high-speed optical signals of the CNET, and the connection with the
CCM through the links.
2 Main Functions
The QSI justifies the 32 data of 16.384 Mbit/s received by interface boards in the
line interface frame, transfers them into two 393.2 Mbit/s high-speed optical fibers
and sends them to the CNET. Simultaneously, it converges the link data from the
interface boards and transmits them to the CCM.
In the receive direction, it justifies the high-speed signals coming from the CNET,
and sends them to the interface boards in the frame. Simultaneously, it distributes
the link data from the CCM to the interface boards in the frame. In addition, the QSI
takes care of reporting the status information of all the boards in the frame to the
background, and in turn receives the background configuration data.
I. Board functions
1) Justifies the speech channels, and performs the photo-electrical conversion

function.
2) Provides the plane isolation function of the HDLC channel.
3) Transfers the Channel Associated Signaling of the four trunk interface boards.
4) Provides the Master/Slave node communication through the serial ports of the
interface boards.
5) Reports all the status information of the interface frame, and distributes its
configuration data.
6) Drives the receiving and distribution of the Clock signals of the system.
7) The active board monitors the status of the standby board.
II. Main features
function.
1
Board Manual
2) The photo-electrical conversion module uses a pinch plate.
3) Along with the SNU board in the switching network frame, it accomplishes the
switchover of the optical paths.
4) It performs the Clock fault test and automatic switchover between the active
and standby Clock.
1) Provides high-speed optical signals of 393.2 Mbit/s to the CNET frame.

2) Provides eight HDLC link HWs of 2.048 Mbit/s to each of the two planes of the
CCM frame.
3) Provides eight system Clocks of 16.384 MHz and four frame signals of 8 kHz to
the interface boards.
4) Provides thirty-two speech channel HWs of 16.384 Mbit/s to the interface
boards.
5) Provides sixteen links of 2.048 Mbit/s to the interface boards.
6) Provides two serial ports to fulfill the Master/Slave node communication with
the interface boards (each half of the frame has one serial port).
7) Provides a serial port as the emergency serial port.
8) Receives two timing signals from the Clock frame.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841QSI.
C
32*16 Mbit/s 2*393 Mbit/s
32*16 Mbit/s processing 32*16 Mbit/s Two HOI pinch plates N
E
T
Interface board
16*2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s tandem 8*2 Mbit/s C

C
M
HDLC receiving/
transmitting Clock
processing C
BUS K
M
two serial ports Emergency serial port
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841QSI
32*16 Mbit/s processing module: Receives the 16.384 Mbit/s signals of the interface
boards, and receives the optical interface data from the cache.
2
Board Manual
Two HOI pinch plates: Converts the 16 electrical signals of 16.384 Mbit/s and optical
signals of 393.2 Mbit/s.
2 Mbit/s tandem module: Switches the time slots of the HDLC link.
HDLC receiving/transmitting module: Processes the receiving/transmitting of the

HDLC links.
Clock processing module: Provides the various Clocks needed by the local board
and the interface boards.
CPU processing module: Performs the board initialization control, status control and
configuration data distribution functions.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841QSI.
RUN
FALL
QSI
Figure 2 C841QSI panel
1) Board indicators
3
Board Manual
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841QSI indicators

1. Flashes at an interval of one second: The board is
working normally.
Indicates the
2. Flashes at an interval of 0.5 second: The board Flashes at an
running status
RUN Red communication is faulty. interval of one
and program
3. Flashes fast: The board is being loaded. second
loading
4. ON: The board is working in the standby mode.
Running fault 1. ON: The board is not running normally.
FAIL Green OFF
indicator 2. OFF: The board is running normally.
There are two pairs of optical interfaces on the front panel of the QSI. For the upper
& lower pairs of optical interfaces, the top one is for receiving and the lower one is
for transmitting.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the switches on the C841QSI.
HOI1
ON
s2
ON
1 2 3 4 P1
S1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234
S1
HOI2 S3
ON clk0
s2 clk1
ON 1 2 3 4 work
ON
S1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S4
Figure 3 DIP switches on the C841QSI
1) Reset switch and DIP switches

a) Reset switch S3: It is the hardware reset button.
b) Table 2 gives the meanings of the DIP switch S4.
4
Board Manual

S4.1 FPGA loading switch Cable loading PROM loading OFF
S4.2 OFF
S4.3 Reserved OFF
S4.4 OFF
c) Table 3 gives the meanings of the DIP switch S1.
Bit Meaning ON OFF

S1.1 Debugging the serial port printing status Print enabled Print disabled
S1.2 XRAY debugging status Normal run XRAY debugging
S1.3
Reserved
S1.4
Table 4 Meanings and descriptions of the SMT indicators on the C841QSI

CLK0 Red Clock 0 indicator ON: The board currently works at 0# Clock.
CLK1 Red Clock 1 indicator ON: The board currently works at 1# Clock.
ON: The board is active.
WORK Red Active/Standby indicator
OFF: The board is standby.
Debugging serial port (P1): It is an RS232 serial port, for debugging and printing.
The software running process and results can be observed, through the super
terminal.
On the HOI pinch plate, DIP switches S1 and S2 are positioned but no jumper
settings are required at site.
Table 5 gives the meanings of the DIP switch S2 on HOI.
Table 5 Meanings of the DIP switch S2 on the HOI
Bit Meaning ON OFF

S2.1
Reserved
S2.2
S2.3 Self-loop selection Optical interface forbids self-loop. Optical interface permits self-loop.
Test Clock
S2.4 Phase-locked Clock Direct Test Clock
selection
Table 6 gives the meanings of the default status of the DIP switch S1 on the HOI
board.
5
Board Manual
Table 6 Default status of the DIP switch S1 on the HOI board
Bit Meaning Default status

S1.1 ECHLKSEL ON
S1.2 D1V1 OFF
S1.3 MDFSEL ON
S1.4 D1V0 ON
S1.5 M2OSEL OFF
S1.6 TCLKSEL ON
S1.7 FLAGSEL ON
S1.8 EQEN ON
5 Technical Indices
1) It supports the connection of 32 speech channel signals of 16.384 Mbit/s to the
CNET frame.
2) It provides eight link HWs of 2.048 Mbit/s to the CCM frame.
3) The serial port communication rate is 187 kbit/s, asynchronous.
4) Optical interface working wavelength: 850 nm or 1310 nm
5) Optic fiber type: 62.5/125 µm multimode optic fiber
6) Optic fiber connector: SC model
7) Maximum optic fiber length: 500 m
8) Output optical power: -19.5 ~ -14 dBm
9) Optical interface receive sensitivity: -29 dBm
10) Optical interface receive saturation power: -14 dBm
11) Clock jitter of the optical interface: ≤ 200 ppm
12) CPU type is AMD386 and the master working frequency is 66 MHz.
15) Power consumption: About 20 W, out of which each HOI board consumes 7 W.
6 Attention
1) Each interface frame contains a fixed number of two QSIs (active and standby).
2) Each interface frame houses a fixed number of four PCS internal optic fibers to
connect the CNET frame.
3) The QSIs are fixed in Slots 11 and 13.
6
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/RBC
40M Remote Optical Interface Board C841RBC
1 Overview
The C841RBC is located in the line interface frame of the AM/CM, which is
interconnected to the OLE at the SM side to provide the communication between
the SM and the AM/CM.
Note:
The RBC uses the single mode laser so that it enables longer transmission distances. The board with
the multi-mode laser on it is called an OBC. The OBC and RBC are the same at the PCB level, but are
different in optical modules.
2 Main Functions
The RBC receives two 40.96 Mbit/s code streams sent by the SM over the optic
fibers. After decoding and justification, it separates the four 16 Mbit/s HWs and two 2
Mbit/s HDLC signals. In the reverse direction, the RBC multiplexes the four
16 Mbit/s HWs and two 2 Mbit/s HDLC signals, and adds the scrambling code,
frame alignment code, signaling code, comparison code and frame header check
code. It also justifies and multiplexes these codes into two 40.96 Mbit/s code
streams, and sends them to the SM through the optical modules and optical fibers.
I. Board functions
1) Transmits the speech channel information between the AM/CM and the SM.
2) Transmits the HDLC link signals between the AM/CM and the SM.
3) Communicates with the QSI through the serial ports.
4) Provides the timing signals for the SM.
5) Monitors three statuses of the optical channel, namely, out of step, code error
and remote alarm, by using the optical channel monitoring function, which is
based on the definition of “8B1C1H” code pattern.
6) Loops back directly the 40.96 Mbit/s output code streams or the 16 Mbit/s code
stream of the QSI, by using the "local self-loop” function.
1
Board Manual
II. Main features
function.
2) The FPGA logic provides major board functions.
3) The code stream format at the optical interface is the “8B1C1H”code pattern.
4) It uses the single mode laser and single mode optic fiber for distant
communication.
1) Provides two pairs of 40.96 Mbit/s optical signals to connect the SM.
2) Provides four speech channel HWs of 16.384 Mbit/s to the QSI.
3) Provides two link HWs of 2.048 Mbit/s to the QSI.
4) Provides one serial port to achieve the Master/Slave node communication with
the QSI.
5) Provides a differential serial port as the emergency serial port.
6) Receives the Clock signals of 16 MHz and frame signals of 8 kHz sent by the
QSI.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841RBC.
Q
Optical
S interface Optoelectric Signal HW, link, clock
conversion processing S
M module module
I
Clock processing
module
Compelled signal
Active/standby
switchover module
Comm port Emergency serial port

CPU processign module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841RBC
Optoelectric conversion module: Converts the two optical signals of 40.96 Mbit/s to
electrical signals.
Signal processing module: Extracts the HW signals and link signals from the
40.96 Mbit/s signals and in the reverse direction multiplexes the HW signals and link
signals into the 40.96 Mbit/s signals. It also monitors the status of out of step, code
error and remote alarm of the optical channel and has the frame adjustment function.
2
Board Manual
Clock processing module: Extracts the 40.96 Mbit/s Clock signals form the optical
interface and generates the Clock signals to be sent through the optical interface.
Active/standby switchover module: Provides the board status monitoring and

CPU processing module: Handles the board initialization control and status
monitoring functions.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841RBC.
RUN
FAIL
RBC
Figure 2 C841RBC panel
1) Board indicators
3
Board Manual
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841RBC indicators

RUN status 2. ON: The board is in the standby status.
indicator 3. Flashes fast: The Clock is faulty.
1. OFF: Both optic fibers of the board are working normally.
Gree Fault
FAIL 2. ON: Code error, out of step, remote alarm or ‘no light’ occurs. OFF
n indicator
3. Flashes fast: The Clock is faulty.
Two pairs of optical interfaces are available on the RBC front panel. For both the
upper and lower pair of optical interfaces, the top one is for receiving and the bottom
one is for transmitting.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the switches on the C841RBC.
ON S1
S2
1 2 3 4
ON
S3
1 2 3 4
Figure 3 Switches on the C841RBC


S2.1 FPGA loading switch PROM loading mode Cable loading mode ON
4
Board Manual
Type of the switch housing the board
S2.2 SM module Reserved OFF
corresponding to X - optic channel
Type of the switch housing the board
S2.3 SM module Reserved OFF
corresponding to Y- optic channel
S2.4 Type of the corresponding board OPT OLE OFF
3) DIP switch S3
It is reserved for future use.
5 Technical Indices
1) Optical interface link rate: 40.96 Mbit/s
2) Each optical channel provides two HWs of 16.384 Mbit/s (512 timeslots) and
one 2.048 Mbit/s HW (HDLC signaling).
3) Serial port communication rate: 187.5 kbit/s, asynchronous
4) Transmission signal code: Huawei ‘8B1C1H’
5) Transmission parameters at the optical interface are given below.
Maximum distance: 50 km
Wavelength: 1310 nm (1261 nm ~ 1360 nm)
Mean transmit optical power: -8 dBm ~ -15 dBm
Receive sensitivity: < -34 dBm
Receive saturated optical power: > -8 dBm

8) Power consumption: about 20 W
6 Attention
1) When connected at the remote end to the C803OLE, the S2 should be set in
the following manner.
S2.1 = ON;
S2.2 = OFF (the jumper switch J103 on the OLE is closed);
S2.3 = OFF (the jumper switch J103 on the OLE is closed);
S2.4 = OFF;
2) When connected at the remote end to the C803OLE, the S2 should be set in
the following manner.
S2.1 = ON;
5
Board Manual
S2.2 = ON (the jumper switch J2 on the OLE is set at ‘B’);
S2.3 = ON (the jumper switch J2 on the OLE is set at ‘B’);
S2.4 = OFF;
3) The C841RBC cannot work normally unless the DIP switch S3 is set in the
following manner.
S3.1 = OFF;
S3.2 = OFF;
S3.3 = ON;
S3.4 = ON.
6
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/RSA
RSA Control Board C806RSA
1 Overview
The RSA Control Board (RSA stands for Remote Subscriber Access) is located in the
subscriber frame of the Remote Module. It acts as the protocol processing board for
remote subscribers or the Main control unit of the remote subscriber frame. The RSA is
logically equivalent to the cable distribution from the NOD, NET of the SM to the DRV.
The only difference is that the subscriber frame is moved to the subscriber end that is
far away from the switch, to solve the subscriber’s access problem. This meets ITU-T
Recommendation G.703. The C6806RSA and the RDT of the switch are connected
through E1 interfaces.
2 Main Functions
The C806RSA performs interface conversion from E1 links in the functional frame to
differential HWs, to control the equipment in the subscriber frame and communicate
with the upper level equipment. It supports the mutual aid function between serial port
and Clock with the two boards configured.
I. Board functions
1) Switches voice channel HWs.

2) Transfers the information format.
3) Provides signal tone resources.
4) Extracts Clock signals.
II. Main features
1) Supports 30B+D time slots.

2) Supports serial port and Clock mutual-aid function.
3) Supports as many as eight environmental variable interfaces with alarm
indicators.
1) Provides one differential HW for the equipment in the functional frame.

2) Provides one 2 MHz differential Clock signal for the functional frame.
3) Provides one 8 kHz differential frame synchronization signal.
4) Provides one E1 interface to connect with the upper level equipment.
5) Provides one master/slave node serial port.
1
Board Manual
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C806RSA.
Main control Serial port

HDLC communication communication
module module module DRV
Bus
Switching network
Signal tone module
module E1 interface module E1
Clock processing
CLK DRV
module
DRV
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C806RSA
HDLC communication module: It packets messages collected by the Remote Module,

and sends them to the TS 16 of the E1 voice channel through the HDLC
Communication Module. All the Host commands of the upper-level Switching Module
are sent to the C806RSA in the HDLC mode through the TS16 of the subscriber HW.
After receiving the data packets, the C806RSA sends the commands to respective
interface boards through the serial port.
Main control module: It provides the board initialization and performs the conversion
from master/slave communication protocol to the link-layer protocol.
Serial port communication module: It scans the circuit board in the subscriber frame
through the master/slave node serial port, to collect messages to be reported to the
Host of respective boards.
Signal tone module: It generates signal tones for the subscriber board of the Remote
Module.
Switching network module: It performs the switching between link HWs, signal tone
HWs and voice channel time slots.
E1 interface module: It accomplishes the communication at the physical layer with the
upper-level trunk board.
Clock processing module: It extracts Clock signals on E1 lines, and provides the
system Clock for the Remote Module.
2
Board Manual
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C806RSA.
RU N
CK 0
CK 1
LOSC
LOSF
ALMY
ALMB
SELF
ALM1
ALM2
ALM3
ALM4
ALM5
ALM6
ALM7
ALM8
RSA
Figure 2 C806RSA panel
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C806RSA indicators

Flashes fast: Indicating that the circuit
board is not working normally.
RUN Red Running status indicator Flashes slowly
Flashes slowly: Indicating that the
circuit board is working normally.
Active/Standby status ON: The board is active.
CK0 Green Uncertain
indicator OFF: The board is standby.
ON: The board Clock is active.
CK1 Green Clock indicator Uncertain
OFF: The board Clock is standby.
ON: Indicating that carrier loss is
Carrier ‘out of step’
LOSC Green detected. OFF
indicator
OFF: Indicating normal working
ON: Indicating that "Out of frame" has
LOSF Green ‘Out of frame’ indicator been detected. OFF
ON: Indicating there is an E1 remote
ALMY Green ‘Yellow’ alarm indicator alarm. OFF
ON: Indicating there is an E1 remote
ALMB Green ‘Blue’ alarm indicator alarm. OFF
3
Board Manual
ON: The board is in the self-test status.
SELF Green Self-test indicator OFF
OFF: The board is in the normal status.
ON: Indicating that a specific alarm
occurs.
ALM1~8 Green Alarm indicator OFF
OFF: The corresponding environment
is normal.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the switches on the C806RSA.
C 806R S A
ON
S5
ON ON
S2 S3
Figure 3 Switches on the C806RSA
1) Reset switch (SW1): It is used to reset the circuit board.

2) Table 2 gives the meanings of the combinations of the DIP switches S2 and S3.
Table 2 Meanings of the settings of the DIP switches S2 and S3
DIP switch setting

Meaning
S2-1 S3-1
ON OFF Selects the matching impedance of the 75 ohm coaxial cable
OFF ON Selects the matching impedance of the 120 ohm twisted pair
3) DIP switch S5: S5-1 is set as ‘ON’ in factory.
4
Board Manual
5 Technical Indices
1) E1 interface indices conform to the ITU-T recommendations G.703, G.704, G.706
and G.823.
2) Static power consumption of the circuit board is about 4.5 W.
6 Attention
1) The C806RSA can be used only on the RSB backplane. Each RSB frame is
configured with one or two boards, which are to be inserted only in Slot 11 and/or
Slot 13.
2) The C806RSA supports two matching impedance modes, namely, 75 ohm and
120 ohm. The 75 ohm is the default setting. The mode can be selected by setting
the DIP switch on the board.
3) The C806RSA can be directly interconnected with the trunks but only within a
distance of 500 meters. It can also be interconnected with the trunks, which is
transmitted over PDH or SDH.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/H301RSP
Remote Subscriber Processing Board H301RSP
1 Overview
The H301RSP is located in the remote subscriber frame of the C&C08 Switching
System. It provides a service-bearing channel for remote modules, and manages the
subscriber boards in the frame. The H301RSP is the main control unit in the RSP
subscriber frame, and each frame has two boards that work in the load sharing mode.
Note:
The H301RSPA is derived from the H301RSP and provides one E1 interface, with functions equivalent
to an RSA.
2 Main Functions
Through E1 or a differential HW interface, the H301RSP functions to communicate

with the upper-level equipment, and control equipment in the functional frame to
converge the TTL HWs in the frame to E1 links or differential HWs. Under the control
of the upper-level equipment, the board fulfills changes in the convergence ratio such
as 1:1, 1:2 and 1:4.
I. Board functions
Switches between speech channel HWs.

Controls HDLC communication.
Extracts Clock signals.
Controls serial port communication.
Converts Master/Slave communication protocols to the Link-layer protocol.
II. Main features
1) Provides a maximum of four standard E1 interfaces as Service channels.

Provides no signal tone, which is provided by the upper-level equipment.
Adjusts the convergence ratio of the speech channel.
1) Provides four E1 interfaces and four differential HW interfaces externally.
1
Board Manual
2) Provides eight 2 Mbit/s HWs of TTL level for the equipment in the functional
frame.
3) Provides one 2 MHz Clock signal for the functional frame.
4) Provides one 8 kHz frame synchronization signal.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the H301RSP.
HDLC communication Main control Serial port communi- ASL

module module -cation module
BUS
ASL
Clock processing Switching network E1 interface
module module E1
module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the H301RSP
HDLC communication module: The H301RSP packs the messages collected by the
remote module, and sends them to the TS16 of the E1 speech channel through the
HDLC communication module. All the Host commands of the upper-level switching
module are sent to the RSP in the HDLC mode through the TS16 of the subscriber
HW. After receiving data packets, the H301RSP sends the commands to the
respective interface board through the serial port.
Main control module: It provides the board initialization and converts the Master/Slave
communication protocol to the Link-layer protocol.
Serial port communication module: It scans the circuit boards in the subscriber frame
through the master/slave node serial port, to collect messages that are to be reported
to the Host of respective boards.
Clock processing module: It extracts the Clock signals on the E1 line, and provides
the system Clock for the remote module.
Switching network module: It performs the switching between link HWs, signal tone
HWs and speech channel HW time slots.
E1 interface module: It accomplishes the communication at the physical layer with the
upper-level trunk board.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the H301RSP.
2
Board Manual
RUN
AIO
CLK
LNK
LNK
EI 1
EI 2
EI 3
EI 4
RSP
Figure 2 H301RSP panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings of the H301RSP indicators

1. Flashes fast: The board is working abnormally.
RUN Red Indicator Flashes fast
1. ON: Mutual-aid exists between the board and
Mutual-aid
AID Green the opposite one. OFF
indicator
2. OFF: There is no mutual-aid.
1. ON: The board provides the system Clock.
Active Clock
CLK Green 2. OFF: The board does not provide the system Uncertain
indicator
Clock.
1. ON: The board communicates with the
Communication
upper-level equipment normally.
LINK1 Green link status ON
2. OFF: The board communicates with the
indicator
upper-level equipment abnormally.
LINK2 Green Standby Standby OFF
E1 status 1. ON: The link is abnormal.
E11~E14 Green OFF
indicator 2. OFF: The link is normal.
2) Reset switch SG2

It is used to reset the circuit board.
3
Board Manual
3) Debugging serial port JZ4
It is an RS-232 serial port with RJ45 header, and is only used to debug.
4) Monitoring serial port JZ2
It is an RS-232 serial port with RJ45 header, being the front outlet interface for the
environment and power supply monitoring.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the switches and jumpers on the H301RSP.
H301RSP
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
JN 3JN 1JN 4JN 2

ON
ON
UA5 UC5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
SH1
H1
SG 2
ON
1 2 3 4
SG 1
JZ4
JF1 SG 3 JZ2
JF2
JF3
JZ5
Figure 3 Switches and jumpers on the H301RSP
1) DIP switch SG1

It is used to define the working mode of the board.
Table 2 gives the meanings of the DIP switch SG1.
Table 2 Meanings of the DIP switch SG1
DIP switch SG1

Status description
1 2 3 4
ON OFF OFF OFF Remote mode. RSA module is downloaded.
ON ON OFF OFF Quasi-near-end mode. RSA module is downloaded.
OFF ON OFF OFF Remote mode, and in normal service
OFF ON OFF OFF Quasi-near-end mode, and in normal service
OFF OFF ON OFF Near-end mode, and in normal service
OFF OFF OFF ON Remote mode, and local maintenance
OFF ON OFF ON Quasi-near-end mode, and local maintenance
4
Board Manual
2) DIP switch SG3
SG3 is used to define the number of E1s and external impedance of the board in the
remote mode. Table 3 gives the meanings of SG3.
Table 3 Settings of the DIP switch SG3
DIP switch SG3

Status description
1 2 3 4
OFF OFF OFF X Eight E1s
ON OFF OFF X Four E1s
OFF ON OFF X Two E1s
OFF OFF ON OFF One E1
ON ON ON X No E1
X X X ON 120 ohm
X X X OFF 75 ohm
3) SH1, UC5 and UA5

The external impedance of E1 can be set only with the help of the three DIP switches,
namely, SH1, UC5 and UA5, as shown in Table 4.
Table 4 Setting of impedance matching
Matching impedance Setting of SH1 Setting of UC5 Setting of UA5

75 All ON All ON All ON
120 All OFF All OFF All OFF
4) Setting of the serial port for different working modes

The working modes of the serial port are different when the H301RSP works in the
near-end mode, remote mode and quasi-near-end mode respectively. Its working
mode is set by the jumpers JN1-JN4. Selection of JN1-JN4 is not effective unless they
are used along with the DIP switch SG1 on the board panel. The setting method is
shown in Table 5.
Table 5 Setting of the jumpers on the H301RSP
Jumper Function Meaning Setting at Delivery

JN1
Short-circuit 2 and 3: Remote mode is selected.
JN2 Jumper switch for
Short-circuit 1 and 2: Quasi-near-end mode is Short-circuit 2 and 3
JN3 mode selection
selected.
JN4
JF1
JF2
Reserved for future use
JF3
JZ5
5
Board Manual
5 Technical Indices
1) E1 interface indices conform to ITU-T recommendations G.703, G.704, G.706
and G.823.
2) The working voltage of both the board and all devices on it is +5 V.
3) Four types of external interfaces are available:
z E1 interface: The electrical characteristics conform to ITU-T Recommendation
G.703.
z RS 232 serial port: RS 232 level
z Differential interface: RS 422 level
z TTL interface
4) Static power consumption of the board: 4.0 W
6 Attention
1) E1 interface and the differential HW interface should not be used at the same
time.
2) The impedance of the four E1 interfaces can only be either 120 ohm or 75 ohm at
a time.
3) The setting should be selected according to the number of E1s used.
4) With the system running, working on jumpers and DIP switches on the board is
forbidden as it may damage the board (in other words, the board should be
unplugged from the slot before any change is effected on it).
5) During local maintenance, assume that the fault is located, and at this particular
time, perform a loop back on the E1 link, then the corresponding E1 indicator on
the board will be OFF.
6) Before using this board, first make sure of its application, working mode, the
necessary number of E1s required and the impedance matching. After this,
specify the positions of the DIP switches and jumpers on the board. Local
maintenance is recommended before data configuration, to ensure the
correctness of the H301RSP hardware.
6
Board Manual
Remote Subscriber Processing Board H302RSP
1 Overview
The H302RSP is located in the remote subscriber frame of the C&C08 Switching
System, providing traffic bearer channels for remote modules and managing the
subscriber boards in the subscriber frame. As the main processing unit of the RSP
frame, two H302RSPs can be configured in each frame, working in the load sharing
mode.
Caution:
Based on the H302RSP, the H302RSPA is developed, which provides one E1 interface.
2 Main Functions
The H302RSP functions in communicating with the upper-level equipment and

controlling the equipment through E1 or differential HW interface, and converging
TTL HWs into E1 links or differential HWs. Under the control of the upper-level
equipment, the H302RSP adjusts such convergence ratios as 1:1, 1:2 or 1:4.
I. Board functions
1) Switches voice channel HWs.

2) Controls HDLC communication.
3) Abstracts clock signal.
4) Controls serial port communication.
5) Converts between the master/slave communication protocol and LAPB protocol.
II. Main features
1) Provides a maximum of four standard E1 interfaces as traffic channels.

2) Provides no signal tone resource, instead, which is provided by the upper-level
equipment.
3) Adjusts the channel convergence ratios.
1) Provides four E1 interfaces and eight differential HW interfaces externally.
1
Board Manual
2) Provides eight 2 Mbit/s TTL level HWs.
3) Provides one 2 MHz clock signal.
4) Provides one 8 kHz frame synchronous signal.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the H302RSP.
H302RSP
Mutual-control signal between boards

Communication Communication Peer RSP
control & protocol
Subscriber network control processing
interfaces such as SDH, PDH
Communication 4 E1 4 E1s
control transmission
ASL, DSL, VFB interfaces equipment or
HSL or SRX service node
8 HWs Convergence equipment
ratio adjustment
8 differential 8 differential
PV8/PV4
interfaces HWs
Figure 1 Functional principle of the H302RSP
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the H302RSP.
2
Board Manual
Figure 2 H302RSP panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the H302RSP indicators
Normal
status
Running status1. Flash fast: The board is faulty.
RUN Red Flash slowly
indicator 2. Flash slowly: The board is working normally.
Mutual-aid 1. ON: The board is assisting the peer board.
AID Green OFF
indicator 2. OFF: No mutual aid is being done.
Active clock 1. ON: The board provides system clock.
CLK Green
indicator 2. OFF: The board does not provide system clock.
1. ON: The board is communicating normally with
Communication
the upper-level equipment.
LINK1 Green link status ON
2. OFF: The board is not communicating normally
indicator
with the upper-level equipment.
LINK2 Green Standby Standby OFF
E1 status ON: The link is abnormal.
E11-E14 Green OFF
indicators OFF: The link is normal.
3
Board Manual
2) Reset switch SG2
It is used to reset the circuit board.
3) Debugging serial port JZ4
It is an RS-232 serial port with RJ45 connector, only used for debugging.
4) Monitoring serial port JZ2
It is an RS-232 serial port with RJ45 connector and the front leading-out interface of
the environmental and power supply monitoring cable.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the H302RSP.
H302RSP
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
UA5 UC5
H1 SH1
SG2
SG1
JZ4
JZ2
ON
SG3
1 2 3 4
Figure 3 DIP switches on the H302RSP
1) DIP switch SG1

It is used to determine the working mode of the board.
Original
DIP Switch Status1234 Meaning
Setting
Indicates software online upgrade in remote working
SG1 1000 0000
mode
0000 Indicates normal working in remote working mode
0001 Indicates local maintenance in remote working mode
4
Board Manual
Original
DIP Switch Status1234 Meaning
Setting
Indicates software online upgrade in quasi-local working
1100
mode
0100 Indicates normal working in quasi-local working mode
Others Reserved
2) DIP switch SG3

It is used to determine the number of E1s and external impedance of the board in
the remote working mode. Refer to Table 3 for the settings.
DIP Switch ON OFF

SG3-1 75 ohm 120 ohm
SG3-2
SG3-3 Reserved
SG3-4
5 Technical Indices
1) E1 interface indices comply with the ITU-T Recommendations G.703, G.704,
G.706 and G.823.
2) There are four kinds of external interfaces.
z E1 interface: Its electrical features conform to ITU-T Recommendation G.703.
z 232 serial port: 232 level
z Differential interface: 422 level
z TTL interface
3) Static power consumption of the board: 6.0 W
6 Attention
1) E1 interface and differential HW interface cannot be used simultaneously.
2) The impedance of each E1 interface can only be 120 ohm or 75 ohm.
3) Settings should be performed according to the number of E1s used.
4) It is prohibited to operate DIP switches and jumpers of the board when power is
on, otherwise, the board will be damaged.
5) Local maintenance is used to locate faults. If an E1 link is looped back, the E1
indicator on the corresponding board will be off.
6) Before using the H302RSP, in which situation and which working mode that it
will run, first know the number of E1s to be used and the impedance, as well as
the position of DIP switches and jumpers on the board. Before setting the data,
perform local maintenance to ensure the correctness of the RSP hardware.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/RST
Remote T1 Interface Board C802RST
1 Overview
The C802RST is located in the remote subscriber frame of the C&C08 Switching
System, and is used to give access to subscribers who are far away from the switch
through T1 transmission media. The T1 transmission standards are used in countries
or territories such as Hong Kong, North America, Japan. The C802RST is the link
interface board at the remote side of the switch, and must be used together with the
C802LRT0.
2 Main Functions
The C802RST communicates with the switch through the internal protocol and
transmits subscriber messages and the Host commands, so as to enable the switch to
manage the remote equipment and report subscriber messages. The RST provides a
22-time-slot HW (uplink and downlink) as the bearing channel of voice data.
I. Board functions
1) Configures the type of the slave node and its working mode, communicates with
the slave node through the serial port, forwards the Host commands and
receives status responses from the slave node.
2) Provides a few signal tone resources.
3) Uses Link Access Procedure, Balanced (LAPB) protocol to provide the link
communication with the local T1 Interface Board (LRT).
4) Supports standard T1 interfaces.
5) Supports three T1 alarms and indications.
6) Provides mutual-aid between RST boards.
7) Supports eight environmental variable interfaces and indications of
environmental alarm indicators.
II. Main features
1) Provides two types of signal tones.

2) Provides protection circuits for the over-voltage introduced by the electric
transmission line.
3) Works in the load sharing mode, so as to improve the utilization ratio of the RST
board.
1
Board Manual
1) Provides a differential HW for equipment in the functional frame.

2) Provides a 2 MHz differential Clock signal for the functional frame.
3) Provides an 8 kHz differential frame synchronization signal.
4) Provides one T1 interface to connect with the upper-level equipment.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C802RST.
HDLC communication Serial port DRV

Main control module communication module
module
BUS
Signal tone module Switching network T1 interface module T1

module
Clock processing
CLK DRV
module
DRV
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C802RST
HDLC communication module: The C802RST packs messages collected by the

remote module, sends them to the TS12 of a T1 through the HDLC communication
module. All the Host commands of the upper-level switching module are sent to the
RST in the HDLC mode through the TS12 of the subscriber HW. After receiving the
data packets, the RST sends the commands to the respective interface boards
through the serial port.
Main control module: It provides the board initialization and converts the Master/Slave
communication protocol to the Link-layer LAPB protocol.
Serial port communication module: The RST scans the circuit boards in the
subscriber frame through the master/slave node serial port to collect messages that
are to be reported to the Host of respective boards.
Signal tone module: It generates signal tones for the use of the subscriber boards in
the remote module.
Switching network module: It implements the switching between the timeslots of link
HWs, signal tone HWs and voice channel HWs.
2
Board Manual
T1 interface module: It is used to accomplish the communication at the physical layer
with the upper-level trunk board.
Clock processing module: It extracts the Clock signals on the E1 line, and provides
the system Clock for the remote module.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C802RST.
RUN
CK0
CK1
LOSC
LOSF
ALM Y
ALM B
SELF
ALM 1
ALM 2
ALM 3
ALM 4
ALM 5
ALM 6
ALM 7
AL M 8
RST
Figure 2 C802RST panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C802RST indicators

1. Flashes fast: The board is not in service.
RUN Red RUN indicator 2. Flashes slowly: The board is working Flashes slowly
normally.
1. ON: The link is faulty.
CK0 Green Link indicator OFF
2. OFF: The link is normal.
CK1 Reserved for future use OFF
Carrier 1. ON: Carrier is lost.
LOSC Green OFF
indicator 2. OFF: Carrier is normal.
Synchronizatio 1. ON: Synchronization is lost.
LOSF Green OFF
n indicator 2. OFF: Synchronization is normal.
3
Board Manual
1. ON: The opposite end frame is out of
Out of Frame
ALMY Green synchronization. OFF
indicator
2. OFF: Normal
1. ON: The carrier of the opposite end is lost.
Opposite
ALMB Green 2. OFF: The carrier of the opposite end is OFF
carrier
normal.
Status 1. ON: The board is in the self-test status.
SELF Green OFF
indicator 2. OFF: The board is in the normal status.
1-8
1. ON: There is an environmental alarm.
ALM1-8 Green environment OFF
2. OFF: There is no environmental alarm.
alarm indicator
2) Reset switch SW1

This is the hardware reset button.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the C802RST.
C802RST0
SW1
Figure 3 Layout of the C802RST
SW1: Reset switch
5 Technical Indices
1) Each board provides one T1 interface, whose line rate is 1.544 Mbit/s and the
line code is in B8ZS.
2) CPU master frequency: 32.768 MHz
3) Power consumption of the board: 1.5 W
4
Board Manual
4) Standard followed: ITU-T Recommendations G.703, G.704, and HKTA2015.
6 Attention
100 ohm twisted pair cable is used as the trunk cable.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/RTD
Serial Port Drive Board C841RTD
1 Overview
The C841RTD is on the backplane of each frame and drives the differential signals
of the emergency serial port.
2 Main Functions
The C841RTD drives the signals in the emergency channels of each frame. When
the HDLC links in each frame cannot work normally, the frame will communicate
with the AMP through the emergency serial port to provide a path over which faults
can be reported. The inter-frame signals use the differential level, and the RTD
drives the differential signals and ensures the reliability of the signal transmission.
I. Board functions
1) Drives the differential signals on the inter-frame emergency serial port.

2) Isolates the signals on the emergency serial port of the frames.
II. Main features
1) Uses the structure of the small ‘pinch plate’ for easy installation.
2) Provides a ‘location pin’ to fore-stall the wrong installation of the C841RTD.
1) Provides the input and output interface for the intra-frame differential signals.
2) Provides the input and output interface for the inter-frame differential signals.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841RTD.
TX TXD
Signal Signal
conversion Drive conversion
input output
RXD RX
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841RTD
1
Board Manual
Signal conversion input: It converts the input differential signals into the TTL level
signals.
Drive: It drives the intra-board TTL level signals.
Signal conversion output: It converts the TTL level signals into the differential signal
output.
3 Panel
None.
4 Layout
Figure 2 shows the layout of the C841RTD.
JP3
GND VCC
TXD+ TX+
TXD- TX-
RX+ RXD+
RX- RXD-
VCC GND
J2 J1
Figure 2 Layout of the C841RTD
1) J1 and J2
These are installation interfaces, and also provide interface signals.
2) JP3
It provides the ‘location pin’.
5 Technical Indices
1) It provides the input and output differential interfaces.
2) The differential signals conform to the RS422 level standard.
2
Board Manual
6 Attention
Before the installation, check if JP3, J1 and J2 are tilted or there is any shorting
between the pins. If they are in normal condition, align JP3 to the location hole on
the backplane and then insert the board.
3
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/SIG
128-Channel Signal Tone Board CB02SIG
1 Overview
The CB02SIG is located in the Main control frame of the SM, and provides the voice
playing resources, such as telephone number, prompt tone, card number, sum and
time. Board software and all the voice data files can be loaded when the board is in
service.
Note:
The CB02SIG and C841SPT of the AM/CM are basically the same in their functionality and structure, but
they have different service objects due to their different locations. The C841SPT is used for the Access
Network and Intelligent Network subscribers adopting the SPM networking, while the CB02SIG is used
for direct subscribers, Access Network and Intelligent Network subscribers carried by the SM.
2 Main Functions
The CB02SIG is controlled by the MPU. Its working status and playback contents are
controlled by commands sent by the MPU. The SIG is connected with the BNET
through four UHWs of 2.048 Mbit/s and two DHWs of the same rate. It provides 64
different voices in the memory at a time, and records through any time slot of two
DHWs.
I. Board functions
1) Provides the playback function, with the playback contents controlled

dynamically.
2) Provides the recording function.
3) Provides the time reporting function.
4) Converts the malicious call number loaded by the MPU into the voice information
for broadcasting.
5) Provides time correction function.
II. Main features
1) Loads board software and all the voice data files when the board is in service.
1
Board Manual
2) Provides on-site recording and loading to facilitate maintenance when the voice
contents require change.
3) The switch controls the playback contents of each playback channel.
4) Modifies all the voice contents on a telephone set without interrupting the Switch
services.
1) Provides the resources of four UHWs and two DHWs.

2) Provides the bus communication mode to communicate with the MPU.
3) Provides an RS232 serial port as the debugging serial port.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB02SIG.
Maibox Main
communcation processing
MPU module unit
Logic control Voice storing

module module
HW service
NET
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB02SIG
Mailbox communication module: Accomplishes the function of communication

between this board and the MPU.
Main processing unit: Reports the status of this board and controls the playback.
Logic control module: Reads the voice address, takes out the voice data from the
memory according to the voice address and converts them into the 2 Mbit/s code
stream through parallel-serial conversion for outputting.
Voice storing module: Consists of the FLASH memory and stores the voice resources
of 137 minutes.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB02SIG.
2
Board Manual
RUN
W/E
REC
SIG
Figure 2 CB02SIG panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CB02SIG indicators

RUN Red Power indicator ON when power is normal ON
ON: Active
W/B Green Active/standby indicator Uncertain
OFF: Standby
REC Green Recording indicator Flashes when recording OFF
2) Resetting switch S2
It is to reset the hardware.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the CB02SIG.
3
Board Manual
CB02SIG
1 2 3 4
S1
S2
Figure 3 Layout of the CB02SIG
Meaning ON OFF
S1.4 Selection of working mode CB01SIG mode CB02SIG mode
5 Technical Indices
1) This board has 128 playback channels, but actually only 64 of them can be
provided at a time due to the limitation of switch resources.
2) It provides 64 recording channels of the asynchronous tone.
3) A memory of 64 MB can be stored with up to 8,192 different voices with the total
voice length of 137 minutes.
4) Duration of each voice can be adjusted flexibly between 0.125 ~ 524 seconds.
5) The voice file format of the signal tone is in compliance with ITU-T
6) The maximum power consumption is 2 W.
6 Attention
1) The CB02SIG must be selected for the working mode of the board.
2) Signal tones with different index requirements are formed into corresponding
data files by using a special kind of signal tone processing software. The voice
can be recorded as data files. Signal tone and voice required by different
4
Board Manual
countries and territories are synthesized into different file groups, and the signal
tone files can be selected and loaded to meet different requirements during the
deployment.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/C841SNC
Small Net Control Cell C841SNC
1 Overview
The C841SNC is located in the LIM frame, providing 8K switching network to

implement voice switching and control. It also provides clocks for the other boards in
the same frame, maintains and manages the other boards in the same frame.
2 Main Functions
Each SNC has 8k×8k TS switching network, which is responsible for voice channel
switching and control. The SNC provides HDLC links between the SM and the CCM.
In addition, it offers clocks, loading channel, maintenance channel and management
channel for the other boards in the same frame.
I. Board functions
1) Provides 8K switching network for voice channel interchange and control.

2) Provides HDLC links between the SM and the CCM.
3) Provides clocks for the other boards in the same frame.
4) Communicates with the other boards in the same frame in the master/slave
node communication mode, and provides loading, maintenance and
management channels for the other boards in the same frame.
5) Two SNCs work in the active and standby mode.
II. Hardware interface signal
1) Provides a maximum of eight 2.048 Mbit/s HWs to connect with the CCM frame.
2) Locks the phases of two clocks provided by the clock frame and doubles their
frequencies, and provides four frame headers and eight 16 Mbit/s clocks for the
other boards in the same frame.
3) Provides the left and right half frames with one master/slave node serial port
respectively for communication with the other boards in the same frame.
4) Provides sixteen 2.048 Mbit/s HDLC links and thirty-two 16 Mbit/s HWs to
connect with the other boards in the same frame.
5) Provides debugging network port and serial port.
III. Functional principle
Figure 1 shows the function principle of the C841SNC.
1
Board Manual
SNC
Resource interleave
debugging serial port

Connecting (8K network)
CPU module
Network port of
with the External clock
STU, E16,
(Synchronous
and MHI Clock module
serial port,
through the Output clock master/slave
backplane serial port,
Enthernet and
HDLC module so on)
CCM frame
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841SNC
Resource interleave module (8K network): Responsible for voice channel switching.
Clock module: Responsible for locking the phases of the clocks in the clock frame
and doubling their frequencies, and providing clocks for the other boards in the
same frame.
HDLC module: Responsible for providing links between the SM and the CCM.
CPU module: Responsible for switching and control of 8K network and HDLC links,
as well as maintenance and management of the other boards in the same frame.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841SNC.
2
Board Manual
RUN
FAIL
SNC
Figure 2 C841SNC panel
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841SNC indicators

1. Flashes fast: The board is loading.
Indicates the
2. Flashes slowly: The board is working Flashes every
RUN Red running status
normally. one second
of the board
3. ON: The board is in the standby status.
Indicates 1. ON: The board is faulty.
FAIL Green
running fault 2. OFF: The board is working normally.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the C841SNC.
3
Board Manual
S3
1 2 3 4
S7
Figure 3 Layout of the C841SNC
S7: Reset switch
S3: 4-bit DIP switch
S3-1: Debugging state, which is set to ON by default.
S3-2: Reserved
S3-3: Reserved
S3-4: Controlling whether the watchdog is closed, which is set to ON by default.
5 Technical Indices
1) Rate of master/slave node serial port: 187.5 kbit/s
2) Power consumption of the board: 10-15 W
6 Attention
None.
4
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/SNU
Network Frame Edge Switching Netboard

C841SNU
1 Overview
The C841SNU is located in the switching network frame of the AM/CM to complete
the Layer-1 and Layer-3 switching of the service switching network (the entire
switching network has a three-layered structure). The SNU and the CNU form a
complete switching network to switch the service data or voice. In addition, the SNU
completes the opto-electrical conversion function and connects the optical signals of
the interface frame.
2 Main Functions
The C841SNU uses eight 4K×4K switching network chips (SD529) as the switching
unit. It accomplishes eight 4K T-nets and provides the control interface of the
switching network. It also supports the ‘insertion read-back’ function, Clock test and
active/standby switchover functions needed by the ‘self-test’ of the switching
network.
The SNU de-multiplexes the four high-speed optical signals of 393.2 Mbit/s sent by
the Line Interface Module (LIM) into sixty-four 16 Mbit/s HW signals and sends them
to Layer-1 switching network. It also multiplexes the sixty-four 16 Mbit/s speech
channel signals output by the Layer-3 switching network into four 393.2 Mbit/s high-
speed optical signals and sends them to the LIM frame.
I. Board functions
1) Uses the ASIC components to accomplish eight 4K T-nets, with four each for
Layer-1 and Layer-3 switching respectively.
2) Justifies sixty-four 16 Mbit/s signals into fou pairs of optical signals and
performs the opto-electrical conversion function.
3) Provides the Clock fault test function and automatically selects a better Clock
from the two Clocks.
4) Provides the control interface of the switching network for the NCC.
5) Supports the ‘insertion read-back’ function needed by the switching network
self-test.
1
Board Manual
II. Main features
1) The board works in the active-standby mode and has the automatic switchover
function.
2) Coordinates with the QSI in the interface frame in achieving the linkage
switchover of the optical channel.
3) With two sets of active-standby switchover circuits, controls the active-standby
states of the upper and lower optical interfaces respectively.
1) Provides four pairs of 393.2 Mbit/s high-speed optical signals to connect to the
line interface frame.
2) Provides sixty-four speech channel signal HWs of 16 Mbit/s to the CNU.
3) Receives the sixty-four speech channel signal HWs of 16 Mbit/s sent by the
CNU.
4) Provides the CPU bus for the control of the switching network.
5) Receives the two timing signals from the Clock frame, each Clock containing
8 kHz frame signals and 2 MHz Clock signals.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841SNU.
Layer- 2 switching network

2*393 Mbit/s Optoelectric 32*16 Mbit/s Layer-1 switching 32*16 Mbit/s
QSI0 network
conversion module
2*393 Mbit/s Optoelectric 32*16 Mbit/s Layer-3 switching 32*16 Mbit/s

QSI1 conversion module network
8k0,8k1
Clock processing Active/standby Active/standby signals
CKM 2M0,2M1 module switchover module
CPU BUS
BDR CPU bus interface module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841SNU
Opto-electric conversion module: It handles the conversion between the sixty-four

16 Mbit/s electrical signals and four 393.2 Mbit/s optical signals.
Switching network module: It achieves layer-1 and layer-3 time slot switching
functions.
2
Board Manual
Clock processing module: It fulfills the Clock-fault test and Clock frequency
multiplication processing.
Active/standby switchover processing module: It handles the board status test and
CPU bus interface module: It provides the CPU bus interface.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841SNU.
RU N
SNU
Figure 2 C841SNU panel
1) Board indicators
3
Board Manual
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841SNU indicators

1. Red indicator ON: The four backup optical channels in
the board run normally.
2. Green indicator ON: The board is faulty.
Red and Board status 3. Red indicator flashes: The four active optical channels Red indicator
RUN in the board run normally.
Green indicator flashes
4. Green indicator flashes: In the board, two optical
channels are active, and the other two optic al channels
are standby.
There are four pairs of optical interfaces on the panel of the SNU, which are
configured as follows.
z For each pair of optical interfaces, the upper one is for receiving, and the lower
one for is for transmitting.
z The upper two pairs are of one group, and the lower two pairs form the other.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the switches and jumpers on the C841SNU.
CLK0 CLK1 ACT1 ACT0
J4 J5 J6
J1
Figure 3 Switches and jumpers on the C841SNU
1) Switches and jumpers

Jumper J1 is used for the debugging, which is not connected in normal conditions.
Jumpers J4, J5 and J6 are used to download the EPLD logic software.
2) SMT indicators
4
Board Manual
Table 2 gives the meanings and descriptions of the SMT indicators on the C841SNU.
Table 2 SMT indicators on the C841SNU

CLK0 Red Clock 0 indicator ON: The board currently works at Clock 0. Uncertain
CLK1 Red Clock 1 indicator ON: The board currently works at Clock 1. Uncertain
Group 1 active/standby ON: The first group of the board is active.
ACT0 Red Uncertain
indicator OFF: The first group of the board is standby.
ON: The second group of the board is active.
Group 2 active/standby
ACT1 Red OFF: The second group of the board is Uncertain
indicator
standby.
5 Technical indices
1) Switching capability: 8 4K T-nets
2) Optical interface rate: 393.2 Mbit/s
3) Optical interface working wavelength: 850 nm or 1310 nm
4) Optical Fiber type: 62.5/125 µm multimode optic fiber
5) Optical Fiber connector: SC type
6) Maximum Optical Fiber length: 500 m
7) Output optic power of optical interface: -19.5 ~ -14 dBm
8) Receive sensitivity of optical interface: -29 dBm
9) Receive saturation power of optical interface: -14 dBm
6 Attention
1) The SNUs are configured in pairs (active/standby). The first group of optical
interfaces of each pair of SNUs is active and standby, and its second group of
optical interfaces is standby and active.
2) The optical fibers of the active/standby QSIs in the same LIM frame are
connected to the same group of optical interfaces (the upper two pairs of
optical interfaces or the lower two pairs of optical interfaces) of two
active/standby SNUs.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/SPC
Service Processing Board C842SPC
1 Overview
The C842SPC is located in the CNET frame and the SPM frame of the AM/CM. In
the SPM frame, it processes the call services; in the CNET frame, it controls the call
connections in the CNET.
2 Main Functions
The CPU of the C842SPC is AMD-K6-2, and the board provides the PCI bus and
ISA bus. The board can be loaded with programs and data through its Ethernet
interface or can transport bills in real time through the interface. Two MPC860s
process the HDLC link communication.
I. Board functions
1) Provides the high-speed service processing function through the AMD-K6-2

processor.
2) Processes four 2 Mbit/s HW links through the HDLC link processing function.
3) Achieve the program and data loading and transports bills in real time through
the Ethernet interface.
4) Performs the serial port communication function.
5) Performs the mailbox communication function.
6) Performs the Clock test and selection functions.
II. Main features
1) Provides a dual-bus plan with the PCI bus and ISA bus.
2) Provides the status test and automatic switchover function.
1) Provides an Ethernet interface.

2) Provides four 2.048 Mbit/s link HWs.
3) Provides a set of 32-bit CPU bus.
4) Provides the RS422 level serial port that supports the point-to-multipoint UART
serial port communication.
5) Supports the point-to-point UART differential serial port.
6) Provides an RS232 level UART test serial port.
7) Receives two Clock signals from the Clock frame.
1
Board Manual
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C842SPC.
Ethernet interface
Processor module Ethernet interface module
PCI bus
Flash PCI bus module
PCI-ISA Bus
conversion bridge BIOS
Bus
ISA bus Mailbox comm module
HDLC processing module

Serial port HDLC
Serial port
Clock processing module Clock signal
Switchover compelled
Active/standby switchover module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C842SPC
Processor module: It comprises the AMD-K6-2 processor, Peripheral control bridge

card, L2 Cache, Clock drive chip and Voltage regulator.
Ethernet interface module: It achieves the Ethernet receiving and transmitting

functions.
PCI-ISA conversion bridge: It achieves the conversion of the PCI bus to the ISA bus.
PCI bus module: It converts the PCI bus to the self-defined bus.
Mailbox communication module: It accomplishes the mailbox communication

function between the SPC and other boards.
HDLC processing module: It processes the HDLC link receiving and transmitting
and consists of two pieces of MPC860s and their peripheral circuits.
Clock processing module: It provides various Clocks needed by the board.
Active/standby switchover module: It handles the board status test and automatic
switchover function.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C842SPC.
2
Board Manual
RUN
FAIL
SPC
Figure 2 C842SPC panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C842SPC indicators
Indicator Color Description Meaning Normal

status
1. Flashes slowly: The active board is working normally.
2. ON: The standby board is working normally. Flashes
RUN Red SPC RUN state.
3. Flashes fast: The board is in the loading state. slowly
4. OFF: The board is faulty or the program does not run.
2. Flashes fast: Reads the wrong slot number at the power-
Indicates
on.
FAIL Green whether the OFF
3. ON: A fault occurs during the loading process, or closes
board is faulty
the WATCHDOG through the software debugging
parameters.

None.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the switches on the C842SPC.
3
Board Manual
S1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S2
Figure 3 Switches on the C842SPC
1) Reset switch S1
It is the hardware reset button.
2) DIP switch S2
Bit Meaning ON OFF

S2.1 Run mode switch DEBUG Running normally
S2.2 ON: When plugging out the board The board is working normally.
S2.4 Power-on self-test The board provides the power-on self-test The board does not provide the
function function. power-on self-test function.
S2.8 Print switch Print through serial port Not to print
5 Technical Indices
1) The Ethernet supports the IEEE802.3 standard.
2) The asynchronous serial port follows Standards RS422 and RS232.
5) Static power consumption of the board is 20.05 W.
4
Board Manual
6 Attention
In the normal running status, put all the DIP switches to OFF position.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/SPT
Special Voice Board C841SPT
1 Overview
The C841SPT is located in the resource frame SRM of the AM/CM, which provides
the C&C08 Switching System with various signal tone resources for the entire
switch and handles the broadcast resources, such as telephone number, prompt
voice, card number and card balance.
2 Main Functions
The C841SPT is located in the SRM as the signal tone board to broadcast voices.
Each board provides 256 playback channels to support the in-service signal tone
loading. The C841SPT is connected through two 8 Mbit/s HWs with the MHI to
transport 252 playback speech channels.
I. Board functions
1) Provides 256 playback channels with a duration reaching up to 135 minutes.

2) Provides the in-service recording function.
3) Supports the 8 Mbit/s HW playback channels.
II. Main features
1) The board is slot-compatible with the SRC, so it can be inserted in any slot on
the small backplane of the resource frame.
2) The board provides the intelligent voices for Automatic Call Distributor (ACD),
IN and Automatic Call-back Calling (ACC) stations, and the playback is
controlled by the commands issued by the Host.
3) The voice files are separated from the board software file, and the voice
contents can be loaded from the BAM, but the voice cannot be played while
being loaded.
4) The board transports the voice and data to the MHI through two 8 Mbit/s HWs.
1) Connected through two 8 Mbit/s HWs to the MHI to transport voices and HDLC
link information.
2) Receives the 8 kHz frame alignment signals provided by the MHI.
3) Receives the 8 MHz Clock signals provided by the MHI.
4) Returns the 8 MHz Clock signals to the MHI.
1
Board Manual
5) Returns the 8 kHz frame alignment signals to the MHI.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841SPT.
Link control module Main control module
2 Mbit/s
Logic control module Voice storage module
2*8 Mbit/s
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841SPT
Link control module: It achieves the communication between the board and other
modules.
Main control module: It reports the board status and controls the playback.
Logic control module: It is used to provide the playback function. It accesses the
voice address and data and controls the link information. It extracts the voice data
from the storage, converts them from parallel mode to serial mode and then
converts them into the 8 Mbit/s code stream.
Voice storage module: It consists of FLASH memories and stores up to 135-minute

voice resources.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841SPT.
2
Board Manual
RUN
FAIL
SPT
Figure 2 C841SPT panel
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841SPT indicators

Indicates the RUN
2. Flashes fast: The board is requesting for
RUN Red status and program Flashes slowly
loading.
loading
3. OFF: The board does not work normally.
1. ON: The 8 kHz frame alignment or 8 MHz
Clock input signal is faulty.
FAIL Green Failure indicator 2. OFF: The board runs normally. OFF
3. Flashes fast: The board is playing fault
information.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the switches and jumpers on the C841SPT.
3
Board Manual
J4
S2
J2
J1
J5 J6
1234
S1
J7
Figure 3 Switches and jumpers on the C841SPT

z Reset switch S2: It is the hardware reset button.
z Meanings of the DIP switch S1 is as shown in Table 2.
Bit Meaning ON OFF Default state

Communication mode Serial port
S1/1 Link communication mode OFF
selection communication mode
S1/2
S1/3 Reserved for future use OFF
S1/4
2) Jumpers
The jumpers on the SPT are reserved for future use.
5 Technical Indices
1) Provides 256 playback channels with a duration reaching up to 135 minutes.
2) Provides two 8 Mbit/s HWs to the MHI interface.
3) The intra-frame signals are at TTL level and the inter-frame signals use the RS-
422 level.
5) Power consumption of the board: 4W
4
Board Manual
6 Attention
If it is a non-SSP Switch, the entire switch will be usually configured with two SPTs.
They are inserted in Slot 4 and Slot 5 in Frame 18 and are logically in the active-
standby mode. For the SSP Switch, the number of SPTs depends on that of the
fixed voice channels required.
5
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/SRC
Resources Sharing Board C841SRC
1 Overview
The C841SRC is located in the shared resources frame of the AM/CM. It provides
the shared resources for the entire C&C08 Switching System, such as Dual-Tone
Receiving (DTR) resources, Conference Telephone (COF) resources, CID-I & CID-II
(caller identification) resources, Multi-frequency Compelled (MFC) resources, DTMF
receiving/transmitting resources and continuity check resources. It also supports the
A/µ law code configurability function of the COF, CID, DTMF and MFC functional
modules.
Note:
The C841SRC is slot-compatible with the C841SPT, and they occupy the same HW resources.
2 Main Functions
The SRC is connected with the MHI through a flat cable that includes two
8.192 Mbit/s receiving/transmitting HW lines, one receiving/transmitting 8 MHz
Clock and 8 kHz frame synchronous signals. The SRC communicates with the MHI
through the HDLC link. They occupy TS0, TS4, TS8 and TS12 in the first 8 Mbit/s
HW at a rate of 256 kbit/s. Therefore, each SRC actually provides 252 time slots as
the data processing paths.
I. Board functions
1) Provides the MFC processing resources of the R2 Signaling.

2) Provides the DTMF number receiving function when accessing the V5 and LAP
RSA subscribers.
3) Provides the Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) CID function.
4) Provides the DTMF CID function.
5) Provides the COF processing resources.
6) Provides the DTMF inter-office signaling receiving/transmitting function.
7) Provides the continuity check function for SS7 signaling trunk circuits.
8) Provides the functions of echo duration configuration and receiving electrical
level configuration for Russia register signaling.
1
Board Manual
9) Supports the Russia register signaling of SHUTTLE, PACKET, GAPLESS.
10) Supports R1 register signaling.
11) Supports A-law continuity check function.
II. Main features
1) The slot of the board is compatible with that of the C841SPT, which enables
flexible configuration.
2) A/µ law can be configured.
3) The transmitting level and the transmitting time can be set.
1) Provides two differential 8 Mbit/s service HWs to the MHI, and receives two
differential 8 Mbit/s service HWs sent by the MHI.
2) Receives the 8 MHz Clock and 8 kHz frame synchronous signals provided by
the MHI.
3) Provides the 8 MHz Clock and 8 kHz frame synchronous signals sent by the
SRC back to the MHI.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C841SRC.
Communication module
Switching
network module
Service HW
MHI
interface module
DSP array module
Bus
Main control module
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C841SRC
Service HW interface module: It receives and sends the 8 Mbit/s differential HW

signals.
Switching network module: It demultiplexes the 8 Mbit/s HW to 2 Mbit/s HW to adapt

to the interface rate of the DSP array and multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s HW to 8 Mbit/s
HW. In addition, it switches the link time slots output by the HDLC controller to the
relevant time slots of the 8 Mbit/s HW.
Communication module: It performs the loading of functional programs to the boards

and facilitates the information exchange between the SRC and the MHI.
2
Board Manual
DSP array module: It processes various signal data from the service HW interface,
sends the processing results through the interface to the Main control module for
analysis and processing. The final analyzed result is the connection between the
communication module and the LIM interface frame.
Main control module: It handles the processing of commands issued by the SPC
and the data report of the DSP module.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C841SRC.
RUN
FAIL
SRC
Figure 2 C841SRC panel
1) Board indicators
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of board indicators.
3
Board Manual
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C841SRC indicators

1. Flashes fast: Indicates that the board is
Indicates the SRC loading being loaded or configured with data.
and running status 2. Flashes slowly: The board is working
normally.
Indicates the fault occurred ON: The Clock or frame synchronous signal
FAIL Green during the loading or running is lost. OFF
process OFF: Functioning normally
2) DIP switch S2
Switch/switch position Switch status Meaning Default status

ON 2 Mbit/s HW interface mode
SW2/1 OFF
OFF 8 Mbit/s HW interface mode
SW2/2 Reserved for future use
ON Serial port 0 is the RS422 interface.
SW2/3 OFF
OFF Serial port 0 is the RS232 interface.
ON Serial port 1 is the RS422 interface.
SW2/4 OFF
OFF Serial port 1 is the RS232 interface.
3) Reset switch (S1)

It is the hardware reset button.
RS232 serial port is used for software debugging.
5) Print serial port (J3)
It is used for the print debugging. Operators can observe the software running
process and the result through the super terminal.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the C841SRC.
4
Board Manual
J10 D1
D2
D3
J4 D4
D7
D8
J2
J3
S1
J5
1 2 3 4
S2
Figure 3 Layout of the C841SRC
Table 3 Meanings of the SRC SMT indicators

1. Flashes at the interval of one
Flashes at the
second: The DSP software is in
D1~D4 Red Indicates the DSP running status interval of 1
normal service.
second
2. ON or OFF: DSP faulty
Indicates the board software ON: The board is being loaded with
D7~D8 Red OFF
loading software.
2) Jumpers
Table 4 gives meanings of the default jumper settings.
Table 4 Meanings of the jumper settings
Jumper Function Factory default value

J4 DSP array cascaded test interface
J5 Cascaded DSP Not connected
J10 CPLD software loading interface
5 Technical Indices
1) Each board provides 252-channel share resources.
5
Board Manual
3) The DSP processing capability: A maximum of 100 Millions of Instructions Per
Second (MIPS).
4) The configurable transmitting level range is from -3.0 dB to -20.0 dB, and the
level configuration parameter variable step is 0.1 dB.
5) The DTMF transmitting signal interval is within the range of 40 ms to 200 ms.
6 Attention
1) Except the continuity check function, the remaining six functions achieve the
A/µ law configuration. The entire office has only one coding mode, as it does
not support the mixture of A and µ law.
2) The FSK and MFC_CIVIL function enable the transmitting level configuration.
The DTMF CID and DTMF transmitting enable the configuration of the
transmitting level and transmitting time.
6
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/STU
SDH Photoelectric Interface Board C842STU
1 Overview
The C842STU is located in the line interface frame of the AM/CM or ESM, which is
slot-compatible with the OBC and ET16. It outputs the standard STM-1 signals and
provides the SDH interfaces for the AM/CM or ESM of the C&C08 Switching System.
Note:
The C842STU is available in three types, namely, C842STU0 (dual optical interfaces), C842STU1 (one
optical interface) and C842STU2 (one optical interface). The C842STU0 comprises C842OTM (with dual
optical interfaces on its backplane) and a C842MPR pinch plate; the C842STU1 comprises C842ETM
(one optical interface on its backplane) and a C842MPR pinch plate; the C842STU2 comprises C843ETM
and a C842MPR pinch plate. Compared with the C842STU1, the C842STU2 provides the active/standby
function.
2 Main Functions
The STU adds or drops 63 E1s through the STM-1 (155 Mbit/s) interface. The data and
signaling will be separated from the dropped E1 signals first, and then the signals will
be multiplexed into eight 16.384 Mbit/s service HWs and one 2.048 Mbit/s link HW. The
QSI converges the service HWs and sends them to the CNET, and the link HW to the
CCM. The maintenance and status information will be reported through the serial port
connected to the QSI.
I. Board functions
1) Provides 155 Mbit/s SDH trunk interface.

2) Provides the SM networking mode for SDH equipment access.
3) Connects directly to the public SDH transmission network.
4) Provides the SDH management function (including fault management and
performance management).
5) Provides multiple kinds of loop-back functions.
1
Board Manual
II. Main features
1) Supports multiple logic software loading modes, such as PROM, loading head and
CPU.
2) The BIOS and the Host program can be combined or separated.
3) Automatically tests whether the STU Conversion Card (TMC) is in place.
4) Supports two equipment numbering modes, namely, numbering according to the
equipment sequence before multiplexing and numbering according to the
equipment sequence after multiplexing.
1) Provides eight 16.384 Mbit/s service HWs to the QSI.

2) Receives eight 16.384 Mbit/s service HWs sent by the QSI.
3) Provides one 2.048 Mbit/s signaling link to the QSI.
4) Receives one 2.048 Mbit/s signaling link sent by the QSI.
5) Receives the 16.384 MHz system Clock and 8 kHz frame signals sent by the QSI.
6) Provides a serial port to fulfill the Master/Slave node communication with the QSI.
7) Provides one or two pairs of optical interfaces.
8) Provides a 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface.
9) Provides a debugging serial port, which works in the asynchronous mode.
10) Provides the Clock frame with the synchronous Clock of 8 kHz of the upper-level
switch.
11) Provides an E1 interface for testing.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the C842STU.
HDLC
Group unit Cross-connect Tributary
unit unit Switching unit
HW
Overhead
serial port
QSI
BUS
Main control unit Serial port
Figure 1 Functional principle of the C842STU
Group unit: Performs the photoelectric conversion, overhead regeneration &

termination and other accessory functions.
2
Board Manual
Cross-connect unit: Achieves the cross-connect protection of the multiplex section and
the cross-connection function of the lower order path VC12.
Tributary unit: Accomplishes the add/drop optical paths of 63 E1 signals.
Switching unit: Provides the speech channel TS switching and the link TS insertion and
extraction function.
Main control unit: Performs the board initialization and runs the status monitoring
functions.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the C842STU.
RUN
FAIL
ST U
Figure 2 C842STU panel
Table 1 gives the meanings and descriptions of board indicators.
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the C842STU indicators

Flashes slowly: The board is working normally.
RUN Red Indicator Flashes fast: The board is being loaded with its software. Flashes slowly
OFF: The board does not work normally.
ON: The board hardware is faulty.
OFF: The board is working normally.
3
Board Manual
4 Layout
I. C842STU1
Figure 3 shows the layout of the switches and jumpers on the C842STU1.
J3
J2
SW3
J1
J4 LED3
1 1 2 3 LED4
LED5
2 4
3
3 J9 SW5 2
1
SW2
J14
J5
SW4 SW1
ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J6
Figure 3 Switches and jumpers on the C842STU1
DIP switches on the ETM board:

1) DIP switch SW4: It is the optical interface switch.
Table 2 gives the meanings of the DIP switch SW4.
SW4/4 SW4/3 SW4/2 SW4/1 Meaning

ON OFF OFF OFF Meaningless
Other status Selects the optical interface
2) DIP switch SW1: Reserved for future use

3) DIP switch SW3: Set the DIP switch to test E1.
Table 3 gives the meanings of the DIP switch SW3.
SW3/2 SW3/1 Meaning

ON ON Impedance of the transmission line is 75 ohm.
OFF OFF Impedance of the transmission line is 120 ohm.
4) Reset switch SW2: It is the hardware reset button.
4
Board Manual
5) Table 4 gives the meanings and descriptions of the DIP Switch SW5.
Table 4 Meanings and descriptions of the DIP Switch SW5
Bit Meaning Normal status

5.1 Reserved OFF
5.2 Reserved OFF
5.3 Reserved OFF
ON: The serial port print switch is open.
5.4 OFF
OFF: The serial port print switch is closed.
6) Jumpers on the ETM board

Table 5 gives the meanings of the ETM jumpers.
Table 5 ETM jumpers
Jumper Meaning Default status
J1 Reserved for future use and not used open

Pins 1-2 are short circuited: E1 receiving end sheath gets connected to PGND.
J2 Short circuited
Pins 1-2 are open: E1 receiving end sheath gets disconnected from PGND.
Pins 1-2 are short circuited: E1 transmitting end sheath gets connected to PGND.
J3 Short circuited
Pins 1-2 are open: E1 transmitting end sheath gets disconnected from PGND.
Pins 1-2 are short circuited: The ETM's FPGA XCS30_240 is loaded from the loading
1-2 pins are short
J4 head or CPU.
circuited
Pins 1-2 are open: The ETM's FPGA XCS30_240 is loaded from PROM.
All open: FPGA will not be reset when the board is being reset and the CPU cannot
reset the FPGA. 1-2 pins are
J9
Pins 1-2 are short circuited: Permits the CPU to reset the FPGA. short circuited
Pins 2-3 are short circuited: When the board is reset, the FPGA is also reset.
Table 6 Meanings and descriptions of the SMT indicators on the C842STU1
Normal status
(debugging)
ON: The network interface receives the
Receiving status indicator of data.
LED3 Red Uncertain
debugging network interface OFF: The network interface does not
receive the data.
Line status indicator of ON: The network interface line is normal.
LED4 Red ON
debugging network interface OFF: The network line is faulty.
Note:
The three SMT indicators are used only in the debugging status. They are normally OFF in the working
status.
8) Debugging interfaces
5
Board Manual
z Debugging serial port (J14): Works in the asynchronous mode.
z BDM debugging interface (J6): A 10-pin jack is used in the debugging mode. The
CPU directly takes commands from the debugging interface to facilitate the
debugging of the software and hardware.
9) JTAG interface (J7): Provides the boundary scanning function.
10) Figure 4 shows the layout of the jumpers on the MPR board.
J22
1
2
3
J21
Figure 4 Jumpers on the MPR board
Table 7 gives the meanings of the MPR jumpers.
Table 7 MPR jumpers
Jumper Meaning Default state

Pins 1-2 are short circuited: The FPGA logic on the MPR board is loaded
from the load head or CPU.
J21 Short circuited
Pins 1-2 are open: The FPGA logic on the MPR board is loaded from
PROM.
All disconnected: When the board is reset, the FPGA cannot be reset, and
the CPU cannot reset the FPGA.
Pins 1-2 are short circuited: When the STU Terminal Multiplexing Board
J22 Pins 1-2 are short circuited
(OTM)'s FPGA is reset, the MPR's FPGA is also reset.
Pins 2-3 are short circuited: When the board is reset, the FPGA on the
MPR is also reset.
II. C842STU2
The DIP switch SW5 on the C842STU2 board has different meanings from that on the
C842STU1 board (other DIP switches on both boards have the same meanings).
Table 8 gives the meanings and descriptions of the DIP Switch SW5 on the ETM board.
6
Board Manual
Table 8 Meanings and descriptions of the DIP Switch SW5
Bit Meaning Normal status

ON: Debugging status
5.1 OFF
OFF: Normal running
ON: 1+1 single-port backup
5.2 OFF
OFF: Optical splitter/coupler backup
5.3 Reserved OFF
ON: The serial port print switch is open.
5.4 OFF
OFF: The serial port print switch is closed.
The ETM board uses no jumpers. Use 0-ohm resistors to replace the jumpers on the
C842STU1 board.
5 Technical Indices
1) Standards followed in developing the SDH interface on the STU
z The SDH interface type is STM-1. Its rate is 155.520 Mbit/s and conforms to ITU-T
Recommendation G.707 (1995).
z The type of the physical optical interface conforms to Classified Standard S-1.1 of
ITU-T Recommendation G.957 (1993).
z The basic frame structure of the optical interface signals and the overhead
definition and processing conform to ITU-T Recommendation G.707 (1995).
z The performance indices of the interface code error conform to ITU-T
Recommendation G.826. The jitter and wander performance indices conform to
ITU-T Recommendation G.825.
z The design is based on Optical Synchronous Transmission Network Technical
System TZO15-94, MPT, 1994, 1, and the various indices conform to the
specifications.
2) Physical optical interface indices of the STU
z The optical interface type application code: S-1.1
z Working wavelength: 1310 nm
z Mean transmitting optic power: -8 ~ -15 dBm
z Sensitivity of the receiver: <= -34 dBm
z Recommended connection length is within 15 km.
z Saturation optic power: -8 dBm
6 Attention
1) The STU should be used along with the TMC, and the TMC must be inserted in the
slot corresponding to the STU.
2) The STU is a dual-slot board, so two STUs occupy four slots.
3) The C842STU1 does not support the active-standby working mode. Therefore the
load-sharing mode is recommended. Usually the circuits in the same office
direction are distributed on at least two active STUs.
7
Board Manual
4) When connecting STUs to a remote switch, check whether their optic fiber types
and working wavelengths match each other. Otherwise, the connection will not be
successful or their distance will have to be reduced.
5) Install C842STU2 boards in the AM. A group of active-standby C842STU2 boards
occupy four slots. Use cables (≤ 70 m) or fibers (≤ 30 km, or ≤ 15 km in the case of
active-standby mode) to directly connect C842STU2 boards to the SDH
equipment through the 155-Mbit/s electrical or optical interfaces on the boards.
8
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/TMC
STU Conversion Card C842TMC
1 Overview
The C842TMC is located in the interface frame of the AM/CM, and is the signal
conversion card of the C842STU. It achieves the interconnection between HW signals,
Clock signals and active/standby switchover signals of the active/standby STUs. It
also provides maintenance and debugging interface for external use.
2 Main Functions
I. Board functions
1) Achieves the interconnection between HW signals, Clock signals and

active/standby switchover signals of the active/standby STUs.
2) Provides interfaces to loop back the SDH Clock.
3) Provides the maintenance and debugging interface.
4) Provides test E1 interface.
II. Main features
1) Loops back SDH line 8 kHz Clock to the CKS to ensure the synchronization of
the equipment when the TMC is plugged in with the AMP connector.
2) Connected to the maintenance or debugging PC through the Ethernet interface.
3) Provides Subscriber Frame Backplane (SMB) sockets for outgoing test E1 lines.
4) Provides the board-in-position signals.
1) Provides an 8 kHz Clock signal for the functional frame.

2) Provides two Ethernet interfaces.
3) Provides two test E1 interfaces.
4) Achieves its interconnection function for active/standby STU signals through the
interconnection of two active OBC slot signals.
3 Panel
None.
1
Board Manual
4 Layout
Figure 1 shows the layout of the C842TMC.
J1 RX1 RX0 J3
TX1 TX0
J11 J10
SIP4
J2 J4
Figure 1 Layout of the C842TMC
1) Headers: J1, J2, J3 and J4 are slot interfaces corresponding to the STU.
2) E1 interface: Test E1 interfaces are RX1 and TX1.
3) Debugging network interface: The network interface of the left slot is J11, and
that of the right slot is J10.
4) Clock interface
There is a loop-back Clock wire interface (the 8th row counted down from the topmost
of J4) on J4. The TMC side of the loop-back Clock line uses the 3x8 AMP connector,
and the other end has a SIP4 connector, connecting with JC1 or JC2 of the Clock
frame.
5) STP4: Reserved interface.
5 Technical Indices
None.
6 Attention
1) When the STUs are not in the active-standby mode, each STU is configured with
one TMC; when they are in the active-standby mode, the two STUs are
configured with one TMC each. The STU cannot work normally without the TMC.
2
Board Manual
2) The TMC is plugged at the back of the backplane of the interface frame
corresponding to the STU, and 3×8 AMP connector is used for the distribution of
the TMCs.
3
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/TSS
Test Board CC07TSS
1 Overview
Located in the subscriber frame of the SM, the CC07TSS is used to test the analog
subscriber interface (Z interface) and ISDN digital subscriber interface (U interface).
2 Main Functions
The CC07TSS receives the test commands from the MPU and reports the test results
through the serial port. Respective test circuits are connected to the test bus through
the relays, which are in turn connected to the test bus in the TSS by selecting and
controlling different external test channels. The test circuits dispatched by the Host
perform various tests under the control of the board software, and report the test
results back to the Host through the serial port.
I. Board functions
1) Tests the analog subscriber internal line.

2) Tests the subscriber line.
3) Tests the analog terminal.
4) Tests the "U" interface of the ISDN digital subscriber board.
5) Tests the "U" interface of the ISDN digital terminal.
6) Provides the monitoring function.
II. Main features
1) Provides ‘112 center’ with interfaces for analog and digital phone sets.
2) Provides CPU alarm, row/column alarm, secondary power supply alarm, -48V
alarm and TSS alarm signal outputs.
3) Provides 16 alarm inputs of environmental Boolean value.
4) Communicates with the AMD board through the serial port.
1) Provides two channels for the internal line test.

2) Provides one channel for the external line test.
3) Provides one channel for the AT0 internal line test.
4) Provides one channel for the AT0 external line test.
5) Provides one channel for the manual measurement.
6) Provides one channel for the semi-automatic test.
1
Board Manual
7) Provides one interface for the analog phone set of the ‘112 center’.
8) Provides one interface for the digital phone set of the ‘112 center’.
9) Provides one local standard NT1 interface.
10) Provides PWX ringing input signal.
11) Provides serial port receiving/transmitting channel for the C&C08 Switching
System.
12) Provides input signals for the secondary power supply alarm.
13) Provides the output of six kinds of alarm signals.
14) Provides the debugging serial port/ESC communication serial port.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CC07TSS.
Test channel 1
Test
Analog
Test channel 2 channel
subscriber Audio Multimeter
selection circuit
AT0 test channel circuit circuit circuit
Manual measuring channel
U-port
Digital subscriber line board U-port test circuit
test
Test bus
Interactive test
Phone circuit
Telephone terminal
set test
Serial
port
Flash
CPU
commu- FPGA
DRV or RSP nication
circuit SRAM
External
External alarm input alarm
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CC07TSS
Analog subscriber circuit module: Conducts the analog internal and external line test.
Main control module: Receives the Host command to control the test and reports the
test result.
Multimeter module: Measures voltage, resistance and capacitance.
U-port test module: Conducts activation and deactivation of the DSL U interface,
remote power supply capability test, U interface activation and transmission BER test
of the digital terminal.
Alarm detection module: Forwards the alarm information and provides subscribers
with 16-channel digital input signals.
2
Board Manual
Manual measuring module: When ‘112 center’ test interface is provided, the TSS
connects the designated test channel to the manual measuring channel. ‘112 center’
test equipment connects with the manual measuring channel to achieve the
interconnection of ‘112 center’ equipment.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CC07TSS.
RUN
FAIL
+12V
-12V
+5VD
+5VA
HOW
ACT
TSS
Figure 2 CC07TSS panel
Table 1 Meanings and descriptions of the CC07TSS indicators

1. One second ON/one second OFF: The board is One second
Indicates the
RUN Red working normally. ON/one second
running status
2. Flashes fast: The board is not in service. OFF
Operation failure 1. ON: Running abnormally
FAIL Green OFF
indicator 2. OFF: Running normally
+12VA power 1. ON: +12VA power supply is normal.
+12VA Green ON
supply indicator 2. OFF: +12VA power supply is abnormal.
-12VA power supply 1. ON: -12VA power supply is normal.
-12VA Green ON
indicator 2. OFF: -12VA power supply is abnormal.
+5VD power supply 1. ON: +5VD power supply is normal.
+5VD Green ON
indicator 2. OFF: +5VD power supply is abnormal.
+5VA power supply 1. ON: +5VA power supply is normal.
+5VA Green ON
indicator 2. OFF: +5VA power supply is abnormal.
3
Board Manual
Howler tone 1. ON: Howler tone
HOW Green Uncertain
indicator 2. OFF: Not howler tone
1. ON: U interface is working normally.
ACT Green U interface indicator Uncertain
2. OFF: U interface does not work.
4 Layout
Figure 3 shows the layout of the CC07TSS.
CC07TSS
S1
J1
Figure 3 Layout of the CC07TSS
1) Reset switch SW1: This is the hardware reset button.

2) Debugging serial port (J1): It is an RS232 serial port, used to debug printing
errors. The result and course of software operation can be viewed through the
super terminal.
5 Technical Indices
I. Subscriber line test
1) DC voltage (line A to grounding wire, line B to grounding wire)

Measurement range: 0.1 V ~ 200 V
Deviation: ±3%
2) AC voltage (line A to grounding wire, line B to grounding wire)
4
Board Manual
Measurement range: 0.1 V ~ 150 V
Deviation: ±2%
3) Insulation resistance (line A to grounding wire, line B to grounding wire, line A to
line B)
Measurement range: 10 ohm ~ 0.2±5% Megohm
0.2 Megohm ~ 10±10% Megohm

4) Electrical capacitance (line A to grounding wire, line B to grounding wire, line A to
line B)
Measurement range: 0.01 mF ~ 0.2±5% mF
0.2 mF ~ 10±10% mF
II. Subscriber line test
1) Pulse dialing
Break-make ratio: (1.6±0.2): 1
Pulse speed: 10±1 pps
Dialing interval: ≥350 ms

2) Dual-tone dialing
Frequency of the low frequency group: 697 Hz, 770 Hz, 852 Hz and 941 Hz
Frequency of the high frequency group: 1209 Hz, 1336 Hz, 1477 Hz and 1633 Hz
Frequency deviation: ±1.5%
Low frequency group level: -9±3 dBm
High frequency group level: -7±2 dBm
Dual frequency signal level difference: 2±1 dBm
Total distortion: Lower than the fundamental harmonic level by 20 dB
Signal limiting time length: >40 ms/bit
Time length of signal interval: >40 ms
III. Subscriber equipment test
1) Ringing current
Voltage: 75±15 V
Frequency: 25±3 Hz
Break-make ratio: 4s:1s
5
Board Manual
Time deviation: ±5%
2) Signal tone (450 Hz)
Frequency: 450±25 Hz
Level: -10±3 dBm
Harmonics: <10%
3) Busy tone
Break-make time length: 350 ms

4) Ring back tone
Break-make time length: 1s: 4s
Time deviation: <±10%
IV. Pulse dialing test
Dialing speed: 5 ~ 22 pps
Break-make ratio: measurement range: (1.0 ~ 3.0): 1
Deviation: ±5%
V. Dual tone dialing performance test
1) Frequency
High frequency groups: 1.209 kHz, 1.336 kHz, 1.477 kHz and 1.633 kHz
2) Frequency deviation: Reliable receiving within ±2% and no-receiving outside the
range of ±3%. Receiving is uncertain within ±2% ~ ±3%.
3) Level
Single frequency receiving range in the dual frequency operation: -4 dBm ~ -23 dBm
Single frequency non-operation level in the dual frequency operation: ≤-31 dBm
Dual frequency level difference: ≤6 dBm
Signal limiting time length: 80 ms/bit
Time length signal interval: 40 ms
VI. Polarity reversal
Time interval: 5 s
6
Board Manual
VII. Howler tone
Frequency: 950±50 Hz
Level: 0dBm0 ~ 20 dBm0
Harmonics: <10%
VIII. Loop resistance measurement
Measurement range: 0 ~ 3 kilohm
Deviation: ±5%
6 Attention
The alarm input of the environment Boolean value must be equal to the two-wire
Boolean value isolated by the optical coupler.
7
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System B-Intr/VMS
Message Indicator Analog Subscriber Line Board

CB01VMS
1 Overview
The CB01VMS is located in the subscriber line frame of the SM. It is developed for the
message indication service of the commercial network, which meets the demands of
message indication service.
2 Main Functions
The CB01VMS consists of SLIC and control circuit. The SLIC implements BORSCHT
function, while the control circuit controls 16 subscribers, allocates dynamic time slots
and communicates with the Master node.
I. Board functions
1) Provides 16 analog subscriber line interfaces.

2) Provides BORSCHT function, which is same as the subscriber line board.
3) Provides two methods to implement the message indication function.
II. Main features
1) Provides a dc voltage of the -140 V to light the message indicator on a specific

terminal.
2) Transmits the FSK control signal to the terminal in the case of non-ring mode to
make the terminal show the corresponding prompt information, that is, it has the
on-hook transmission capability.
3) Each port is added with a high voltage and ringing current multiplex relay. The
output of -140 V dc voltage is controlled by switching between the high voltage of
-140 V and the source of ringing current. This relay is connected on the source of
ringing current if there is no message.
4) The interface impedance is of a three-component mode, and the receiving level
can be adjusted to -3.5 dB or -7.0 dB.
5) DC loop resistance goes up to 3 kilohm (16 mA) and the communication is still
maintained.
1
Board Manual
1) Provides 16 pairs of subscriber line interfaces, that is, accessible to 16

subscribers.
2) Provides two HWs to the DRV, and receives two HW signals sent by the DRV at
the same time.
3) Receives 2 MHz and 8 kHz Clock signals sent by the DRV.
4) Provides the serial port signal to realize the Master/Slave node communication
with the NOD.
5) Receives the high voltage signal sent by the PWX.
Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the CB01VMS.
HW
COMBO SLIC Line1

TxDI
Tx
NOD CPU
COMBO SLIC Line15
Rx
Figure 1 Functional principle of the CB01VMS
the working states of the ringing current relay and SLIC.
COMBO: Accomplishes the conversion between analog signals and digital signals,
and performs functions, such as encoding, decoding and filtering.
SLIC: Accomplishes the analog subscriber line feeding and 2-/4-wire conversion, and
performs the off-hook & on-hook tests.
CPU: Receives and carries out the command sent by the NOD, monitors the working
state of this subscriber line board and reports the information of this board to the
NOD.
3 Panel
Figure 2 shows the panel of the CB01VMS.
2
Board Manual
RUN
VMS
Figure 2 CB01VMS panel
Table 1 gives the meaning and description of the board indicator.
Table 1 Meaning and description of the CB01VMS indicator

Flashes fast: The board is applying for data configuration.
Flashes slowly: The board is in service.
4 Layout
5 Technical Indices
1) Feeding mode: Dual-constant current feeding
3) Impedance characteristic: Three-component impedance
4) Protection characteristic: In compliance with ITU-T Recommendation K.20
5) When the loop resistance is 1.8 kilohm, the feeding current is not less than 18
mA.
3
Board Manual
6) Power consumption of the board is given in Table 2.
Table 2 Power consumption

+5 V 160 mA 480 mA
-48 V 18 mA 390 mA
6 Attention
1) The subscriber lines (16 pairs) are connected with the line interfaces
corresponding to the ASL of the backplane of the subscriber line frame.
2) No port provides the polarity reversal function.
3) Specific telephone set is needed for achieving the message indication function.
4
HUAWEI

Board Manual
Appendix
Board Manual
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations
Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
AC Alternating Current
ACC Automatic Call-back Calling
ACD Automatic Call Distributor
ACK Acknowledgement
ADP Language Processing Board
ADPCM Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation
ALM(C841) 128-Module Alarm Board
ALM(CB01) Alarm Collecting Board
AM Administration Module
AMD Acknowledged Mode Data
AMD(C841) Alarm Drive Board
AMD(CB01) Power Alarm Monitoring/Drive Board
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion
AMP Administration Processor Board
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
ASL Approved Supplier List
ASL(CB36) 16-Channel, Programmable, Reverse Polarity, 16/12KC, Analog Subscriber Board
ASL(CC08) SMT Analog Subscriber Board
ASL(CC0H) 32-Channel 48V Analog Subscriber Board
AVM Voice Mailbox Board
B
B8ZS Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution
BAC Bus Administration Control Board
BAM Background Administration Module
BCC Bus Communication Control Board
BDM Background Debug Mode
BDR Network Frame Bus Drive Board
BER Bit Error Rate
BHCA Busy Hour Call Attempt; Busy Hour Call Attempt
BIOS Basic Input/Output System
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply System
BNET Module B Switching Network Board
BORSCHT Battery, Overload protection, Ringing, Supervision, Coding, Hybrid and Test Access
BRA Basic Rate Adaptation
BTU Broadband Transmit Unit Board
C
CAS Channel Associated Signaling
CCITT Conference Consultatif International du Telephon et Telegraphie
CCM Communication Control Module
CDI Direct-Dial-In Subscriber Interface Board
CDP Central Database Process
CID Caller Identification Display
CKB Backplane of the Clock Frame
CKD Clock Drive Board
CKS Clock Source Board
CKV Clock Drive Board
CM Communication Module
CMOS Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor
CNET Central Switching Net Frame
CNU Network Frame Central Switching Netboard
COF Conference Telephone
CPC Central Processing Unit
CPLD Complex Programmable Logical Device
CPM Communication Processing Module
CPU Central Processing Unit
CTX(C802) Plug-in Card of Centrex Operator Console
1
Board Manual
CTX(C803) Centrex Console Card with PCI Interface

D
DAM Data Access Management
DC Direct Current
DCE Data Communications Equipment
DCME Digital Circuit Multiplication Equipment
DDS Direct Digital Synthesis
DEL µ Law Analog Subscriber Board
DHW Downlink HighWay
DIP Dual In-line Pin
DIU Data Interface Board
DP Decade Pulse
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
DRV(CB01) 32-Port Dual Tone Number Receiving & Drive Board
DRV(CC06) SMT Dual Tone Number Receiving & Drive Board
DSL 8-Channel Remote Feed Digital Subscriber Board
DSP Digital Signal Process
DSS1 Digital Subscriber Signaling No.1
DT Digital Trunk
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DTF Digital Trunk Board
DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency
DTR Dual Tone Transmit/Receive Board
DTT T1 Digital Trunk Board
E
EC Echo Cancellation
EMA Emergency Action Board
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EPLD Erasable Programmable Logic Device
ESC Environment & Power Monitoring Board
ET16(C841) 16-Channel E1/T1 Interface Board
ET16(C842) 16-Channel E1/T1 Interface Board
ETD ET16 Drive Card
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
F
FAM Front Administration Module
FIFO First In First Out
FLASH FLASH memory
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FSK Frequency Shift Keying
FSN Frame Switching Network Board
G
GECP Echo Cancellation Pool Board
GND Ground
H
HBC Outlet Transfer Board
HDB3 High Density Bipolar 3
HDLC High-speed Digital Link Control
HOI higher order interface
HSL High-Speed Synchronization Line Interface Board
HW HighWay
I
ID Identification
IDD International Direct Dialing
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
INT Interrupt
IP Internet Protocol
ISA Industry Standard Architecture
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector
J
JTAG Joint Test Action Group
K
KC Kilocycle
2
Board Manual
L
LAP Protocol Processing Board
LAPB Link Access Procedure, Balanced
LAPMC2 Inter-Module Communication Processing Board
LAPV5 V5 Signaling Processing Board
LED Light Emitting Diode
LIM Line Interface Module
LRT Local T1 Interface Board
M
MAC Media Access Control
MC2 Inter-Module Communication Board
MEM Memory Board
MF Multi-Frequency
MFC Multi-Frequency Compelled
MFC MFC Processing Board
MHI Multi-HW Interface Board
MIPS Million Instructions Per Second
MPR STU Terminal Multiplexing Map Board
MPU1(CB34) Universal Main Control Board
MPU(CB35) Universal Main Control Board
MRTIE Maximum Relative Time Interval Error
N
NCC Network Communication Control Board
NET NET Card
NETA NetWork Board
NO7 SS7 Signaling Processing Board
NOD Master Node Board
NP Number Portability
NRZ Non Return to Zero
O
OBC 40M Optic Interface Board
OLE Remote Optical Fiber Interface Board
OPT Optical Interface Board
OTM STU Terminal Multiplexing Board
OTU STM-1 Optic Interface Board for ESM
P
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCI Peripheral Computer Interface
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PHI Packet Handling Interface
PRA Primary Rate Adaptation
PRAM Parameter Random Access Memory
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory
PWC Secondary Power Board
PWS Secondary Power Board
PWX(CC03) Secondary Power Supply Board
PWX(CC04) Secondary Power Supply Board
PWX(H301) Power X DC/DC Convertor
Q
QSI High-Speed System Interface Board
R
RAM Random-Access Memory
RBC 40M Remote Optical Interface Board
ROM Read Only Memory
RSA Remote Subscriber Access
RSA RSA Control Board
RSB Remote Subscribe Frame backplane
RSM Remote Switching Module
RSP Remote Subscriber Processing Board
RST Remote T1 Interface Board
RTD Serial Port Drive Board
RXD Received Data
3
Board Manual
RX Receiver/Reception
S
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDRAM Synchronous DRAM
SIG 128-Channel Signal Tone Board
SLIC Subscriber Line Interface Circuit
SLT Clock Monitoring Board
SM Switching Module
SMB Subscriber Frame Backplane
SMS Short Messages
SMT Surface Mount Technology
SNC Small Net Control Cell
SNU Network Frame Edge Switching Netboard
SPC Service Processing Board
SPM Service Processing Module
SPT Special Voice Board
SRAM Static Random Access Memory
SRC Resources Sharing Board
SRM Specialized Resource Module
SS7 Signaling System 7
SSP Service Switching Point
STM-1 SDH Transport Module -1
STU SDH Photoelectric Interface Board
T
TCI Terminal Interface Board
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TMC STU Conversion Card
TS Time Slot
TSS Test Board
TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic
TUP Telephone User Part
TX Transmission
TXD Transmitted Data
U
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
UHW Uplink HighWay
UI Unit Interval
V
VMS Message Indicator Analog Subscriber Line Board
W
WDT Watch Dog Timer

Board Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Board Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Board Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are some of the main boards described in the document?

What are some of the main boards described in the document?

What functions do the boards serve?

What functions do the boards serve?

Index

Table of Index ............................................................................................... 1

C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System

Manual Version T2-012321-20041130-C-4.10

Product Version OVSV610R103

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,

Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China

Postal Code: 518129

All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

It introduces almost all the boards available in the C&C08 Digital

It offers an overall introduction to the C&C08 Digital SPC

It provides information for the system installation, including the

It consists of two volumes. The Troubleshooting Volume details on

Organization of the Manual

Appendix collects the acronyms and abbreviations used in the manual.

The manual is intended for the following readers:

This manual uses the following conventions:

Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.

Boldface Headings are in Boldface.

II. Keyboard operation

III. Mouse operation

Note: Means a complementary description.

C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System

Circuit Board Name Full Name Index Code

BAC (C841BAC) Bus Administration Control Board B-Intr/C841BAC

CDI (CC01CDI) Direct-Dial-In Subscriber Interface Board B-Intr/CC01CDI

DEL (CC05DEL) µ Law Analog Subscriber Board B-Intr/DEL

EMA (CC03EMA) Emergency Action Board B-Intr/EMA

FSN (C841FSN) Frame Switching Netboard B-Intr/FSN

GECP (GM11GECP) 8-Channel Echo Canceller Board B-Intr/GECP

HBC (C841HBC) Outlet Transfer Board B-Intr/HBC

LAP (CB03LAP) Protocol Processing Board B-Intr/LAP

MEM (CB01MEM) Memory Board B-Intr/MEM

Circuit Board Name Full Name Index Code

NET (CB03NET) ESM 16K Time-Slot Switch Board B-Intr/NET

OBC (C841OBC) 40M Optic Interface Board B-Intr/OBC

PWC (CC05PWC) Secondary Power Board B-Intr/PWC

QSI (C841QSI) High-Speed System Interface Board B-Intr/QSI

RBC (C841RBC) 40M Remote Optical Interface Board B-Intr/RBC

SIG (CB02SIG) 128-Channel Signal Tone Board B-Intr/SIG

TMC (C842TMC) STU Conversion Card B-Intr/TMC

VMS (CB01VMS) Message Indicator Analog Subscriber Line Board B-Intr/VMS

C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System

Language Processing Board IN01ADP

II. Main features

III. Hardware interface signal

1) Provides Clock and HW differential signal to connect the AVM.

IV. Functional principle

Figure 1 shows the functional principle of the IN01ADP.

Signal processing module

Figure 1 Functional principle of the IN01ADP

Optical isolation module: Provides the signal interface to the AVM.